AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 1-I

Transcription

1 Table of Contents Purpose of the Manual Scope Using This Manual Skill and Knowledge Requirements of the Installer Responsibility of the Various Trades Timeliness of Information...3 This voluntary specification was developed by representative members of AAMA as advisory information and published as a public service. AAMA disclaims all liability for the use, application or adaptation of materials published herein. Copyright 2015 American Architectural Manufacturers Association 1827 Walden Office Square, Suite 550, Schaumburg, IL Phone: 847/ Fax: 847/ webmaster@aamanet.org Web Site: AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 1-I

2 1.0 Introduction This standard practice addresses the installation of windows and exterior glass doors (including Hinged and Sliding Glass Doors) which are installed in commercial buildings. It includes information pertaining to both new construction and replacement projects. Important Note: Different types of windows and doors require specific installation techniques. The information provided in this manual does not supersede installation instructions provided by the manufacturer. Always consult the manufacturer's instructions and/or detailed shop drawings for information specific to each project. AAMA Standard Practice for Installation of Windows and Doors in Commercial Buildings Purpose of the Manual The specific objectives of this reference manual are to: Promote consistent, high quality installations in the commercial markets, promoting energy efficiency, decreasing installation deficiencies, maximizing product performance and minimizing callbacks, thereby lowering the overall cost to the product manufacturer and building owner; Provide employers of installers an additional method of evaluating a potential employee s knowledge; Improve the credibility of practicing installers by verifying the measurement of a specific body of knowledge; Promote installer safety practices Scope This Reference Manual addresses windows, exterior sliding glass doors and terrace doors only. Storefront and curtain wall products, profiles, and/or systems are frequently used in window and door openings, however, these applications are outside the scope of this Manual. Refer to the AAMA Aluminum Storefront and Entrance Manual SFM-1-87 and the AAMA Curtain Wall Manual MCWM-1-89 for Guide Specifications and Technical Data applicable to storefront and curtain wall products, including installation guidelines Using This Manual This manual was developed to provide information regarding the installation of windows and glass doors intended for use in commercial buildings. The manual provides an overview of information relating to: Selecting window and glass door product types and materials Product performance testing and labeling Performance requirements of windows and doors Site inspection AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 1-1

3 Specifications and codes Measuring and ordering windows Removal and installation of products Final cleaning and inspection Skill and Knowledge Requirements of the Installer This manual assumes that the installer possesses the following basic knowledge and skills: Basic measuring skills Ability to read and understand various construction documents An understanding of various building types and construction An understanding of the proper use of tools normal to the construction trade Awareness of the applicable federal, state and local codes and regulations Awareness of OSHA Safety Standards The designers and writers of this document attempted to include the basic information needed to install windows in commercial buildings. However, it was impractical to include all information related to each product and its design options. In the event that an installer has any questions or faces a situation not addressed in these materials, it is imperative that such uncertainties be resolved through consultation with the responsible parties before work is begun Responsibility of the Various Trades For the purpose of this manual, a commercial installer is defined as someone who sets, anchors and seals, and/or applies flashing and/or other accessory devices to windows and/or doors. No differentiation is expressed between a new construction installer and a replacement (retrofit) installer in this manual. Various individuals may perform many of the installer s tasks and become responsible for the completed installation. As an example, one person may apply flashing and/or accessories, another party could set and anchor the window and yet another party could apply the building façade and apply the final seal around the penetrations in the building. Objectives of this Reference Manual are noted in Paragraph The Manual is not intended to define any individual trade s scope of work, recommend appropriate trade jurisdiction on-site, pre-empt or replace union training programs or those of affiliated organizations, nor supersede manufacturers installation instructions. Although the installer is responsible for the quality of the work that he/she performs, others (building contractor, owner/ developer, architect, etc.) are often the "approving authority" or "responsible party" that may make specific decisions that affect the installation. The approving authority is responsible for coordination and checking the quality of the work done by the various trades associated with the window/door. The construction sequence, AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 1-2

4 proper coordination and proper integration of all of the various building components are essential to the long-term performance of any completed installation and are the responsibility of the approving authority Timeliness of Information Graphics and information contained in this manual were current at the time the text was written. The graphics and information may have been superseded by current versions of the standards referenced. Always check the manufacturer s instructions and current information provided by the building and window and door industry for updates. Acknowledgments This installation reference manual incorporates information and details offered by industry manufacturers and their suppliers. Much of the information provided was incorporated into the text and graphics. Gratitude is extended to each individual and the organizations they represent. Notes: AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 1-3

5 Table of Contents 2.1 Selecting the Right Window / Door Class and Grade Wind Loads Testing for Wind Loads Water Resistance Testing Water Resistance What Gives a Window Water Resistance? Factors Affecting Water Infiltration Windows and Energy Air Leakage Problems Associated with Air Leakage Rating Air Leakage Reducing Air Leakage Heat Transfer Through Conduction and Convection Problems Associated with Conduction and Convection Rating Fenestration Insulation Value Reducing Conduction and Convection Solar Heat Gain/Solar Radiation Problems Associated with Solar Heat Gain Rating Solar Heat Gain Reducing Solar Heat Gain Visible Transmittance Condensation Problems Associated with Condensation Other Factors Affecting Condensation Rating Condensation Reducing Condensation Checking HVAC Requirements Energy Efficient Glazing And Framing Considerations Low-e Coatings Tints Suspended Films Gas-Filled Units Framing Materials Spacers This voluntary specification was developed by representative members of AAMA as advisory information and published as a public service. AAMA disclaims all liability for the use, application or adaptation of materials published herein. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 Copyright 2015 American Architectural Manufacturers Association 1827 Walden Office Square, Suite 550, Schaumburg, IL Phone: 847/ Fax: 847/ webmaster@aamanet.org Web Site: PAGE 2- I

6 2.11 Sound Seismic Performance Impact Resistance Hurricane (Missile) Impact Bomb Blast and Ballistic Impact Safety Considerations Fire and Emergency Escape Safety Glass Insect Screen Safety Protection Screens Window Labels Temporary Labels Permanent Labels (Certification) Label Removal Child Safety Labels AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 2- ii

7 2.0 Design Considerations Windows and doors protect the building and its occupants from environmental forces such as wind, rain and temperature. The combination of wind pressure and driving rain can force water around the seals between the operable sash and frames, gasket joinery, weep holes, sealant joints and small pin holes in the surrounding building materials. This manual is not intended to train installers on how to select and purchase windows and doors, but to introduce some of the design considerations involved in making these decisions. 2.1 Selecting the Right Window / Door Class and Grade Window and door ratings are based on a number of performance requirements including uniform structural loading capabilities (wind load), water penetration, air infiltration and resistance to forced entry. These performance requirements are based on minimum standards established by three different trade associations including the American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA). Performance requirements and testing are defined in greater detail in Chapter 7 of this manual. AAMA rates windows and doors by performance class and performance grade based on the ability of a product to meet specific criteria. Selecting the right product class and grade is the responsibility of the architect or contractor. When selecting a window or glass door, it is very important to balance all performance criteria including air leakage, water penetration, structural adequacy, thermal performance, acoustic performance with operator type. The structural requirements dictate the window selection as they need to meet the specific performance grade or design pressure for the location, elevation and exposure. The structural requirements may sometimes also dictate a material or frame profile that conflict with aesthetics or the use of the most thermally efficient frame. This conflict may result in the relocation or revised orientation of windows and glass doors in order to meet both the structural and thermal needs of the project. When selecting products for installation on a given project, consider selecting the best products and materials to meet as closely as possible all of the specified building requirements. Other important considerations relate to cost. A client must consider performance and cost before selecting the best window or door available for the site. The architect, specifier, developer and/or builder in consultation with the client must address site-specific requirements for product selection. 2.2 Wind Loads One of the factors used in determining the correct window or door is the product's ability to withstand wind loads. Understanding wind loads and how they affect buildings is a complex issue involving a number of factors. When establishing performance expectations for a product, the specifier must consider the geographical location of the building, building exposure, terrain, the height of the building, local wind speed and other factors. These factors are used to establish a design load and performance grade (PG). The performance grade defines the minimum uniform design pressure (DP) a product must withstand in order to qualify. This pressure is expressed in pounds per square foot (psf). AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 2-1

8 2.2.1 Testing for Wind Loads Testing products for wind load resistance is typically done in a laboratory using a test chamber capable of producing both a positive and negative static pressure. A uniform load test pressure is generated causing the frame, glass and components to react in a way similar to what can be expected in the field due to actual wind pressures. When testing windows and doors, deflection readings are recorded to determine the amount of movement up to and including the full design load. A structural test pressure (STP) (1.5 times the design load for windows and doors) is also performed to achieve a factor of safety. When structural load tests are performed, additional readings are recorded to determine the amount of permanent set. Permanent set is the amount of residual deformation a unit experiences during testing. No glass breakage or permanent damage to the hardware is allowed during structural load testing. 2.3 Water Resistance Water resistance test pressures have a direct correlation to the design pressure that a product must withstand in order to meet a specific class and performance grade. The selection of the right class and performance grade is very important. Improper product selection and/or installation can result in water infiltration, which may cause damage Testing Water Resistance Windows and doors are tested for water resistance by spraying the exterior surface with water at a rate of 5 gallons per square foot/per hour. This water application rate is equivalent to a rainfall of 8 inches per hour. The test is conducted under a specified static test pressure. When applied to the window or door test sample, this static pressure simulates the load applied to a product by the actual wind. Wind-driven rain tends to force the water around the seals between the operating sash or ventilator and frame, and through weep holes. Water is typically forced from high-pressure areas into areas with lower pressure What Gives a Window Water Resistance? Typically windows and doors are designed with either compression seals or sliding seals, which are commonly called weather seals. The design of the weather seal plays an important role when considering both water penetration and air infiltration. Compression seals are generally used in projected windows, casements, some pivoted windows and others. Sliding seals are generally used in hung windows and sliding windows and doors. Compression-sealed products are often designed to be relatively airtight on the inside and are often designed with pressure-equalized cavities. Sliding seal products (such as vertical and horizontal sliding products) must be designed to allow for the sash to operate with a sliding motion; allowing for this type of operation results in seals that are typically not quite as tight as compression-sealed products. The use of these seals and the product's capability to be pressure equalized has a direct impact on the height of the inside sill leg of a product. Sliding-seal AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 2-2

9 products have an upturned sill leg on the interior side, which is generally higher than compression-seal products. Furthermore, these products often have additional features designed into their sill, which allow for the collection and drainage of water Factors Affecting Water Infiltration Manufacturers are constantly testing and developing new products for improved water performance. One solution to solving water infiltration problems is proper product selection. Understanding what can be expected of windows and doors in terms of water performance is important to the installer, regardless of whether they participate in the product selection process. It is typically the responsibility of the architect or contractor to select products for the project; however, if the installer has concerns regarding the products selected, he shall consult with the approving authority. Install only those products designed to meet the performance levels expected on the job. Comparing the water performance capabilities of the products intended for the job with the project specifications can greatly reduce the potential for water damage due to improper product selection. Use products only on projects that have performance requirements equal to, or less than, the rated performance of the product. Understanding these design parameters will help the installer install products that maintain performance at the maximum level. Performance requirements, testing and product ratings are defined in greater detail in Chapter 7. The proper selection of product ratings includes site-specific requirements that must be addressed by the architect, specifier, developer and/or builder. Obtaining the optimum performance of a product is often based on the installer's knowledge of proper installation procedures. This manual is designed to educate the installer and others on the appropriate methods of installation of windows and doors. Water can easily be forced through cracks and holes around window and door installations from pressure generated by forces such as wind (pressure differentials). Testing has shown that water can enter voids in the seals, fastener penetration holes and other cracks with minimal pressure. This is why it is important to follow the installation procedures completely and conduct a thorough check of the finished work. 2.4 Windows and Energy Many options are available to improve a product's energy performance. Learning how products lose and gain heat allows one to choose the right products for a particular job. There are three main ways that heat energy is transferred through windows and doors: Air Leakage AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 2-3

10 Conduction and Convection Solar Heat Gain 2.5 Air Leakage Air leakage, also called infiltration (see Figure 2-1), describes air flowing through and around parts of the sash and frame. In the summer, outside air brings heat from the outdoors into the building. The cooled inside air is warmed by the outside air or is lost by exfiltration to the outdoors. The incoming air can also carry moisture, which can get trapped inside the wall or raise the humidity level in the building. During winter, the opposite happens; heated air is lost to the outside and cold air is drawn indoors from the outside. Air leakage is driven by pressure. The greater the difference in pressures between the interior and exterior of a building, the higher the potential for air exchange, or leakage. Other pressure effects are less apparent. In a heated building in winter, the "stack effect" creates higher interior pressure at the top as warm air rises within the building. This pushes air up and out of cracks at the top of the building, and draws it in at the bottom. Heating and cooling duct systems and ventilation fans create pressure differences by pulling air from one part of the building and, in the case of heating and cooling ducts, supplying it to another part of the building. Doors and windows can be a pathway for air to be pulled in or pushed out by these pressures. Aside from controlling pressures in the building, air leakage can be decreased by installing relatively airtight products. Note that cracks will leak more when the product is under greater pressure (as from strong wind or high building pressure). In addition, joints may increase in size under strong pressure, allowing even more air to pass through. Over the years, windows and doors have become more and more energy efficient. Energy efficiency is accomplished in a number of ways, but one significant change has been the reduction of air infiltration through windows and doors. The allowable air infiltration per window has in many cases been reduced by 60 percent, and in some cases, as much as 90 percent from what was acceptable 20 to 30 years ago. When new energy efficient windows and doors are installed in existing buildings, remember that the existing HVAC system should be checked, and in many cases adjusted (re-balanced) to accommodate the new efficiencies. If rebalancing is not accomplished, negative pressures can be created within the building. Negative pressures can be caused when the existing HVAC unit is still trying to draw make-up air from the existing living spaces and common areas, yet there is less volume allowed from around the windows. When the allowable air infiltration is reduced in volume, a higher pressure (negative) is created within the structure. The make-up air must come from some place and will typically come from other small holes or cracks in other places AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 2-4

11 around the building. This often causes whistling and howling noises and water infiltration in places that never occurred in the history of the building before. Although it is not the responsibility of the window/door installer to adjust the HVAC system, advise the approving authority that the newly installed energy efficient products may require the adjustment of the HVAC system. Rebalancing can often result in significant energy savings Problems Associated with Air Leakage Heat loss in winter Heat gain in summer Occasional increased indoor humidity in summer, which in turn increases cooling requirements Drafts and discomfort for the occupants Higher utility bills Rating Air Leakage New windows and doors are often rated for air leakage. This is based on a measurement of the cubic feet per minute (CFM) of air that flows through a windows and doors in relation to its total square foot area. Improper installation adds to a product's air leakage. Take care to follow the manufacturers' instructions and the guidelines in this manual to avoid creating new passages for air flow Reducing Air Leakage The 101 standard/specification limits air leakage rates for specific operator types and classifications. Install the products properly and seal them to the building air or vapor barrier (if provided), or to the accessory materials used on the given project. Consider the particular climate and conditions. A low air-leakage rating may be particularly important for a product installed in a harsh climate or in the path of strong prevailing winds. AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 2-5

12 Figure 2-1 Air Infiltration and Exfiltration 2.6 Heat Transfer Through Conduction and Convection Another way heat passes through a window or door is by conduction. Imagine holding a hot coffee mug; the outside of the mug will feel warm because heat from the coffee passes through the solid mug. This is conduction, the passage of heat through a solid material from molecule to molecule. If the mug is a tin cup, it cannot be held for long because metal transfers heat more quickly than ceramic or foam. The same principle applies to windows. Heat passes through the glass and frame. The composition of the window will determine how quickly the heat passes through. Window thermal performance is also affected by another heat transfer mechanism called convection. Convection is the transfer of heat by the movement of gases or liquid. As warm air inside a building comes in contact with a cold window, it cools and sinks, creating a convection current of air past the window. On the outside, wind blows against the glass. In both cases, this air movement on the surface of the glass disturbs the air film next to the glass, which is a component of the window's insulating value. Still air is a good insulator, but moving air is not, so convection currents cause quicker conduction of heat through the window. Conduction is driven by temperature differences. When there is a difference in temperature from one side of the product to the other, heat will pass through the glass and frame. Heat transmission increases when there is a greater temperature difference between the inside and outside (see Figure 2-2). Manufacturers can improve a product's insulating value with multiple lites, gas fills, low-e coatings and improved frames and spacers. All of these slow down the conduction of heat through the window/door (see Figure 2-2). Installers can help maintain this resistance to conduction by installing the window or door in such a manner that the entire building's weather barrier is continuous. AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 2-6

13 Figure 2-2 Conduction and Convection Problems Associated with Conduction and Convection Heat loss in winter Heat gain in summer Higher utility bills Discomfort felt by occupants sitting near a cold surface in winter (often misperceived as draftiness) Condensation on the product is often caused when warm air from inside the building contacts a cold window or door surface in winter Rating Fenestration Insulation Value Insulating value is rated in terms of U-factor, which indicates the rate at which heat flows through a product for each degree of temperature difference between one side and the other. (U-factor is the inverse of R-value - that is, U-factor = 1/R-value.) The whole product U-factor, as determined in accordance with AAMA 1503, accounts for heat flow through the entire assembly, including the frame. This is important to consider, as the glass edges and frame usually have higher U-factors (faster heat transmission) than the center of the glass. The lower the U- factor, the greater a window's resistance to heat flow and the better its insulating value Reducing Conduction and Convection The needs of the particular building owner and climate where the products will be used must be considered. The lower the U-factor, the greater the energy savings will be. Lower U-factors result in improved energy efficiency in both summer and winter. However, in very hot climates, blocking solar heat gain can be more important for keeping the building cool in summer. It is also important to balance solar heat gain and U-Factor, or minimizing heat flow through the fenestration, for keeping the building cool and minimizing energy costs. AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 2-7

14 2.7 Solar Heat Gain/Solar Radiation The third major mode of heat transfer through windows and doors is solar heat gain radiation. Radiation is the transfer of heat from one solid to another through electromagnetic waves. It is the movement of heat through space without being conducted from molecule to molecule (conduction) or carried in a gas or liquid (convection). For instance, radiant heat can be felt by facing a campfire, although the surrounding air is still cold. All body parts within "sight" of the fire's heat will be warmed, but those parts away from the fire will remain cool. Objects are constantly radiating heat to other objects. In fact, people radiate heat to cooler objects around them, including cold windows and doors. This radiant heat loss from living bodies can have a significant effect on comfort. But the biggest source of radiant energy is the sun. When the sun's radiation strikes glass, some of it is reflected back outside, some is absorbed and the rest passes through the glass to the inside of the building. How much solar radiation passes through a product depends on the time of year (see Figure 2-3), the direction the product faces, how much external shading there is and the ability of the glass to reflect solar heat. In the winter, solar heat gain is usually welcome, as it adds heat to the building. However, in the summer, solar heat gain through south-, west- and east-facing windows and doors is usually a major source of heat buildup. Windows and doors with tints, suspended films and spectrally selective low-e coatings keep more solar radiation out of the building than products with single pane clear glass. Figure 2-3 Summer/Winter Path of Sun (Typical U.S. 20º-40º Latitude) Problems Associated with Solar Heat Gain Heat gain in summer Discomfort for occupants sitting in the path of solar heat gain through the glass Fading of drapes and upholstery from the sun's radiation AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 2-8

15 2.7.2 Rating Solar Heat Gain The solar heat gain coefficient (SHGC) indicates the percentage of solar radiation that passes through a product (including the frame). The glass, however, has a much more significant impact on the SHGC than the type of frame material. Shown in Table 2-1 are various SHGC values using different glazing options. The products with the lowest SHGC keep the most direct solar heat out of the building. Solar Heat Glazing Type Gain Visible Coefficient Transmittance (SHGC) Clear Glass % Low E Hard Coat (e ù 0.20) Low E Soft Coat (e ù 0.08) Spectrally Selective Low E 1/8 Bronze Reflective % % % % Table 2-1 Solar Heat Gain and Visible Transmittance through Various Types of Glazing Reducing Solar Heat Gain The local climate and conditions must be considered. Solar gain is not as significant for north-facing products. For south-, west- and east-facing products, consider purchasing products with a low SHGC in hot climates. The placement of windows and doors in the building to take advantage of solar gain in cold and mixed climates must be considered. South-facing windows and doors capture the most winter sun, and overhangs (see Figure 2-4), and sunscreens can help keep the higher summer sun from striking glazing products. A low SHGC decreases solar heat gain in winter as well as summer. A lower SHGC is important in warm climates where summer cooling is more significant than winter heating. However, in very cold climates, it may be beneficial to choose a window with a higher SHGC. Glass that restricts solar heat gain often restricts visible light from passing through the product as well. Consider spectrally selective glazing products that let in the wavelengths of visible light while blocking out the wavelengths of solar energy that carry only heat. Use external shading (awnings, landscaping, sunscreens) to reduce the amount of solar radiation from reaching the window or door. AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 2-9

16 Insulating glass with suspended films that have metallic oxide coatings are designed to manage solar heat gain (see Sections 2.10 and ) The commercialization of switchable dynamic glazing technologies allow for changes in the SHGC through changing environmental conditions over the course of the day. This provides maximization of benefits of solar heat gain reductions yet allows changes in visible light transmission in low light conditions. Figure 2-4 Effect of an Overhang during Summer 2.8 Visible Transmittance One of the main purposes for putting windows in a building is to provide daylight and a view for the occupants within. However, some characteristics that increase the energy efficiency of windows can decrease their ability to perform this task. For instance, double pane glass allows a little bit less daylight to come through the window than single pane glass. While this amount of reduction in Visible Transmittance (VT) is hardly noticeable, tints and films can further decrease the VT. A lower solar heat gain coefficient usually comes with the trade-off of lower visible transmittance. However, new technology allows manufacturers to make windows with the best of both worlds. Spectrally selective glass maintains high transmittance of visible light wavelengths while restricting wavelengths that are primarily heat. In some cases it is not important to have high VT. Some people like the extra privacy afforded by a darkly tinted window and don't mind the decrease in light transmission, especially in very sunny, hot areas. In office buildings, where controlling glare is very important, a low VT is often desirableit is important to disperse light throughout the internal space of the structure. The VT rating indicates the percentage of visible light hitting the window that is transmitted through to the inside. It is expressed as a value between 0 and 1. The VT of windows and doors can be provided for the entire window/door, including the frame or the glass alone, which will show a higher percentage of light transmittance. AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 2-10

17 2.9 Condensation Windows and doors (even relatively efficient ones) usually have higher U-factors than insulated walls, ceilings, and floors. In winter, this means the interior sides of windows and doors are usually colder than other surfaces of the building. This makes them a prime target for condensation, which occurs when warm moist air comes in contact with a cooler surface (see Figure 2-5). Windows don t cause condensation and there are no condensation-free windows. When condensation occurs (or has the potential to occur), it is dependent on a number of factors. Warm air can hold more moisture than cool air. The warm air cools as it hits the frame and glass, and the water vapor condenses out. The colder the interior plane of the window, the more likely water will condense there. Condensation is visible on glass because the moisture cannot pass through it like more porous materials such as wood, drywall or brick. AAMA provides humidity level guidelines, tables and additional condensation information in other related technical publications (refer to the AAMA Publication Store at Air leakage can also contribute to condensation problems. If warm moist interior air leaks through cracks around the window or door in winter, condensation can occur within the wall cavity, causing mold to grow on the wall and window frame, potentially leading to material degradation. In buildings where windows are being replaced, this is another good reason to re-balance the HVAC system. Another place where condensation can occur is between the panes of a double pane unit of glass. This is an indication that the seal that holds the panes together has failed. Seal failure may allow insulating gases to escape and permit moist air to penetrate the air cavity, thus reducing the energy efficiency of the window or door. The glass often becomes cloudy, obstructing the view, and the glass generally needs to be replaced. (See Section for window condensation ratings.) AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 2-11

18 Figure 2-5 Causes of Condensation Problems Associated with Condensation Small amounts of condensation on the coldest days are not a major problem. However, severe condensation has been reported to cause health concerns and cosmetic or even structural damage to a building. Condensation can contribute to the growth of mold, discoloring the product assembly and may trigger allergies in sensitive people. Condensation can damage painted surfaces and promote rot in wood members. Condensation can damage not only the window or door, but also the wall in which it is installed. Install products in areas susceptible to condensation that won t support mold growth, deteriorate or discolor Other Factors Affecting Condensation Since condensation is associated with windows and doors, it is often the products that are seen as the "problem." However, condensation can actually be the result of any number of factors, including: Relative humidity (invisible water vapor) found inside the building The control of humidity or the amount of moisture in the air (especially in hospitals, museums and other commercial buildings where the humidity levels are exceedingly high) The type of building materials used (wood, concrete and wallboard all release moisture). The length of time the building was exposed to moisture (rain) before it was closed up. This can trap moisture within the building Plants, cooking activities, showers, non-vented fireplace use and even breathing releases moisture into the building Interior temperature Pressures that increase air leakage (re-balance the HVAC system) Outdoor humidity and temperature Solar radiation The direction the product faces Rating Condensation The Condensation Resistance Factor (CRF), developed by AAMA, allows window purchasers to compare the potential for serious condensation on different products (see AAMA 1503, "Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows"). Selecting a proper CRF involves determining the average inside relative humidity and the exterior design temperature. The exterior design temperature can be obtained using ASHRAE tables, which give city-by-city numbers. AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 2-12

19 2.9.4 Reducing Condensation The window or door purchaser or the installer cannot address most of the factors causing condensation. However, one can choose a product that minimizes the likelihood of the problems, especially in buildings or rooms that are prone to condensation problems. In general, bathroom and kitchen windows are most prone to condensation where humidity is higher due to the use of showers, dryers, and cooking devices. Especially for these areas, the following precautions can be taken: Windows and doors can be selected with a low U-factor. Windows and doors can be selected with warm-edge spacers and insulating frames to help reduce condensation. Non-thermal metal frames (frames without thermal barriers), which conduct heat quickly, can be avoided. Frames with a high Condensation Resistance Factor can be selected. Building owners may install and use exhaust fans in bathrooms and kitchens to remove excessive interior moisture, and to avoid adding more humidity in winter. Single pane glass is prone to condensation. Products with lower U-factors (such as double pane glass and glazing products with gas fills and low-e coatings) have a warmer interior surface in winter, which reduces condensation. However, because the heat transfer is greater at the edges of the glass, some of these products may still experience condensation around the edge. Products with "warm-edge spacers" and insulated frames can help keep the inside surfaces of the whole assembly warmer, thereby reducing condensation Checking HVAC Requirements When replacing drafty, single glazed non-thermal windows and doors within existing buildings, it is the responsibility of the building owners to have the HVAC requirements checked and re-balanced (see Section 2.5). Using the relatively airtight products available on the market today can have an impact on the heating/air conditioning requirements of a building; therefore, some energy savings may be available. It is the responsibility of the building owner to advise tenants that because air changes will not occur as frequently within an airtight building, the potential for trapping moisture-laden air is much more significant. This, too, will have an impact on the occurrence of condensation. Some building codes require a specified number of air changes within the building. It is the responsibility of the approving authority and the building owner to check the requirements to determine if another means of allowing for building air exchanges is necessary Energy Efficient Glazing And Framing Considerations To improve the efficiency of windows and doors, manufacturers often offer a number of options which have an impact on the glass and frame. They can customize a product to achieve specific performance values of conduction resistance, solar heat gain, visible transmittance, condensation resistance and air leakage. Some of the improvements may be applied to the glass, such as low-emittance (low-e) coatings and tints, while others occur within the glass unit such as suspended films and gas fills. The frame and glass edge can be improved by AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 2-13

20 using less conductive materials, designing in a thermal break, or using warm-edge spacers between the lites of glass Low-e Coatings A low-e coating is a translucent microscopic metal oxide layer applied to a surface of one or more lites of glass. The coating allows certain wavelengths of radiation to pass through more easily than others. A low-e coating can improve the insulating value of a window or door as much as adding a third lite of glass. A typical hightransmission low-e coating lets in heat from the sun, but helps reflect the building's heat back inside. These coatings are excellent for cold climates, and are particularly useful for south-facing windows and doors. Coatings are frequently placed on the inside of the exterior lite of glass (see surface #2 in Figure 2-6). Some windows have spectrally selective low-e coatings. These windows are good for mixed climates where both heating and cooling are needed. They help restrict the heat energy from the sun but allow much of the light to come through, which is beneficial in summer, and keeps the building's heat from radiating outside, which is beneficial in winter (see Figure 2-7). Figure 2-6 Anatomy of an IG Unit AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 2-14

21 Figure 2-7 Low-e Coatings Winter and Summer Tints Various tints are available to reduce glare from the outside on sunny days and to reduce the amount of solar gain through the glass. If applied films are installed, advise the approving authority that tinting plastic films are available; however, building owners should be aware that tinting may result in increased heat build-up within the glass lites, thus increasing the potential for glass breakage due to heat stress. Some window and door manufacturers will consider their glass warranties void if such tinted films are applied to their products. There are two three types of tints: Tints that restrict light as well as heat gain. These are typically the bronze and gray tints. Tints that reduce heat gain while allowing more light than other tints to be transmitted into the building are called spectrally selective. These tints typically appear light blue or green. Switchable dynamic glazing offers changeable tints as sunlight conditions change. These reduce solar heat gain, maximize VT and reduce or eliminate the need for blinds and light diffusion materials that are used to control glare. Reflective coatings or films are also often used for commercial buildings to reduce glare and heat gain. These are similar to reflective (mirror) coatings used on sunglasses. Like standard tinted glazing, these coatings can reduce light and visibility through the window Suspended Films Low emissivity suspended films can also be an option in applications where energy efficiency and improved comfort are a consideration. This option involves the use of wavelength-selective films (see Figure 2-8) which are suspended between the layers of glass. The films block out most of the unwanted ultraviolet (UV) waves, while controlling solar heat gain and keeping the buildings interior heat inside. Suspended films are available with a number of options, including the use of warm-edge spacers, gas fills and multiple lites of glass. AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 2-15

22 Figure 2-8 Suspended Films Gas-Filled Units The dead-air space between panes in double- or triple-paned glass lowers its U-factor. In a standard, doublepane window or door, it is the still air between the panes, as well as the film of air on the outside surfaces of the glass, that provides most of the insulating value. To further improve thermal performance, manufacturers often fill the space between the panes with inert and nontoxic gases that insulate better than air. Inert gases typically used are: Argon common and relatively inexpensive, is designed for insulating glazing units with gas spaces between 3/8 and 5/8. Krypton more effective than argon, but more expensive, is designed for insulating glazing units with gas spaces 3/8 or smaller Framing Materials The frame material and style also have an effect on a product's energy efficiency. In double-pane windows and doors, conduction is often higher through the frame than through the glass. Frame materials are discussed further in Chapter Spacers Many variations of edge design have been tried over the years. Currently the design most used by manufacturers incorporates spacers and polymer sealants. A spacer separates the layers of glass, and sealant is applied around the entire perimeter. A desiccant is included in the spacer to absorb any residual moisture between the lites after sealing the perimeter (see Figure 2-9). In connection with the sealant, the spacer performs several functions. It helps to accommodate stress induced by thermal expansion and pressure differences; it resists the passage of water vapor into the space between the AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 2-16

23 lites; and it helps keep any insulating gases, such as argon or krypton, from leaking out. Some examples of spacers are: Aluminum Stainless steel Improved design metal Insulating silicone foam, extruded vinyl or pultruded fiberglass Thermal breaks/barriers incorporated into metal spacers Figure 2-9 Warm Edge Insulating Glass Spacers 2.11 Sound Commercial windows and doors are sometimes rated for sound transmission. An Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Class (OITC) rating provides a single number rating for transportation noise. A Sound Transmission Class (STC) rating provides a single number rating for use with speech, radio, television and similar sources of noise through interior partitions. The higher the sound rating, the more isolation the products will provide against noise. The sound rating of an assembly can be increased by using products with low air infiltration rates. AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 2-17

24 Insulating glass units with unequal glass thickness, laminated glass or gas fills can also be used to improve the acoustical performance. A storm window can be added to a prime window, or a dual window system could be used to increase the sound rating. Proper installation and sealing of windows and doors is also important. The performance of an installed product can be affected by the surrounding wall and building construction Seismic Performance Certain areas of the country are prone to seismic movement caused by earthquakes. Commercial projects may have the added requirement of seismic performance, which is the ability to handle specific amounts of movement. Whenever buildings are located in areas where this kind of movement is expected, consider the use of special designs which will address seismic requirements. When products are required to withstand seismic movement, the job specifications will clearly state the expected performance criterion and include the anticipated amount of movement between floors both horizontally and vertically. Window and door designers can allow for this kind of movement by using accessories and special anchor clips. Always consult with the manufacturer to determine the additional precautions necessary to ensure the installed system will perform as intended. For more information on seismic performance and testing, obtain a copy of AAMA and Impact Resistance The ability of glass and frames to resist various types of impact is becoming more and more prevalent. There are basically two types of impact a product may be required to sustain. They involve either natural hazards due to storms or man made hazards like bomb blasts and ballistics Hurricane (Missile) Impact After several disastrous hurricanes recently struck in south Florida and other costal areas, building code officials responded by developing and adopting requirements for both small and large missile impact caused by wind born debris. To meet these requirements, window/door manufacturers test their products to meet various missile types and a range of cyclical loads up to and including design load. Impact resistance tests involve shooting a wood 2x4 or pieces of steel through cannons designed to hit the window or doo in specific areas. Once the product is impacted, cyclical static loads are applied. Products must be able to withstand the impact and all cyclical loading without the glass falling out of the frame, or tearing more than a specified amount in order to meet the performance requirements. AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 2-18

25 Bomb Blast and Ballistic Impact Bomb blast and ballistic resistance (gun fire) are two other optional tests performed on windows and doors. Units requiring bomb blast and ballistic resistance are more prevalent in government office buildings and other high risk projects. The type of product used in these types of buildings will be based on the severity of the blast or ballistic requirements. For these projects, glazing is commonly made up of a series of glass lites incorporating an interlayer. Films are also sometimes field-applied to the glass. Consult with the original glass supplier before applying films to existing glass Safety Considerations There are several critical safety issues that impact the design and function of various windows and doors: Fire and Egress Safety Glass Insect Screen Safety Security Screens (Protection Screens) Fire and Emergency Escape Building codes usually specify that all bedrooms in the first three stories of a building need at least one operable window or exterior door approved for emergency escape or rescue. This escape path must open directly onto a public street, alley, yard or court. An emergency escape window (also known as an egress window) must be operable from the inside without the use of tools. (Egress requirements are covered in greater detail in Section 9.4.) Safety Glass Most codes require safety glass where a window or door (with glass) may be subject to human impact. (Safety glass is covered in more detail in Chapter 9, Section 9.5.) Insect Screen Safety Insect screens prevent the passage of insects, not children. In multi-story commercial buildings, the latches that keep the screens in place may allow for easy removal for cleaning and storage. These latches will not hold up under the weight of a small child. Additionally, screen mesh can be cut, torn, and kicked out of the screen retainer tracks. Thousands of children are injured or die in the United States due to accidental falls from unprotected window openings. If the building owner asks about screen safety, recommend the following: Whenever possible, open the windows from the top rather than the bottom. If the windows are opened from the bottom, only open them 4" or less. AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 2-19

26 Do not place furniture that a child could climb on in front of an unguarded window. In high-rise buildings, consider using window guards to protect children from falls. If window guards are installed, make sure they are made of strong materials, installed correctly and in accordance with local building and/or fire codes. Never attach a child protection guard to a window frame that is rotten or loose. Remember that window screens are meant to deter insects, not children. They can give a false sense of security and are not meant to prevent a child from falling Protection Screens In areas where security is important, protection screens (also known as security screens) can be applied over the openings on the lower floors to keep intruders out. They can also be applied to windows on upper floors to protect against glass breakage due to flying debris. Screens are typically offered in three classes defined as light, medium, or heavy. The ratings are based on the level of protection desired and the screen s ability to meet specific test criteria. Although these protection screens are great for keeping unwanted people out and avoiding glass breakage, protection screens and padlocks can also be a hindrance to fire department personnel who are trying to gain access to the building. Building owners must weigh the importance of intruder protection, while considering the ability of firemen to enter (or escape from) the burning building. Always consult with local codes for egress requirements. Installers must also be aware of problems caused by improperly attaching screens to the window frames. Attaching screens to the window frames may cause both improper operation and water infiltration. Whenever possible, attach the protection screen to the surrounding construction Window Labels AAMA provides uniform ways to evaluate products for performance. Labels provide the information needed by the designer, installer and consumer to compare performance ratings, as well as its physical specifications and compliance with standards Temporary Labels Many new windows and doors carry temporary labels that indicate the energy specifications for the product. AAMA WINS Label At the request of building code officials, AAMA developed a new temporary label. The AAMA Window Inspection and Notification System (WINS) label may include information on product ratings, anchoring AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 2-20

27 requirements, installation instructions and special product qualifications, such as approval by local code evaluation services Permanent Labels (Certification) Permanent labels provide for performance and manufacturer tracking for the life of the window. The labels are typically attached in a location unseen when the window is closed. AAMA also provides the test procedures and laboratory accreditation necessary to rate windows for permanent labels. AAMA Window Certification Label The certification label shows that the window complies with a certain class and minimum grade (its ability to withstand wind loads, and meets a given water resistance and air infiltration rate). Independent third-party laboratories (accredited by AAMA) test the performance of windows and doors for the manufacturer, following test procedures outlined in the standard/specification known as ANSI/AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/1.S. 2/A440 08, or its current successor. The AAMA label (see Figure 2-10) has a four-part code, which indicates the product type, performance class, performance grade and maximum size tested. The product type indicates the window style, such as casement window or hinged glass doors. The performance class shows the type of building for which the window was designed. The performance grade gives the design pressure. In order to obtain an AAMA label, windows must meet the minimum design pressure for their performance class. Windows can also be tested at higher pressures to receive a higher design pressure (grade) rating. Use the performance grade to check the rated performance of a product against the required structural performance in the architectural specifications. The maximum size tested may seem like a minor detail when looking at a window's label. However, the size of the window can have a great effect on its structural capability. Figure 2-10 Sample AAMA Label Label Removal The AAMA certification label is permanent and is to be left on the window. The label is usually located on the inside of the frame, where it is out of sight when the window is closed. Comment [r1]: Label example should be updated. Staff Update AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 2-21

28 Temporary labels, or labels from other state or local organizations, are removed after the window is inspected. When removing temporary labels, follow the manufacturer s instructions. Use extreme caution when using razor blades to remove labels as they can scratch the glass and they can also cause bodily injury Child Safety Labels Most new window screens, such as insect screens and sunscreens, carry a child safety label, indicating a fall hazard warning. This label indicates that the screen is not a safety device to prevent children from falling out. The label is permanent and is affixed to the screen frame where it can be seen when the window is open. Examples of screen labels are shown below (see Figure 2-11). Notes: Figure 2-11 Child Safety Label AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 2-22

29 Table of Contents 3.1 Window Components Wall Framing Around Windows Window Materials Characteristics of Window Frame Materials...3 This voluntary specification was developed by representative members of AAMA as advisory information and published as a public service. AAMA disclaims all liability for the use, application or adaptation of materials published herein. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 Copyright 2015 American Architectural Manufacturers Association 1827 Walden Office Square, Suite 550, Schaumburg, IL Phone: 847/ Fax: 847/ webmaster@aamanet.org Web Site: PAGE 3- I

30

31 3.1 Window Components Windows have many components, and often each one has two or more common names. The main parts of most window assemblies (see Figure 3-1) include: Glazing: The glass in a window. Sometimes the glass is tempered for safety and sometimes it is coated for energy efficiency. It may include layers of plastic as well as glass. Insulating Glass (IG Unit): Typically two sheets/lites of glass separated by a spacer and sealed. Also referred to as double glazing and double pane. Can also be comprised of three or more layers and multiple spacer systems. Sash: The fixed or movable part of the window in which the panes of glass are set. Most operable sliding windows have two or more sash. Frame (Jambs): The frame usually consists of two vertical members (side jambs) and two horizontal members, (head at the top and sill at the bottom) which hold the sash. Frames are made from steel, aluminum, fiberglass (FRP), plastic, wood or a combination of these materials. Casing (Brick Mold): Typically found in wood installations where the interior and exterior trim molding attached to the window frame. The interior casing is usually a flat decorative molding; one edge is nailed to the frame and the other to the wall. The casing covers the gap between the jamb and the rough opening (the hole in the wall). The exterior casing, sometimes called brick mold, attaches to the window frame and covers the exterior side of the gap around the rough opening. In replacement applications, new panning and trim are often applied to cover the existing brick mold. Sills: The sill member is commonly a piece of trim used at the bottom of the window at the sill condition to cover the transition between the window and the brick or limestone. Stool: Stool members can be made of a variety of materials like wood, marble, slate, etc., and is used to cover the rough wall framing under the window. Mullions (Integral Mull): Mullions commonly form the division between two or more windows. These members generally act as the structural component between window units in large openings. Muntins: Dividers in or on a light of glass which are either exterior (outside of the glass on the exterior face), internal (within the insulating glass airspace), interior (on the inside of the glass on the interior face) or true (actually divide the glass into small lights). Other Window Components: In addition, windows are usually manufactured with stops, parting strips, rails, latches, locks, pulleys, handles for opening and other accessories (see Glossary). AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 3-1

32 Figure 3-1 Window Components 3.2 Wall Framing Around Windows It's also important to know the parts of the wall framing around the window for buildings and other types of structures. In wood-framed or steel-framed stud walls, the window interrupts the regular pattern of studs (vertical wall framing members) in the wall, and some extra wall framing is used to provide structural support and allow for window attachment (see Figure 3-2). In masonry walls, brick, block, and steel form the opening for the window. King Stud: A full-length stud nailed to the end of the window header on either side of the window rough opening. Trimmer Stud: A shorter stud, which supports the header; it runs from the sole plate up to the bottom of the header. Cripple Studs: An even shorter set of studs which run from the sole plate to the rough sill. The rough sill rests on top of the cripple studs. If a full height header is not used, cripple studs may extend from atop the header to the top plate. Header: In wood-framing construction, the header supports the load transferred from the floor and/or roof structure above. This load is then transferred to the trimmers adjacent to the window or door opening. The header must be designed to carry this load without allowing for excessive deflection of the framing, which can result in loads being transferred to the window frame. A licensed Professional Engineer should always design headers. Lintel: In masonry construction, the lintel is commonly made of steel or stone, and supports the load transferred from the floor and/or roof structure above. This load is then transferred to the walls adjacent to the window or door AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 3-2

33 opening. The lintel, which performs a similar function to the header in wood or steel fram construction, must be designed to carry this load without excessive deflection, which can result in loads being transferred to the window frame. A licensed Professional Engineer should always design lintels. 3.3 Window Materials Figure 3-2 Wall Framing Materials Characteristics of Window Frame Materials Thermally Broken Aluminum To produce aluminum frame components, aluminum in the form of billets or logs is forced through a steel die under extreme pressure. The aluminum exiting the die takes on the shape of the hole in the die and is called an extrusion. Fixed windows can be built from a single extrusion of aluminum, but more complex windows are assembled from a number of separately extruded components. The operable and fixed head, jamb, sill and interlock pieces may all be different extrusions, each designed to meet the structural and functional requirements of the entire window frame. Thermally broken aluminum frames improve energy performance by incorporating a low conductance material separation in the extrusion. Vinyl Vinyl window components or extrusions, are formed by melting vinyl powder or pellets and pushing this through a die to form the shape and then through calibrators to control the critical dimensions. The extrusions may include AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 3-3

34 several hollow chambers designed to trap air increasing the energy performance and improving the sound transmission qualities. The internal chambers contribute to the strength of the profile and in many instances the chambers are critical to the formation of water drainage paths allowing efficient evacuation to the exterior. Vinyl when extruded is pre-colored and finished, needing no further finishing steps. The color can be continuous through the entire profile or co-extruded onto predetermined surfaces as a cap-stock. In either scenario, the finishes are resistant to ultra-violet degradation and unaffected and impervious to exposure to salt and other environmental conditions. Rigid vinyl profiles emit ultra-low quantities of volatile organic compounds, if detected at all. Similar to many materials, vinyl will expand and contract through temperature cycling. The design, construction and installation of vinyl windows and doors work together to accommodate any movement, allowing for quality long term performance. Like aluminum frames, vinyl window frames are extrusions. The extrusions may include several internal hollow chambers; these chambers also trap air, increasing the energy performance and improving the sound-deadening qualities of the frame. In general, the more internal chambers, the stronger and more energy efficient the vinyl frame will be. Wood Wood frames are usually made from coniferous trees. A few specialty products use hardwoods. All wood parts for windows and doors (except inside stops and trim) are treated with a water repellent preservative after machining. Window manufacturers mill raw lumber into intricate, interlocking strips that are assembled into window frames. A modern wood window is often composed of finger-jointed wood pieces, reserving precious straight-grain solid wood for the visible areas. Hardware, weather-stripping and design improvements minimize wood-to-wood contact, allowing modern wood windows to slide smoothly and provide a tight seal from the elements. Fiberglass To form fiberglass frames, glass strands are combined with polyester resins to form a composite substance. Several fabrication methods are used to form finished shapes of high strength and stability. Fiberglass window frames are commonly made using the pultrusion process: fiber strands are pulled through a resin bath, preformed and aligned, then placed in a heated die where they cure and harden to shape. Relatively new to the window market, fiberglass frames are structurally strong, expand and contract very little with temperature changes, and are good thermal insulators. NOTE: For more information on the expansion and contraction of various materials, see Chapter 17, Section Composite Materials AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 3-4

35 There are several composite materials emerging into the window and door industry. The most common products are: Wood/plastic composites Cellular PVC ABS/ASA profiles Wood/Plastic Composites A manufactured composite material which consists of fine wood waste (wood fiber) mixed with plastic resins. This wood waste/resin material can be transformed by heat and pressure into almost any shape. Cellular PVC An engineered cellular (foam) PVC; it is extruded by two processes called free foam and Celluka. The free foam process results in a softer outer skin while the Celluka process creates a tough outer skin. Cellular vinyl can also be co-extruded with rigid vinyl or other materials on pre-determined exterior surfaces, also referred to as capstock. In cross section, many cellular vinyl components are solid and can be processed similar to wood. The solid areas appear as a micro-structure of small bubbles, trapping air to contribute to thermal performance and adding strength to extrusion. Cellular vinyl shares many properties and attributes with rigid vinyl in terms of pre-finished colors and performance characteristics. An engineered cellular (foam) PVC; it is extruded by two processes: free foam and cellular. Free foam has a softer skin, but the cellular process creates a tougher outer skin much like the hardness of wood. ABS/ASA Profiles An engineered plastic composite featuring an ABS profile with an ASA capstock. This product has been used for years in the automotive industry. Other Framing Materials (Hybrids) Any of the above frame materials may be combined to make hybrid frames. For instance, interior wood strips are sometimes attached to an aluminum frame to combine the exterior weathering, strength and weight properties of aluminum with a natural wood interior finish. New products combining various materials are appearing as manufacturing processes evolve and improve. Notes: AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 3-5

36 AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 3-6

37 Table of Contents 4.1 Determining Window Types Hung Windows (Single/Double/Triple Hung) Vertical Sliding Windows Horizontal Sliding Windows Awning/Hopper/Projected and Casement Windows Vertically and Horizontally Pivoted Windows Side Hinged (In-swinging) Windows Top Hinged (In-swinging) Windows Dual Action Windows Hinged Egress Windows Dual Windows Jalousie Windows Jal/Awning Windows Tropical Awning Windows Specialty Windows Fixed Windows Combination Windows Miscellaneous Window Hardware...9 This voluntary specification was developed by representative members of AAMA as advisory information and published as a public service. AAMA disclaims all liability for the use, application or adaptation of materials published herein. Copyright 2015 American Architectural Manufacturers Association 1827 Walden Office Square, Suite 550, Schaumburg, IL Phone: 847/ Fax: 847/ webmaster@aamanet.org Web Site: AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 4-i

38 4.0 Types of Windows And Related Hardware 4.1 Determining Window Types When determining a window type, a client s needs must be the first consideration. Appearance, energy performance, ventilation capability, egress requirements and ease of cleaning all play a role in selecting the most appropriate type of window for a project. A window s design can determine how much ventilation it provides. Windows that open wider allow more air to pass into or out of the building. Casement windows, when fully open, tend to direct the most air into the house. Hung windows can provide ventilation through only half the total window area. However, double hung windows allow ventilation both near the top and near the bottom of the wall. Many windows are designed specifically for ease of cleaning. For instance, pivoted windows turn around so the outside surface faces in. Other windows feature a combination of opening capabilities; they can be opened one way for ventilation, or can be tilted in for cleaning. Most of the following window-type categories are those used by AAMA when setting standards and test specifications. 4.2 Hung Windows (Single/Double/Triple Hung) Hung windows typically have two sash in a single frame. In double hung windows, both sash move up and down, while in single hung windows only the bottom sash moves. Triple hung windows have three sash and typically provide a larger ventilation area. Double and triple hung windows can provide both high and low ventilation to a room (see Figure 4-1). Hung windows differ from other vertically sliding windows in that they have a counter-balancing mechanism to offset the weight of the sash when opening and when keeping the window open. In older windows, the lower sash is generally attached to a rope on either side, which runs through a pulley in the top of the side jambs. A weight on the end of the rope inside the jamb counteracts gravity to keep an open window sash from falling closed. Newer windows may have a spiral sash balance, a spring balance, a block and tackle balance, a tape spring balance, or a constant force type balance. A spiral sash balance consists of a tube, coiled spring and spiral rod located inside the jambs. The spring allows the rod to extend and retract as the sash is moved, and ensures that the sash is correctly balanced in all positions. The sash can remain stationary at any desired position. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 1

39 Spring balances are sometimes used for architectural and heavy commercial windows. They consist of an inner torsion spring surrounded by an outer extension spring; both are enclosed in a tube. They can be very effective for extremely heavy windows. The block and tackle balance has a spring attached to a block. A nylon cord or metal cable passes around the pulleys and over a roller at the top of the frame and is attached to the sash. Tape spring balances consist of a coiled tape. The tape housings mount in the head or jambs of the frame, and the ends of the tape are connected to the top or bottom of the sash at the jambs. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 2

40 Figure 4-1 Window Types AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 3

41 4.3 Vertical Sliding Windows Vertical sliders have two or more sash in a frame. One sash may move and the other remains fixed, or two or more sash may slide. Unlike conventional single hung or double hung windows, operable sash are held open by mechanical means rather than with a balance and pulley system. 4.4 Horizontal Sliding Windows Horizontal sliders have two or more sash in a frame. They may have one moving sash and one fixed sash, two sliding sash on either side of a fixed one, or two adjacent sash may slide by each other. Sash rollers usually provide low friction sliding (see Figure 4-1). Operable and fixed sash can usually be determined by the use of the symbol X for operable or O for fixed. Thus a three lite slider that is marked OXO would be fixed, operable, fixed respectively. 4.5 Awning/Hopper/Projected and Casement Windows In awning, hopper, projected, and casement windows, the whole sash swings open and projects (sticks out) outside or inside from the plane of the window. The symbol for project-out sash is P.O., while P.I. represents project-in sash. The sash operates on hinges or pivots. An awning window rotates about its top edge and projects outward from the building (see Figure 4-1). A hopper window pivots about its bottom edge and projects inward (see Figure 4-1). A casement window rotates from one of the side jambs and swings either inward or outward. The use of two phantom lines, extending from the corner of the sash and joining together at a point on the opposite side, represents the hinge location (or pivot side) of the window (see Figure 4-2). The side opposite the hinge is where the operable handles are placed. Thus a P.I. window with the phantom lines pointing to the left side would be a project-in casement with the hinges on the left side of the frame. Projected windows provide ventilation through the entire window area, generally seal tightly when closed, and are relatively easy to clean. They can be used to direct ventilation air into the room. This is particularly true of sidehinged casement windows. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 4

42 Figure 4-2 Window Types 4.6 Vertically and Horizontally Pivoted Windows Pivoted windows have a sash attached to pivots in the middle of the frame (either at the head and sill or at the side jambs). A pivoted window can be rotated 180 or 360 so that the outside surface is accessible from the inside for cleaning (see Figure 4-2). Vertically pivoted windows are often used in high-rise buildings because they can be rotated to allow the outside surfaces to be washed from the inside. These windows typically have special locking devices and can be opened only by custodial personnel. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 5

43 4.7 Side Hinged (In-swinging) Windows Instead of projecting out like most awning and casement windows, in-swinging windows project into the building from hinges on the side jamb. In-swinging windows are typically used for cleaning access or emergency ventilation. 4.8 Top Hinged (In-swinging) Windows Like side-hinged in-swinging windows, top hinged inswinging windows are designed to operate primarily for cleaning, not to provide ventilation. A top hinged in-swinging window consists of a sash hinged to the head (top of the frame) so that it swings open to the inside. 4.9 Dual Action Windows Dual action windows have a sash that tilts into the room from the top for ventilation and swings in from the side for cleaning of the outside surface Hinged Egress Windows A hinged egress window has a sash that swings outward or inward at least 90 in a stationary perimeter frame. It must meet requirements for the size of the clear opening when fully opened. Hinged egress windows are usually casement or awning windows. In addition to the usual structural tests, hinge operation is also tested Dual Windows Dual windows contain two separate sash that operate independently of each other. There may be an interior primary window with an exterior secondary window, an exterior primary window with an interior secondary window, or two primary windows. Primary windows are designed to be structurally capable of protecting the building s interior from wind and rain. Secondary windows are used mainly for energy conservation or sound control. They are not intended to be used by themselves. Dual windows can be used to provide ventilation, while protecting the interior from rain. This is achieved with vertical sliders by opening the outside window at the bottom and the inside window at the top. With horizontal sliders, open the outside window on one side and the inside window on the other side Jalousie Windows Jalousie windows have a series of overlapping louvers which pivot simultaneously in the frame, controlled by a single operating device. Louvers are typically glass, but may also be aluminum, wood, or plastic. When opened, the bottom edge of each louver swings toward the exterior Jal/Awning Windows Jal/Awning windows consist of a multiplicity of top hinged sash arranged in a vertical series within a common frame with each sash operated by its own control device, which swings the bottom edges of the sash outward. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 6

44 4.14 Tropical Awning Windows Tropical awning windows consist of a multiplicity of top hinged sash arranged in a vertical series within a common frame which are all operated by a single common operator, which swings the bottom edges of the sash outward Specialty Windows Windows can be custom-made in various shapes and sizes, including circles, hexagons, semicircles and trapezoids. Specialty windows may be fixed, operating or a combination of fixed and operating sash (see Figure 4-3). Figure 4-3 Specialty Windows AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 7

45 4.16 Fixed Windows Fixed windows are not intended to open for ventilation or egress; there are no moving parts, hinges, or latches. They consist of a glazed frame, or a fixed sash and frame, installed into the opening. Fixed windows are usually more airtight than windows that open Combination Windows When multiple windows are joined together in long runs, either vertically or horizontally, they form what is called Vertical Stack Windows or Horizontal Ribbon Windows respectively. These types of openings may involve any combination of either fixed or operable window assemblies. Vertical Stack and Horizontal Ribbon Windows are typically joined together with male/female integral frames or with independent mullions. These types of window combinations may also make transitions from full height units to partial height units (see Figure 4-4). Figure 4-4a Horizontal Ribbon Windows AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 8

46 Figure 4-4b "Vertical Stack Windows 4.18 Miscellaneous Window Hardware Numerous types of hardware are used for window operation and locking. The following pages provide examples of some of the more common types of hardware installers might find in the field. Installers can use these drawings to help recognize and/or replace hardware as needed. Notes: AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 9

47 Various Types of Window Hardware Sweep - Hand Operated Lock Sweep Security Lock Sweep Pole Operated Lock Keeper Flush Mount Keeper Mortise Sash Lock Keeper Spring Catch Pole Operated Spring Catch Pole Operated Keeper Spring Catch Keeper (Std. Style) Various Types of Window Hardware AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 10

48 Anti-Lockout Keeper Spring Catch w/ Keeper 10 Storm Hinge (Multi-Bar) Handle (Surface Mount) Handle (Web Mount) Strike Handle Keeper Handless Fastener (Custodial Lock) Spring Catch (Project-Out Bottom) Spring Catch (Project-In) Under Screen Push Bar AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 11

49 Various Types of Window Hardware Handle Keeper Roto Operator w/ Channel Guide Butt Hinge Spiral Balance Hung Carrier Heavy Duty Hung Carrier Block & Tackle Balances Class Balance Bracket Carrier Balance Tool AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 12

50 AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 13

51 Table of Contents 5.1 Hinged Glass Doors Dual Action Hinged Glass Doors Sliding Glass Doors Miscellaneous Door Hardware...2 This voluntary specification was developed by representative members of AAMA as advisory information and published as a public service. AAMA disclaims all liability for the use, application or adaptation of materials published herein. Copyright 2015 American Architectural Manufacturers Association 1827 Walden Office Square, Suite 550, Schaumburg, IL Phone: 847/ Fax: 847/ webmaster@aamanet.org Web Site: AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 5-i

52 5.0 Types of Exterior Glass Doors & Related Hardware There are a number of different exterior glass door products on the market. This manual covers hinged and sliding exterior glass doors and their associated hardware components. 5.1 Hinged Glass Doors Sometimes referred to as French doors or terrace doors, hinged glass doors consist of one or more glazed panels contained within an overall frame. One or more of the glazed panels are operable, swinging either inward or outward (see Figure 5-1). Whenever specifying pairs of hinged glass doors, be sure to indicate which door is to be the primary panel and which is to be the secondary panel. Base this determination on how they are viewed from the exterior. Panels are typically defined with the symbol X for operable or O for fixed. The direction of swing is commonly shown on the floor plan with the use of an arc, which represents the direction of travel. The water and air infiltration performance of a hinged glass door depends on whether compression seals are used around the perimeter of the sash and the height of the threshold. Hinged glass doors shall not be confused with "Storefront" and "Entrance" doors, or all glass doors used in commercial storefront applications. O X X O Figure 5-1 Hinged Glass Doors 5.2 Dual Action Hinged Glass Doors A dual action hinged glass door consists of one or more glazed panels in a single frame. The term "dual action" is based on the operation of the door. Special hardware is supplied within the sash that allows the door panel to function in two modes- swinging and hopper. By rotating the door handle in one direction, the door can be unlocked and swung inward much like a standard hinged glass door. After closing and locking the door, the handle can be rotated to a different position to operate the sash in the ventilation mode by tilting it in, away from the top, like a project-in vent. AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 5-1

53 Manufacturers offer variations of these doors, including single and double doors, with one or both sash operating. The hardware generally is arranged to offer multi-point locking locations around the perimeter of the door. Because of the number of locking points and the fact that many of these doors are typically compression sealed, they generally offer very tight air infiltration values and can often be tested to high water performance levels. 5.3 Sliding Glass Doors Sliding glass doors consist of one or more glass panels contained in frames that, in turn, are contained within an overall frame designed so that one or more of the panels are movable in a horizontal direction. The movable panels have rollers, which are designed to allow for easy movement. Sliding glass doors are adjustable and can be arranged in a number of different combinations based on the number of fixed and operable panels, and how the panels open. The height of the sliding glass door sill can have an impact on the water performance of the system. When installing a sliding glass door, remember to consider the height of the threshold and whether a ramp will be needed to allow for wheel chair access. In Figure 5-2, "X's" and "O's" are used to show which panel is operable and which is fixed. The symbol "X" represents an operable panel and the "O" indicates a fixed panel. Whenever specifying sliding glass doors, be sure to indicate which panels are operable and which are fixed, based on how they are viewed from the exterior. Additionally, an arrow typically represents the direction of slide when the operable sash is opened. O X X O Figure 5-2 Sliding Glass Doors 5.4 Miscellaneous Door Hardware Numerous types of hardware are used for door operation and locking. There are many examples of the more common types of hardware installers might find in the field, they are too numerous to show here. Notes: AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 5-2

54 AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 5-3

55 Table of Contents 6.1 Using Accessories Panning Subsills Receptors Interior Trim Stool Trim and Sill Members Flashing Materials Cladding Installation Clips/Angles Mullion Clips Mounting Clips or Brackets Integral Ventilating Systems Sash Dividers/Grids/Muntins Mullion Covers Expanders and Sill Angles Vertical and Horizontal Mullions Corner Mullions Window Washing Bolts This voluntary specification was developed by representative members of AAMA as advisory information and published as a public service. AAMA disclaims all liability for the use, application or adaptation of materials published herein. Copyright 2015 American Architectural Manufacturers Association 1827 Walden Office Square, Suite 550, Schaumburg, IL Phone: 847/ Fax: 847/ webmaster@aamanet.org Web Site: AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 6-i

56 6.0 Accessory Items and special features Special accessories are often used to facilitate installation. Accessory items include pre-designed members to accommodate transitions and allow for movement, and can be used to cover existing building components, allow for ease of installation, and provide a finished condition after installation. Accessory items can be purchased in various materials and finishes. Because accessory items may be designed by the manufacturer for specific applications, consult the manufacturer about the proper use of these products. The following sections provide general terms and descriptions of how accessory items are used. 6.1 Using Accessories Accessory items, such as panning and trim, receptors, and subsills are generally not included with the window or door unless part of the contract. The person ordering the windows and doors must make the decision regarding whether accessory items are needed to facilitate installation or provide the look the customer desires. If accessory items are needed, order them at the same time the windows or doors are ordered. Over the years, special conditions and job requirements have dictated the use of accessories. In the early years of their development, most accessories were made in the field from coil stock and sheet materials. As the need for these materials increased, many manufacturers developed standard accessory shapes to meet the demand. The definitions of accessory items can have different meanings to different users, depending on their background and their area of construction expertise. To reduce misunderstanding, various items are defined in the following sections. 6.2 Panning Panning materials used in commercial construction are used on the exterior of windows and doors for both new construction and replacement work. In replacement installations, panning materials typically cover existing wood molding or trim and are often designed to provide the same profiles as the materials they cover. Panning is generally used around the entire perimeter of the window opening and is either pre-attached to the new window frame (called wrap-around panning) or installed to the existing opening prior to window installation (called pre-set panning). These types of panning (see Figure 6-1) will typically be supplied in an extruded form and are often available in a number of sizes and shapes. When panning is desired, consult with the manufacturer to determine what profiles are offered. The seal between the panning and the window must maintain the performance level of the project. Sealing is generally accomplished by the use of gaskets, sealant or a combination of the two. Always assemble and seal the panning and window as recommended by the manufacturer. Manufacturers often have detailed assembly and installation instructions that must be followed. AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 6-1

57 Figure 6-1 Common Panning Shapes 6.3 Subsills The term "subsill" in commercial applications refers to a member that is used under windows and doors as an integral part of the installation (see Figure 6-2). Subsills are available in a number of sizes and shapes. Always use end dams when using subsills for maximum performance. End dams are an essential part of the water performance integrity of the subsill system. The subsill and end dam must be high enough to maintain the performance level of the project. In commercial applications, subsills are most often used to facilitate anchorage and water drainage. Attachment through any sill cavity is typically discouraged; however, the use of a subsill offers advantages when anchoring. By using anchor clips or extended flanges, the subsill can be shimmed level and attached in place. This makes working with multiple windows easier because the subsill can offer a continuous, level track for installation of the windows or doors. AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 6-2

58 Figure 6-2 Typical Subsill with End Dam and Extruded Anchor Clip 6.4 Receptors Receptors, also known as Comp Channels, are generally one- or two-piece extruded members used at the head and jambs of windows and doors to allow for building movement, product expansion and contraction, and to facilitate the installation of the window head and jambs. Receptors are usually shaped like a channel and typically include gaskets, which form a compression seal against the framing system (see Figure 6-3). Like subsills, receptors offer the advantage of a continuous track, which is ideal in multiple window configurations. Because of their design and placement, receptors facilitate the installation of the window head and jambs. The receptor is generally shimmed and attached in place, allowing for a sealant joint between the side opposite the window and the building condition. Receptors are often used to allow for building movement at the head of an assembly. Live load movement from the floor above can often exceed the designed movement of a typical sealant joint. The receptor system allows for more movement, without disturbing the sealant joint. AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 6-3

59 Figure 6-3 Various Types of Receptors 6.5 Interior Trim Interior trim is generally used to finish off, or "trim out," the interior side of the opening. Most common to commercial applications is extruded aluminum trim, usually manufactured in two pieces, which can be snapped together to form a rectangle or square (see Figure 6-4). Aluminum Interior trim can often be provided in a number of profiles that resemble the old trim that has been removed in replacement work. Trim clips can either be supplied in short sections (non-continuous trim clips) or continuous pieces (known as continuous trim clips). In commercial applications, trim is often used as a device for anchoring the window to the building condition. If the trim is at least two pieces, the first piece can be applied to both the existing condition and the new window frame. The second piece is snapped over the first, hiding any fasteners from view. Figure 6-4 Various Types of Interior Trim AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 6-4

60 6.6 Stool Trim and Sill Members The terms "stool trim" and "sill members" are often confused. Stools are components that are used on the interior, while sills are used on the exterior. The two are distinctly different components, and have different meanings and uses. Stool trim is made of a number of materials, including aluminum, vinyl, wood and marble (see Figure 6-5). The purpose of stool trim is typically to finish off the interior stool condition. This component usually creates the transition between the interior finishes and the window. End caps and sealant are commonly used to finish off the ends and joints, allowing for a visually appealing appearance. Sill members are used on the exterior of windows and often close off joints in the exterior sill condition (see Figure 6-6). In commercial applications, for example, if a brick veneer wall system is used, extruded sill members are often installed to close off the cavity between the brick and the wall framing. Sill members can have an impact on the water and air infiltration performance of an installation. Always install subsills carefully, according to the manufacturer's instructions. Sill members must include a slope toward the exterior to facilitate positive drainage. Always include proper sealant selection, joint design and installation techniques that will not degrade the performance expectations of the window assembly when installing subsills. Figure 6-5 Examples of Stool Trim AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 6-5

61 Figure 6-6 Example of a Sill Member 6.7 Flashing Materials The term "flashing" has a number of different meanings, depending on how the flashing is used and designed. Flashing is typically used to prevent water from penetrating the building envelope. Flashing is typically used at the perimeter of a windows/door and is made from a water-resistant or waterimpermeable material, such as aluminum, copper or stainless steel. These materials are formed into shapes to control and divert water. For materials that are acceptable for use as flashing, see Chapter 13, Section Be certain that any flashing used at the sill condition does not compromise the thermal barrier in areas where cold temperatures can be expected. 6.8 Cladding Cladding is typically used to close off or cover openings. These pieces generally cover areas that would require an accessory too large to make into an extrusion, or they may be unusual shapes that are not stocked by the manufacturer. Cladding is usually made from sheets of finished aluminum; however, other materials may be used. Proper design and fabrication of cladding is essential to good performance on the wall.. On exterior applications, only use cladding material that is thick enough to resist "oil canning," or deformation caused by expansion and contraction. The number of bends and the girth of the shape will determine the proper thickness of the stock used. AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 6-6

62 If the ends of these components are used adjacent to sealant joints, the ends should be folded over or capped to allow for proper joint design and backer rod support (see Figure 6-7). When lengths require splice joints, follow the recommended sealant joint design information shown in Chapter 13, Section When cladding materials are used to cover large voids, the voids should be loosely filled with batt insulation to maintain the thermal integrity of the completed installation. Figure 6-7 Cladding with End Caps 6.9 Installation Clips/Angles An installation clip, or angle, is a piece of material (usually aluminum or steel) used to attach the window into position. Special clips are often extruded and specially fabricated for this purpose (see Figure 6-8). Generally, when building movement is a concern, the clips will be slotted to allow for movement and adjustment. AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 6-7

63 6.10 Mullion Clips Figure 6-8 Examples Clip Angles "Mullion clips" are retainers used to bind two or more windows together into a single, combination unit Mounting Clips or Brackets "Mounting clips," or "brackets," also referred to as "twist anchors or strap anchors, are brackets that attach to the window or door frame to provide an anchoring device (see Figure 6-9). These anchors are commonly made of thin gage galvanized steel. Because they are thin gage, the installer can typically bend or form them to the desired shape. These clips are often fabricated and pre-punched in the factory to allow for attachment. Nails or screws are installed through the bracket into the substrate, eliminating the need for anchoring directly through the window frame. AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 6-8

64 Figure 6-9 Examples of Mounting Clips 6.12 Integral Ventilating Systems With today's tighter buildings, providing for sufficient ventilation is part of most new building codes. In order to ensure that an adequate amount of outdoor air is provided (without depending on the occupants to open windows), some specifiers require windows with integral ventilators (see Figure 6-10). These ventilators are essentially air slots through the top, bottom or side of the window frame, with screens and flaps to keep out the bugs and rain. Occupants can adjust the opening to control the amount of airflow. Integral ventilators are also sometimes used to provide an inlet for air when exhaust fans are running in a room. This prevents the room from becoming depressurized as the fan draws out stale, humid or polluted air. AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 6-9

65 Figure 6-10 Integral Ventilating System 6.13 Sash Dividers/Grids/Muntins "Sash dividers," "grids" and "muntins" are the dividers commonly used when replacing "old-style," historical and/or colonial windows. Typically, the existing sash was made up of several lites of glass separated by grids and muntins. Many building owners today want to recreate that look when replacing their old windows. Some manufacturers make "true divided lite" (TDL) windows using several small panels of insulated double glass. Glass is installed between dividing crossbars called "muntins." Many manufacturers recreate the divided look by using full pieces of glazing and either placing a grid between two panes of glass or attaching a grid on the inside and/or outside surface of the window Mullion Covers When working with existing mullion conditions, mullion covers are often used to cover over the existing frame. Mullion covers can be used with or without panning, and are typically snapped over a pre-attached pressure plate (see Figure 6-12). AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 6-10

66 Figure 6-12 Mullion Covers 6.15 Expanders and Sill Angles Some transitions between the window and the existing frame require more material than available in a common extrusion. These instances often require the use of an expander or sill angle The expander is an accessory that is compressed over an existing flange on the window or panning shape. This accessory can be field trimmed or scribed to suite the condition (see Figure 6-13). Sill angles are similar in design, but they are more commonly used to provide a return leg to back up the caulk joint. In either case, the expander/sill angle is sealed to the condition and to the window/panning in order to resist water penetration. AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 6-11

67 Figure 6-13 Expanders and Sill Angles 6.16 Vertical and Horizontal Mullions A variety of mullions are available for use on commercial jobs. Mullions can be used in horizontal and vertical applications (see Figure 6-14), but they are designed differently for each application. Mullions come in three variations: Horizontal stack or vertical stack mullions typically used in a horizontal or vertical position to stack one frame on top of (or against) one another. There are two variations of stack mullions, those with zero-sightlines and those that are H-MillionsMullions. Male/female mullions may be used in either horizontal or vertical applications to join two opposing frames together. Three-piece mullions with pressure plates and covers, which are often structural mullions designed to carry the loads imposed by the window/door frames. AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 6-12

68 Figure 6-14 Common Mullion Types 6.17 Corner Mullions Corner mullions are made to handle transitions at the corners. Although almost any shape is possible, the more common designs are for inside and outside 90º and 135º corners. Always attach corner frames securely into position at the head and sill condition in order to carry the load imposed on the mullion by the opposing frames (see Figure 6-15). AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 6-13

69 Figure 6-15 Examples of Corner Mullions 6.18 Window Washing Bolts Window washing bolts are used to allow the maintenance crew (window washers) to attach their belts or harnesses to a secure attachment. Often required by code, these bolts are used as a safety device when cleaning windows on a high-rise building. A number of varieties are available and will depend on the desired design, building condition and the load requirements. It is important to attach the window washer bolts securely through the building frame in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions (see Figure 6-16). AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 6-14

70 Figure 6-16 Example of One Type of Washer Bolt Attachment Notes: _ AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 6-15

71 Table of Contents 7.1 Performance Requirements and Testing Specific and Optional Performance Requirements Verification of Performance/ AAMA Certification Labels Field Testing of Installed Units Field Testing of Accessories...5 This voluntary specification was developed by representative members of AAMA as advisory information and published as a public service. AAMA disclaims all liability for the use, application or adaptation of materials published herein. Copyright 2015 American Architectural Manufacturers Association 1827 Walden Office Square, Suite 550, Schaumburg, IL Phone: 847/ Fax: 847/ webmaster@aamanet.org Web Site: AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 7-I

72

73 7.0 Performance Requirements 7.1 Performance Requirements and Testing A material-neutral, standard/specification has been developed through the joint efforts of the members of the American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA), Window and Door Manufacturers Association (WDMA) and Canadian Standards Association (CSA). This chapter provides a brief overview of the standard and how it applies to commercial windows and doors. At the time of this writing, the most recent standard/specification used by the window and door industry to establish the minimum performance requirements of windows and doors is known as AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A and is titled North American Fenestration Standard/ Specification for Windows, Doors, and Skylights. Many of the industry's manufacturers voluntarily subject their products to the testing outlined by the standard. Certifying to this standard indicates that an independent, accredited testing laboratory has certified that a tested sample has met the performance criteria for the performance class and grade desired. The product tested must meet specific performance requirements. There are four mandatory primary performance requirements. They are: 1. Structural adequacy to withstand wind loads 2. Resistance to water leakage 3. Resistance to air infiltration 4. Forced-entry resistance The standard establishes levels of performance for various types of windows and doors. Successfully meeting these requirements provides a "gateway," or passport, into one of the four performance classifications below: R LC CW AW The performance grade criteria for these products are shown below (see Table 7-1). AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 7-1

74 Product Minimum performance performance class grade (PG) Windows and doors Minimum design pressure (DP), Pa (psf) Minimum structural test Minimum water pressure (STP), resistance test Pa (psf) pressure, Pa (psf) R (15.0) 1080 (22.5) 140 (2.90) LC (25.0) 1800 (37.5) 180 (3.75) CW (30.0) 2160 (45.0) 220 (4.50) AW (40.0) 2880 (60.0) 390 (8.00) Unit skylights, tubular daylighting devices, and roof windows R (15.0) 1440 (30.0) 140 (2.90) CW (30.0) 2880 (60.0) 220 (4.50) Table 7-1 Performance Criteria per Table 1 of AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S. 2/A Specific and Optional Performance Requirements In order for a product to be classified as R, LC, CW, or AW, the product must meet specific performance criteria established by the standard. The performance standard dictates a minimum test size for each product. The performance criteria must be met by products that claim compliance with these standards (see Table 7-1). The minimum performance requirements are known as the "Gateway Performance Requirements." Optional performance grades for these products are also possible. Many manufacturers opt to test their products at higher grade levels once they meet the Gateway Performance Requirements. 7.3 Verification of Performance/ AAMA Certification Labels After a representative sample of a manufacturer's product line has met the AAMA requirements through performance testing and in-plant inspections, other similar products that the manufacturer produces may be labeled with an AAMA performance label (see Figure 7-1 and Figure 7-2). The label includes a four-part code indicating the product type (optional), performance class, performance grade and maximum size tested. Product Type - indicates the window style, such as casement window or hinged glass doors (see Table 7-2). Performance Class - offers a general indication of the type of building for which the window was designed. In the example shown in Figure 7-1 and Figure 7-2, the window is rated for commercial construction and is designated as one of the four performance classes (R, LC, CW, and AW). This classification system provides for several levels of performance so that the purchaser or specifier is permitted to select the appropriate level of performance depending on climatic conditions, height of installation, type of building, etc. Refer to Clause of AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S. 2/A for a general guide in determining which class is likely best suited for a particular application. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 7-2

75 Performance Grade - a numeric designator that defines the performance of a product. In order to obtain an AAMA certification label, a tested sample of the product must achieve successful completion of all applicable tests specified for the product. Maximum size tested - shows the maximum size of the window that was tested. This may seem like a minor detail when looking at a window's rating, but the size of the window can have a significant effect on its structural capability. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 7-3

76 Product Types AP Awning, Hopper, Projected Window ATD Architectural Terrace Door BW Basement Window C Casement Window DASHD Dual-Action Side-Hinged Door DAW Dual-Action Window FD Fixed Door FW Fixed Window GH Greenhouse Window H Hung Window HE Hinged Rescue Window HP Horizontally Pivoted Window HS Horizontal Sliding Window J Jalousie Window JA Jal-Awning Window LW DASHD Limited water Dual-Action Side-hinged Door LW SHD Limited water Side-hinged Door MA Mullion Assembly POW Parallel Opening Window RWG Roof Window Glass Glazed RWP Roof Window Plastic Glazed SD Sliding Door SHD Side Hinged Door SHW Side Hinged Window SKG Unit Skylight glass glazed SKP Unit Skylight plastic glazed SLT Side lite SP Specialty Products SSP Secondary Storm Product TA Tropical Awning Windows TDDCC Tubular Daylighting Device Closed Ceiling TDDOC Tubular Daylighting Device Open Ceiling TH Top Hinged Window TR Transom VP Vertically Pivoted Windows VS Vertical Sliding Window Table 7-2 Product Types per Table 5 of AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S. 2/A AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 7-4

77 7.4 Field Testing of Installed Units Project specifications often call for field testing of installed windows and doors. Field testing can be a complex issue and requires skilled technicians who are familiar with the testing standards, proper test methods and the tools available to the industry for this purpose. AAMA 502 provides industry recognized and accepted procedures for field testing. Whenever field tests are required, they shall be conducted in accordance with AAMA 502. Additionally, when field testing of installed windows and doors is required, it shall only be conducted by an AAMAaccredited laboratory that regularly engages in field testing. Quite often, test labs are contracted to do this work immediately after the contract is awarded. Using a qualified test lab will ensure all interested parties that the proper testing methods are followed and that the results are properly documented. Installers who are involved with the field testing process are encouraged to review the job specifications and test methods fully and coordinate their activities with the building contractor and window/door manufacturer. 7.5 Field Testing of Accessories One type of field test that installers can perform is to field check accessories for water leakage. Field testing of subsills, for example, is a simple process for the installer to follow. This method of field testing can be accomplished on a work table or pair of saw horses prior to installation. This test method will pinpoint problems before the accessories are installed, and can help avoid future callbacks. The process, as identified in AAMA 511, used for subsills involves taping off weep holes, filling the subsill with water, and waiting for 15 minutes while checking for any water leakage (see Figure 7-3). By simply watching for leaks (drips of water), the installer can determine whether the previously applied seals at the end dams are resistant to water leakage. Once the testing has been completed, the tape is removed, the weeps holes are reopened, and the subsill is allowed to dry prior to final installation. When doing a field test on an accessory item, the installer is strongly encouraged to document the results. If water penetration occurs during the test, document where the penetration occurred and document the corrective measures taken to remedy the problem. By understanding the corrective measures taken, the installer can give more attention to susceptible areas during future work as the project progresses. Notes: AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 7-5

78 HS-C30 Figure 7-1 AAMA Label Comment [r1]: Update label Staff Item Figure 7-2 Defining the AAMA Label Code Figure 7-3 Field Testing of a Subsill, when needed Comment [r2]: Should this stay or go, applies to aluminum only. If it stays the reference to AAMA 502 should be updated AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 7-6

79 Table of Contents 8.1 Preliminary Site Inspection Condition of the Structure Types of Buildings and Building Components Identifying the Weather Barrier Systems Health and Safety Inspection Hazardous Materials Job Site Safety Issues Access and Barrier Issues Fall Protection Jobsite Access Pre-installation Inspection Protecting Existing Materials Reporting Construction Deficiencies Identifying and Removing Structural Components Checking the Details Quality Control Inspection AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 PAGE 8-i

80

81 8.0 Site Inspection & Safety It is a good construction practice to start a project with a work-site inspection and end it with a quality control inspection. Proper pre-planning and preparation can reduce re-work and prevent the need to remove improperly installed products and materials. When possible, meet with the contractor or other approving authority/authorities prior to installation of the products. The approving authority is responsible for the coordination of the various trades. A preliminary site inspection is helpful when determining if conditions exist that could cause problems for the installer. During the course of the project, other inspections may be necessary, including the following: Health and Safety Inspection Preinstallation Inspection Quality Control Inspection (see Chapter 23) 8.1 Preliminary Site Inspection Before starting a job, conduct a preliminary site inspection. Sample site inspection forms are provided for both replacement work and new construction at the end of this chapter. Conduct a site inspection for both new construction and remodeling projects. Make assessments for: Condition of the structure Type of building and components Type of weather barrier system Health and safety issues Access and barrier issues Material and equipment needs Personnel and time requirements Code-related issues Condition of the Structure Always check the condition of the structure and the building substrate where window and door products will be installed. When replacing windows and doors in an existing structure, inspect the openings to verify proper structural conditions and check for possible structural damage, as well as other dangerous conditions. Structural damage can affect the way a newly installed window or door will operate. A thorough check for existing structural damage is essential, and remedy any problems before window or door installation begins. Below is a checklist for structural conditions: Is the physical condition of the opening questionable? Verify that the condition of the substrate is adequate for AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 PAGE 8-1

82 attachment. Inspect the walls, floors, trim and ceilings around the windows or doors for signs of damage or deterioration. Is the substrate per the contract drawings? Report any damage or deteriorated conditions such as rotted wood, spalled concrete or corroded steel to the contractor, building owner or approving authority Types of Buildings and Building Components A variety of materials and methods are used in the construction of commercial buildings. Installers should already have an understanding of the basic construction principles, materials, building practices, and barrier systems. If not, review Chapters 1 through 7 of this manual Identifying the Weather Barrier Systems Two different weather barrier systems are commonly used in commercial construction. These systems are: Surface Barrier System; and Membrane/Drainage System The surface barrier system utilizes the outermost surface of the wall as its sole barrier to shed and control water infiltration. When water does enter behind the exterior face of this system, there is no additional means of controlling the water and diverting it back to the outside. The membrane/drainage system also uses the exterior surface to shed the water; however, a water resistant barrier (WRB) (e.g., building paper, building wrap, sheathing or other water-shedding material) is located behind the exterior surface of the building. The WRB is designed to divert any residual water that may enter penetrations in the wall surface outward through pre-determined exit points in the building (e.g., base of wall, floor lines or flashing points at lintels). When installing products into retrofit/replacement applications, it is essential to clearly define and understand the existing weather barrier. Take care to ensure that the window or door has been properly installed into the previously designed and existing building envelope. Use caution in evaluating the connection of the window or door to WRB so that the replacement installation does not impair the existing system from working properly (e.g., blocking weep holes or slots in the existing system). In order to control water penetration from behind the WRB, these materials must be installed in weather-board fashion, with overlapping joints at the appropriate locations. The proper installation and integration of some materials in weather-board fashion may be difficult to accomplish without taping or overlapping the joints. Additionally, trades other than the window/door installer apply many of these materials; therefore, the application of these materials is beyond the scope of this manual. AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 PAGE 8-2

83 Installation of windows and glass doors in membrane/drainage wall systems may require special attention and coordination with the building contractor to ensure that the weather shedding integrity of the building is maintained. The construction sequence can impact the effectiveness of the weather barrier system; therefore, take care to ensure that all components of the weather barrier system are properly integrated into the construction sequence. The contractor and/or other approving authority is responsible for the coordination of the various trades and products used to complete the weather barrier system. When preparing to install products into new construction, it is essential that communication between the installer and architect, contractor, developer, and/or other approving authority occur regarding the weather barrier system, as well as the materials and methods used during installation. The proper selection and integration of these materials will increase the prospect of the installation performing as expected. Whenever possible, review drawings or details showing how the window or door will be integrated into the building envelope, along with the various other materials. This would include sketches of how the flashing and/or sill pan flashing, water resistive barrier, sealant, etc., integrate to form a water shedding, water resistive system. In order to avoid the potential for long-term performance problems, the installer (and all other responsible parties) needs to be able to look at these building types/materials and recognize when these materials are not applied (or not applied correctly), and when it is prudent to refuse to install window/door products until deficiencies are corrected. Surface Barrier Systems A surface barrier system is a type of wall in which the outer-most, or first surface of the wall, windows, doors, etc., is integrated together to form a water resistive wall assembly. Walls considered to be surface barrier systems are often solid walls (e.g., single width masonry, poured concrete walls, concrete block, and others that do not include wall cavities) with drainage planes like some types of EIFS (usually direct applied EIFS). Additionally, other types of walls that involve wall cavities (e.g., concrete panel walls, brick veneer, etc.) that don't include a water resistive barrier behind the exterior skin are considered surface barrier walls. Walls of this type do not include a purposely-designed method of controlling and diverting residual water to the exterior (see Figure 8-1). Caution: Surface barrier systems require product design and installation that eliminate the introduction of water behind the exterior plane of the outside barrier. Window or door products are integrated into the surface barrier system by means of a sealant joint. The sealant joint is the sole method for joining the various materials. The joining of these materials becomes the weather barrier (the only defense) for the completed assembly. AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 PAGE 8-3

84 Windows and doors used in surface barrier systems are designed to seal to the exterior surface and attached to the structure through the frame, or may be installed in a receptor system, which is attached to the structure. Do not allow windows to extend beyond the exterior face of the building or beyond the exterior water barrier. Figure 8-1 Surface Barrier Wall System Membrane/Drainage System A membrane/drainage system" is a wall that utilizes a WRB as a weather barrier behind the exterior surface of the wall. Walls sided with some types of EIFS, stucco and brick or stone veneer are considered membrane/drainage systems. The key to determining whether a wall is a membrane/drainage system is the use and integration of the WRB (see Figure 8-2). Walls built with a membrane/drainage system may allow incidental water to enter behind the outer-most surface of the building, but they are designed to control and divert this water back out to the exterior. Windows and doors are just one component of the entire building. Buildings employing a membrane/ drainage system must incorporate the "whole building concept." This concept is based on the knowledge that each construction element may allow some minor water infiltration; therefore, the water must be controlled and allowed to escape harmlessly. The whole building concept includes the use of a WRB applied in weather-board (shingled) fashion, which allows any residual water to drain down to the base where a flashing member, screed or screen diverts it back out. The integration of the window/door framing, the installation accessories, and the weather barrier is critical. Flashing and sealant are applied to integrate the window/door and the WRB together. Sealing to the exterior surface (building façade) of a membrane/drainage wall may inhibit or trap water inside the drainage plane of the wall cavity if allowance for water drainage is not considered. This could result in water buildup and water infiltration toward the interior of the building and must be avoided. AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 PAGE 8-4

85 Figure 8-2 Membrane/Drainage Wall System EIFS and GFRC Walls EIFS (Exterior Insulation Finish System) and GFRC (Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete) walls can be considered either a surface barrier system" or a membrane/drainage system, depending on the manufacturer and the design of their product. EIFS systems (see Figure 8-3) are proprietary and may not be compatible with all types of windows and doors, flashing systems and sealants. Work with the approving authority to verify the requirements of the window/door, flashing, sealant and EIFS suppliers to ensure the compatibility of these materials in the completed assembly. If conflicts exist, seek written direction from the approving authority on how to proceed with the work. Drainable EIFS walls require a water resistive barrier over the sheathing, which allows the system to be mechanically attached through the barrier into the supporting wall structure. A drainage plane can be introduced by placing a plastic mesh between the EIFS and the water resistive barrier. Weep holes or drainage tracks installed at the bottom of the walls and the floor lines eliminate the buildup of incidental water, permitting it to drain to the exterior. Install flashing at the lintels in such a way as to allow for termination of the WRB so incidental water can drain out at the head condition. Wall systems that do not incorporate a WRB (such as building wrap or building paper) behind the exterior face to allow for drainage must be treated as a surface barrier system. Barrier EIFS walls that are recognized as a surface barrier system must incorporate flashing at the head and sill condition. AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 PAGE 8-5

86 The general contractor (GC) or construction manager (CM) must coordinate with the window/door installer and the EIFS cladding supplier and architect to obtain information regarding the type of EIFS system to be installed in order to determine the appropriate method of installing the windows and doors and related flashing materials. Figure 8-3 Exterior Insulation Finish System (EIFS) 8.2 Health and Safety Inspection Contractors and installers are required to comply with Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards (29CRF Parts 1910 and 1926) if they have employees; OSHA requires all employers to provide a safe and healthy workplace for their employees. In addition to OSHA's requirements, it is also important to protect the occupants from health and safety hazards, as well as to protect their possessions from damage resulting from the installation process. Health and safety on the job site are very important. Over 90 percent of construction-related major accidents are the result of four factors: 1. Falls (from heights) 2. Electrocutions 3. Crushing injuries (i.e., trench cave-ins) 4. Being struck by equipment or materials On the job, a little caution and care can go a long way. Make health and safety awareness a habit. Workers can avoid most accidents by using common sense, working at a reasonable pace, and maintaining constant awareness of their surroundings. AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 PAGE 8-6

87 Contractors and/or installers can maintain a safe and healthy workplace by conducting a health and safety inspection of the work site before, and during, each job. When health and safety issues are discovered, a competent person must remedy them before starting work. Inspect the site for: 1. Hazardous Materials Lead-based paint Asbestos-containing materials Other chemicals 2. Hazardous Conditions Exposure to walkways above pedestrians Unprotected floor lines Broken glass Low electrical lines Trash and debris Trenches or holes on the building site and/or floor spaces Insect nests Hazardous Materials When working on older buildings, installers may encounter a number of hazardous materials. Two of the most common hazardous materials are lead-based paint and asbestos-containing materials; this is particularly important when considering sealant removal as both lead-based paint and asbestos-containing materials may be present. Whenever possible, the installer should consider jumping over the existing sealant line in order to avoid disturbing both the existing paint and seal. Lead-Based Paint (LBP) Lead-based paint was banned from use on residential structures after 1978; however, it s still allowed to be used on commercial and industrial structures. Studies of leaded paint on older buildings found that exterior wooden components, such as windows, doors, siding and trim, may contain higher lead levels than other building components. Guidelines for working on building components coated with lead-based paints have been developed by the U.S. Departments of Housing and Urban Development (HUD) and the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). It is recommended that research be performed to be sure that the most current requirements are followed. AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 PAGE 8-7

88 Installers are required by federal law to provide customers/building owners with a copy of an EPA #747-K , entitled Protect Your Family from Lead in Your Home, if they disturb more than 2 sq. ft. of lead-based paint on the interior, or 10 sq. ft. on the exterior. Additional information can be obtained from the following website: In the workplace, OSHA's Lead in Construction Standard ( ) and Hazardous Communication Standard ( ) require employers to address lead exposure and train their workers on how to handle leaded materials. Be aware that a number of states and local jurisdictions may have instituted their own lead regulations which differ from the federal requirements (see Figure 8-4). Figure 8-4 Safely Working with Lead-Based Paint To reduce the workers and occupants' potential for danger due to exposure, test all painted building components that will be disturbed for the presence of lead before they are worked on. In lieu of testing, one can assume that all pre-1978 structures contain lead-based paints and work accordingly. OSHA does not require the testing of coated surfaces, but it does require the monitoring of workers for exposure to lead and asbestos. The installer can consult with the contractor about providing the necessary safeguards. The following suggestions are offered as tips on handling lead-based paint. 1. Do not turn leaded paint into leaded dust. 2. Do not dry scrape, sand, or plane lead-based paint unless using a heat gun that operates below 1100 F. Instead, use wet sanding, scraping, or planing methods (see Figure 8-5). 3. Use a utility knife to score painted joints between jambs, trim, and walls. 4. Do not use open-flame burning or torching techniques. 5. Do not machine sand or grind, or conduct abrasive blasting or sandblasting of lead-based paint unless used with a High Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) filter exhaust control system. 6. Confine dust and debris to as small an area as possible by containing it. Use 6 mil polyethylene disposable plastic drop cloths under all areas where moderate-to-high levels of leaded dust may be generated. 7. Do not smoke, eat, drink or chew tobacco or gum while working with leaded materials. 8. Do not allow children or pets in the work area until the work is finished and the area has been thoroughly cleaned. AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 PAGE 8-8

89 9. Whenever possible, do not cut lead-painted materials (doors, jambs, windows, etc.) inside a building or apartment. 10. Do not leave any debris that the occupants will have to remove. 11. Do not use the occupants' brooms, dustpans or vacuum cleaners. 12. Do not take the dust generated on the job home! Change work clothes and shoes before going home. 13. Keep work areas as free as possible from dust and debris keep it clean! Dispose of leaded material in 6 mil polyethylene bags. 14. Do not track dust around the building where the work is being done. Place 6 mil poly sheeting along the pathway from the exterior of the unit to the work area to reduce contamination on the floor. 15. Use a High Efficiency Particulate Air filter (HEPA) vacuum to clean up dust/debris. 16. Wet-clean the work area with an appropriate detergent after it has been HEPA vacuumed 17. Use HEPA vacuum attachments on tools that generate dust. Figure 8-5 Lead Precautions Asbestos Containing Materials (ACM) Both the EPA and OSHA regulate disturbing and/or demolishing ACM. Treat ACM the same as lead-based paint in terms of inspection, work-site preparation, disturbance, and clean up. Consult with the contractor about taking the following precautions when disturbing joint compounds that may contain asbestos: AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 PAGE 8-9

90 1. Verify that the building has been tested for asbestos before disturbing a potential asbestos containing material. A certified inspector is required to send "grab samples" to an accredited asbestos testing laboratory to determine the asbestos content. 2. Place a layer of 6-mil plastic (poly) at least 6 ft in every direction around the window on which you are working. 3. If a significant amount of dust will be generated, a containment system will have to be installed around the window. 4. Always wet the asbestos-containing material using a fine mist of water containing a few drops of detergent before, and while, you are disturbing it. 5. Use a utility knife to score the joint between trim and walls before removing the window trim. This will reduce breakage and pulverization of the wall material. 6. Do not dust, sweep, or vacuum debris that may contain asbestos. These steps will disturb tiny asbestos fibers and may release them into the air. 7. Remove dust by vacuuming with a HEPA vacuum cleaner. 8. If the floor can be mopped, wet mop around the window and the pathway in and out of the building which workers use. Other Chemical/Material Hazards There are other potentially hazardous chemicals used on window installation jobs. The Hazardous Communication (HazCom) Standard ( ) requires all employers to review the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for every chemical used on the job. Review MSDS for sealants with workers before the products are used. To obtain an MSDS for sealants, primers, solvents and other products, call the material manufacturer. Often suppliers have the MSDS but fail to provide them to the purchasers. California installers must also comply with Proposition 65 chemical and notification requirements. Respirators Respirators are commonly issued by employers to their employees to protect them from known and/or unknown hazards. OSHA considers respirators as the "last line of defense" on the work site. Therefore, a respirator is the last line of safety to be issued to reduce employee hazards; all other hazard-reduction measures must be instituted first to control hazards before relying on a respirator to protect an employee. For an employer to issue a respirator, the conditions of OSHA's Respirator Standard (29CFR ) must be met. The Respirator Standard does not allow the issuance of respirators, which include dust masks as well as standard respirators, without an employer conducting the proper assessments, a written respirator protection program, and employee training. Both the lead and asbestos standards require atmospheric monitoring to determine appropriate respirator usage. AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 PAGE 8-10

91 8.2.2 Job Site Safety Issues Working safely with safe equipment is a must not only for workers' safety, but also for the safety of occupants and others at the job site. Use only tools and equipment that are maintained in a safe and hazard-free condition. Equipment Safety When setting up temporary portable tools and equipment, assume they will be used long-term. When installing equipment, always set it up on secure footing, taking the extra precautions necessary to insure that it is on solid ground and firmly planted. Apply all equipment locks and pins during the initial setup and do not remove them for any reason until disassembly. Never take setting up equipment for granted; the installers safety and the safety of others depend on proper use. Electrical Safety Review OSHA electrical safety suggestions and the six tips below: 1. Use a ground fault circuit interrupter when running power cords outside. 2. Use grounded power cords. 3. Make sure that extension cords have the capacity to handle the amperage draw of the power tool, and never use an extension cord longer than 100 ft. 4. Before working on or adjusting power tools, unplug them. 5. When electrical equipment or circuits are de-energized in order to be worked on, they must be locked out and tagged at all points where the equipment or circuits can be energized. Follow OSHA's lockout and tagging procedures. 6. Make sure all power tools are in proper working condition before they are used. Tool Safety Improper and careless tool usage can cause injuries. All workers must be properly trained on each tool they use. 1. Match the tool with the job. (Pliers make terrible hammers.) 2. Inspect tools regularly. Repair or replace defective equipment. 3. Transport tools carefully. 4. Use the safety equipment that comes with the tools. Leave the guards in place; do not remove or disable them. 5. Always wear safety glasses or goggles with anything that generates flying objects. 6. Use appropriate caution when working in situations where tools can be dropped on the public below or expose the public to unexpected hazards. AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 PAGE 8-11

92 Accessibility Safety Installers must have safe access to windows and doors. Performing a thorough inspection of openings will allow the installer to decide what equipment will be needed to install products safely in each opening. One of the first questions an installer must ask is whether the window or door opening is accessible. This factor is very important when working with windows and doors, especially on multistory buildings. When working on windows from the inside, make sure that there is sufficient room to do the job. To protect the occupant's belongings and provide room to work, make sure the owner has cleared an area around the opening and a pathway to the opening. Evaluate the height above the ground or other fixed work areas, and accessibility of building openings to determine the appropriate use of scaffolding and ladders per OSHA guidelines. Use scaffolding, power lifts or swing staging when working on buildings higher than one story to provide a safe work place.scaffolding and Ladder Use This reference manual does not address all of the rules for the proper use of scaffolding and ladders. Always use this equipment as directed by the manufacturer. Scaffolding and ladders are intended to be used in specific ways and include guidelines appropriate to their use in a safe and effective manner. When manufacturers' information is not available, consult OSHA specifications for proper use. Consider the following supplemental guidelines when using ladders or scaffolding. Familiarize yourself and your employees with the provisions of OSHA's Scaffolding Standard (3150, 2002 Revised). Eleven key provisions from the document are listed: AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 PAGE 8-12

93 OSHA Fall protection is required on scaffolding for a 10 foot height above a lower level, 6 foot on other surfaces. 2. Guardrail height The height of the top rail for scaffolds manufactured and placed in service before January 1, 2000, can be between 36 inches (0.9 m) and 45 inches (1.2 m). The height of the top rail for scaffolds manufactured and placed in service after January 1, 2000, must be between 38 inches (0.97 m) and 45 inches (1.2 m). 3. When the cross-point of cross-bracing is used as a top rail, it must be between 38 inches (0.97 m) and 48 inches (1.3 m) above the work platform. 4. Support scaffold footings should be level and capable of supporting the loaded scaffold. The legs, poles, frames, and uprights should bear on base plates and mud sills. 5. Supported scaffold platforms should be fully planked or decked. 6. Guying ties, braces, or the equivalent must be used on supported scaffolds with a height-to-base measurement of more than 4:1 so that it is restrained from tipping. 7. Scaffolds and scaffold components must support at least 4 times the maximum intended load. Suspension scaffold rigging must be able to support at least 6 times the intended load. 8. Midrails must be installed approximately halfway between the top rail and the platform surface. When a cross-point or cross-bracing is used as a midrail, it must be between 20 inches (0.5 m) and 30 inches (0.8 m) above the work platform. 9. Erecting and Dismantling When erecting and dismantling supported scaffolds, a competent person must determine the feasibility of providing a safe means of access and fall protection for these operations. 10. Training Employers must train each employee who works on a scaffold on the hazards and the procedures to control the hazards. 11. Inspections Before each work shift, and after any occurrence that could affect the structural integrity, a competent person must inspect the scaffold and scaffold components for visible defects. Scaffold Capacity Requirements Consult OSHA guidelines before starting the design of scaffolding. Listed below are four helpful hints when considering scaffolding capacity: 1. Each scaffold and scaffold component must support, without failure, its own weight and at least four times the maximum intended load applied or transmitted to it. 2. Only load scaffolding in accordance with a scaffolding design developed by a qualified scaffold designer. 3. Scaffolds and scaffold components must not be loaded in excess of their maximum intended loads or rated capacities, whichever is less. 4. Load-carrying timber members shall be a minimum of 1,500 lbf/in 2 construction grade lumber. AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 PAGE 8-13

94 Use of Ladders 1. When portable ladders are used for access to an upper-landing surface, the side rails must extend at least 3 feet (.9 m) above the upper-landing surface. When such an extension is not possible, the ladder must be secured and a grasping device such as a grab rail must be provided to assist workers in mounting and dismounting the ladder. A ladder extension must not deflect under a load that would cause the ladder to slip off its supports. 2. Ladders must be maintained free of oil, grease, and other slipping hazards. 3. Ladders must not be loaded beyond the maximum intended load for which they were built or beyond their manufacturer's rated capacity. 4. Ladders must be used only for the purpose for which they were designed. 5. Non-self-supporting ladders must be used at an angle where the horizontal distance from the top support to the foot of the ladder is approximately one-quarter of the working length of the ladder. Wood job-made ladders with spliced side rails must be used at an angle where the horizontal distance is one-eighth the working length of the ladder. 6. Fixed ladders must be used at a pitch no greater than 90 degrees from the horizontal, measured from the back side of the ladder. 7. Ladders must be used only on stable and level surfaces unless secured to prevent accidental movement. 8. Ladders must not be used on slippery surfaces unless secured or provided with slip-resistant feet to prevent accidental movement. Slip-resistant feet must not be used as a substitute for care in placing, lashing, or holding a ladder upon slippery surfaces. 9. Ladders placed in areas such as passageways, doorways, driveways, or where they can be displaced by workplace activities or traffic must be secured to prevent accidental movement or a barricade must be used to keep traffic or activities away from the ladder. 10. The area around the top and bottom of the ladders must be kept clear. 11. The top of a non-self-supporting ladder must be placed with two rails supported equally unless it is equipped with a single-support attachment. 12. Ladders must not be moved, shifted, or extended while in use. 13. Ladders must have non-conductive side rails if they are used where the worker or the ladder could contact exposed energized electrical equipment. 14. The top or top step of a stepladder must not be used as a step. 15. Cross-bracing on the rear section of stepladders must not be used for climbing unless the ladders are designed and provided with steps for climbing on both front and rear sections. 16. Ladders must be inspected by a competent person for visible defects on a periodic basis and after any incident that could affect their safe use. 17. Single-rail ladders must not be used. 18. When ascending or descending a ladder, the worker must face the ladder. 19. Each worker must use at least one hand to grasp the ladder when climbing. AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 PAGE 8-14

95 20. A worker on a ladder must not carry any object or load that could cause him/her to lose balance and fall. 21. Generally it is a good idea to tie off the top and base. 8.3 Access and Barrier Issues Prior to coordinating the work for any project, the contractor/employer needs to determine what kind of access and/or barrier issues exist that are pertinent to the installation of commercial windows and doors. This involves determining the measures that are necessary to perform the work in a safe and effective manner for both the installer and the general public Fall Protection OSHA Revised Fall Protection in Construction provides a host of guidelines relative to fall hazards and protection from falling objects. This manual is not meant to cover all of the issues relative to fall protection, but outlines the concerns so that installers are aware of the hazards. OSHA reports that falls are the leading cause of worker fatalities. Each year, according to the OSHA report, an average of between 150 and 200 workers are killed, while more than 100,000 are injured due to construction site falls. The provisions covered under the standard include: The duty to provide fall protection Criteria and practices for fall protection systems Hazard assessment Fall protection and safety monitoring systems Controlled access zones Safety nets and guardrails Personal fall arrest systems Warning lines and barriers Train and educate yourself and your employees to protect themselves and others from possible injury due to falls and falling objects. For more information on training, contact: OSHA Training Institute Office of Training and Education 2020 South Arlington Heights Road Arlington Heights, Illinois (847) AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 PAGE 8-15

96 8.3.2 Jobsite Access Although typically not a safety issue, jobsite access can be a problem when it comes to material delivery. Installers should check the perimeter of the building in order to determine parking and unloading constraints. This is particularly important in cities where parking and access are at a premium, as it may determine when deliveries can be made. The route taken to deliver is also critical. Check for height restrictions and overhead obstructions that may cause problems for delivery. Although parking is probably the last thing that might be thought about, it may be a critical factor to installers and their ability to be effective. Always determine in advance where parking is permissible in order to avoid job costs that were not considered during the bidding stages. As parking may change over the course of the job due to the kind of work that is being performed, always stay in touch with the contractor for the latest requirements as they relate to worker parking and delivery parking. Elevator and hoist access is also a critical issue when unloading materials. Whenever possible, try to coordinate these activities with the contractor in order to avoid jobsite delivery problems and delays. Also consider the necessity of installing products in hoist bays at a later time, when equipment is removed, allowing access to the openings. Elevator access and size can play a critical role in determining how materials will be delivered. Many times the elevator is designed to carry personnel, not materials or equipment. The size of the elevator and your access for use may actually determine the shipping length of accessories, like subsills and receptors. As an example, if the maximum diagonal dimension from corner to corner inside the elevator is 18 ft, a 20ft box of trim will have to be hoisted another way. Determining these factors in advance of material delivery can be a critical factor in getting the work started. 8.4 Pre-installation Inspection A pre-installation inspection differs from a preliminary inspection in that all the materials and installation methods have been decided upon based on the preliminary inspection. The pre-installation inspection usually occurs when the installation crew arrives and involves an inspection of each opening. As part of the inspection: 1. Identify any unsafe building components, protruding nails and other structural hazards. 2. Check the structural soundness of the sill, head and jambs. 3. Check the opening for plumb, level, and square, and check rough opening dimensions. 4. Look for obvious signs of moisture (see Figure 8-6) before replacing windows and doors. Check doors, windows and the adjacent walls for evidence of damage from condensation or water leakage, as indicated by: Water stains, mold or mildew. This can be evident by sight or by smell. Stains and/or flaking at head of the old window. Staining or loose finish on the window frame. Stains below the corner of the opening, on the wall. Wet carpet or stains on the floor below or to the side of the opening. AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 PAGE 8-16

97 Ceiling or upper wall stains from the floor level above the opening. Figure 8-6 Signs of Water Penetration Protecting Existing Materials When replacing windows and doors, installers must take extra precautions to protect the customer's furnishings, floors and wall treatments. Place clean plastic drop cloths or other suitable covering materials over furnishings and on the floor to avoid damaging them. Do not remove windows or doors unless they can be replaced the same day. Inclement weather can be a primary source of damage to the existing construction and interior furnishings; therefore, never leave the interior of the building exposed for extended periods of time. In apartment buildings, be sure to coordinate the schedule for installation of the products with the building occupants, or property manager, prior to entry. Safety is also an important consideration when removing existing windows and doors. AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 PAGE 8-17

98 Erect barriers around exterior walkways, patios and other areas of potential harm to block them off from harming occupants or visitors. This may include overhead protection as well as guardrails in accordance with OSHA standards. Tape the existing glass panes so that in the event of breakage, shards of glass will be restricted from falling out of the window. Whenever possible, use a safety line to tie off existing windows and the new windows to be installed to avoid losing control and/or causing damage Reporting Construction Deficiencies While inspecting the openings, whether new construction or replacement, check for construction deficiencies. These may include the use of inappropriate construction practices, lack of required construction components, and decaying materials. If problems are detected, report the deficiencies to the approving authority in writing. This may be the building owner on replacement projects, or the general contractor on new construction projects. If directed to continue, be sure to get a written wavier of responsibility before proceeding Identifying and Removing Structural Components Avoid removal of any structural components whenever possible. Where it is necessary to remove a structural component of the building, consult with the proper authority before proceeding.typically, it may be necessary to consult with a licensed professional engineer, who is experienced in sizing framing materials before removal, and replacement of structural components. Whenever structural components must be removed, install a properly sized temporary support. For example, if the existing opening is to be enlarged, install a temporary support to support the existing load before removing loadbearing components Checking the Details Prior to beginning any work, determine the specifics (details) about what will be removed (in the case of replacement work), what will be installed, and how much clearance is necessary. Installers are encouraged to review all construction documents and communicate on the specific needs of the job with the contractor prior to installation of any materials. It is not uncommon for problems to be overlooked and show up entirely too late in the installation phase. As an example, suppose that the windows being installed are out-swinging-type casements. In this example, screens (if desired) may interfere with the drywall returns that are supposed to butt up to the window at the jambs. AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 PAGE 8-18

99 Another common problem occurs when there isn t enough clearance at the sill condition to allow for operating the rotating hardware handle. After the windows are installed and the finished sill is applied, it s too late to discover that the windows won t operate because the handle hits the sill. Although it is ordinarily the designer s responsibility to catch these kinds of problems, they are often overlooked. Many of these types of problems can be avoided if all parties involved in the work review the contract documents/drawings carefully. 8.5 Quality Control Inspection Quality control inspections are meant to take place periodically during installation (after a small percentage of the windows are installed), and again after all the windows and doors are installed. It is to the installer s benefit to have the initial installation checked and approved as early as possible in order to avoid the potential for rework later. Communicate with the approving authority when the job is ready for the initial inspection. This is often accomplished when the first few units are installed and anchored in place. It s recommended that anchor conditions are left exposed so a visual inspection can be performed. Take into consideration access to both the interior and exterior side of the units that are installed, and gain access to them as soon as possible. As an example, when working from the exterior on scaffolding, it would be much better to do a initial inspection before installation, as opposed to when the job is completed and access to the exterior is limited, or other materials are obstructing the view of critical areas. Once the installation of all of the windows/doors and associated trim pieces is complete, the final quality control inspection can be performed. See Chapter 23 for detailed information regarding this process. Notes: AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 PAGE 8-19

100 Sample Inspection Form (Replacement Work) (Page 1 of 2) Window Location Location of Windows and Doors North South East West Accessibility of Existing Openings? First Story Second Story or Higher Obstructions Landscaping Structures Existing HVAC/Duct Work or Plumbing Hoist Availability Elevator Availability Other Specific Location Notes Weather Barrier System Surface Barrier Membrane/Drainage System EIFS/GFRC Walls Obtained Project Details & Documentation Window Inspection Existing Window Frame Aluminum Metal Wood Vinyl Steel Other Exterior Trim Wood Metal Other None Historic Preservation of Trim is Required Wall Type Brick Block Concrete Stud Post Other Flashing Existing at Sill Existing at Head Not Existing Do Not Know Interior Finish Drywall Plaster Wood Panel Removable Other Interior Trim Wood Marble/Stone Other Structural Inspection Inspect for Structural Damage Deteriorating Foundation Walls Out of Square Head/Sill Not Level Unsound Head/Lintel Unsound Jambs Unsound Roof Unsound Ceiling Poor Anchorage Other Construction Deficiencies (List) Inspect for Moisture Water stains inside around door/window Stains or flaking of paint at head of old window Staining or loosened finish on the window frame Stains below corner on interior wall Wet carpet on floor below or to the side of the window Ceiling or upper wall stains from upstairs window opening Mold/Mildew Present Reason for Items Above Inspect for Lead Windows installed after 1978 Windows installed before 1978 Inspect for asbestos Siding Joint Compound Other Job Site Inspection Job Site Hazards Low Electrical Lines Broken Glass Insect Nests Building Occupied Trash and Debris AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 PAGE 8-20

101 Overhead Work Other Potential Hazards AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 PAGE 8-21

102 Sample Inspection Form (Replacement Work) (Page 2 of 2) Planned Access Needed To Access Openings Floor Work Scaffolding Ladders Scissor/Boom Lift Other Availability of Parking/ Delivery? No Known Problems Limited Worker Parking Limited Delivery Times Must Coordinate All Deliveries Other Specific Details for Above Construction Integration Coordinate Integration of Various Products Flashing Materials Wall Weather Barrier Sealant Type, Selection, Use & Compatibility Reuse of Existing Treatments Must Not Disturb Interior Existing Window/Door Treatments Are To Be Reused. Remove Treatments and Turn Over to Client New Treatment Sizes Will Match Existing Specific Treatment Info. New Windows/Doors Sightlines Must Match Existing (Historical) Eyebrow at Head Arch Top Circle Top Equal Leg Frame Unequal Leg Frame Other New Exterior Trim/Pan Sightlines Must Match Existing (Historical) Colonial Panning Historical Panning Preset Panning Wrap Around Panning Wood Mullion Covers Extenders/Expanders Formed Trim/Capping Other Interior Trim Reuse Existing Rectangular Trim Square Trim Special Shape Trim Curved Trim (Arch Top) New Extended Stool Other Anchorage Requirements Window/Door Anchorage Steel Twist Anchor Through Wall Anchor Aluminum Clips Anchor Through Trim Steel Clips Receptors Subsills Other Mullion Anchorage None - Floating Clip Angle At Head And Sill Of All Mullions Special Considerations Transitions Transition From Full Height Opening to Partial Height 90º/135º Inside Corner 90º/135º Outside Corner Special Corners Horizontal Ribbons w/ Male/Female Mullions Vertical Stack Windows Stack Mullions Parapet Wall Intersect. Fixed Sidelites Other Screens/Child Guards Full Screens Half Screens Fiberglass Mesh Aluminum Mesh Security Screens Existing Child Guards New Child Guards Other Hardware Requirements Limit Opening Pole Operating Hdw. Security Locks Roto Operators Stainless Steel Req d. AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 PAGE 8-22

103 Egress/ADA Requirements Allow for Egress (where required) Allow for Ramps at SGD None Known Other AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 PAGE 8-23

104 Sample Inspection Form (New Construction) (Page 1 of 2) Window Location Location of Windows and Doors North South East West Accessibility of Existing Openings First Story Second Story or Higher Obstructions Landscaping Structures Hoist Availability Elevator Availability Other Specific Location Notes Weather Barrier System Surface Barrier Membrane/Drainage System EIFS/GFRC Walls Opening Inspection Existing Opening Cond. Plumb Level Square True Rough Opening Dimensions Wall Type Brick Block Concrete Stone EIFS/Stucco Steel Stud Wood Stud Other Thru Wall Flashing Existing at Sill Existing at Head Interior Finish Drywall Plaster Wood Panel Other Removable Interior Trim Wood Metal Marble Other Construction Integration Coordinate Integration of Various Products Flashing Materials Wall Weather Barrier Sealant Type, Selection, Use & Compatibility Structure Inspection Inspect Openings for Structural Problems Condition of Substrate Poor Anchorage or loose conditions Framing Missing Other Construction Deficiencies (List) Contractor Notified and Documentation is On File Specify Problems Job Site Inspection Job Site Hazards Low Electrical Lines Trash and Debris Overhead Work Openings in Floors Protected Walkway Will Be Required Guardrails Required Other Potential Hazards Planned Access Used To Access Openings Floor Work Scaffolding Ladders Scissor/Boom Lift Hoist Use Permitted Elevator Use Permitted Other Availability of Parking/ Delivery? No Known Problems Limited Worker Parking Limited Delivery Times AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 PAGE 8-24

105 Must Coordinate All Deliveries Specific Details for Above AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 PAGE 8-25

106 Sample Inspection Form (New Construction) (Page 2 of 2) New Windows/Doors Eyebrow at Head Arch Top Circle Top Equal Leg Frame Unequal Leg Frame Other New Exterior Trim/Pan Sightlines Must Match Existing (Historical) Colonial Panning Historical Panning Preset Panning Wrap Around Panning Three Piece Mullions Receptors Subsills Sill Member Other Interior Trim Rectangular Trim Square Trim Special Shape Trim Curved Trim (Arch Top) Aluminum Stool Wood Stool Marble Stool Other Anchorage Requirements Window/Door Anchorage Steel Twist Anchor Through Wall Anchor Aluminum Clips Anchor Through Trim Steel Clips Receptors Subsills Other Mullion Anchorage None Floating Male/Female Combo Clip Angle At Head And Sill Of All Mullions Special Considerations Transitions Transition From Full Height Opening to Partial Height 90º/135º Inside Corner 90º/135º Outside Corner Special Corners Splay Wall Horizontal Ribbons w/ Male/Female Mullions Vertical Stack Windows Stack Mullions Parapet Wall Intersect. Fixed Sidelites Overhead Transom Special Flashing/Coping Other Screens/Child Guards Full Screens Half Screens Fiberglass Mesh Aluminum Mesh Security Screens Child Guards Other Hardware Requirements Limit Opening Pole Operating Hdw. Security Locks Roto Operators Stainless Steel Req d. Window Washer Bolts Multi Point Locks Heavy Duty Balances Stainless Stl. Door Track Alarm System Egress/ADA Requirements Allow for Egress at Sleeping Rooms Allow for Ramps at SGD None Known Other Special Glass Requirements Security Glass Tempered Glass Doors Tempered Glass Sidelites Tempered Glass Windows At The Following Locations Breather Tubes Req d. Spandrel Glass Panels for AC Units Between Glass Blinds Other Field Testing Required Testing By Lab/Consult. Testing By Manufacturer Contract Documents Governing Documents Job Specifications Architectural Drawings Detailed Shop Drawings Mfg. Install. Instructions Estimate/Contract AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 PAGE 8-26

107 Other Other Job Specific Notes: AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 PAGE 8-27

108 Table of Contents 9.1 Building Codes Development of Codes Regional Model Building Codes Model Energy Codes Standards Home Rule Doctrine Accessibility Windows Doors Emergency Escape Requirements Safety Glazing Types of Safety Glass Safety Glass Labeling IBC Safety Glass Standards This voluntary specification was developed by representative members of AAMA as advisory information and published as a public service. AAMA disclaims all liability for the use, application or adaptation of materials published herein. Copyright 2015 American Architectural Manufacturers Association 1827 Walden Office Square, Suite 550, Schaumburg, IL Phone: 847/ Fax: 847/ webmaster@aamanet.org Web Site: AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 9-I

109 9.0 Codes, Standards and Specifications 9.1 Building Codes The construction industry is governed by a group of regulations and requirements. These rules and regulations are designed to provide uniformity on minimum design and construction practices, thereby avoiding inconsistencies arising from differing approaches of architects, builders and installers. Once national, state or local codes are adopted by jurisdictions, they become law and must be followed Development of Codes Regulations and requirements represent input from various interested groups. Because of the large number and diversity of these groups, it is virtually impossible to develop one single set of criteria or standards to govern the manufacture, selection, installation and maintenance of windows and doors. Numerous standards, codes and ordinances have been developed. Installers must comply with the code that relates to their work. However, overlap in requirements can be confusing without a basic understanding of their development and enforceability. Local government regulates the construction industry by means of building codes that are developed through an arduous process. First, specifications are developed to clearly describe technical requirements for materials, procedures and services. Specifications may state the requirements for a desired product and the process used to produce it. Standards are guidelines or principles that are agreed upon by a broad spectrum of the industry, typically working through an association. Once standards or requirements are published, they may become codes. Once that code is adopted by a jurisdiction, it becomes law (see Figure 9-1). AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 9-2

110 Figure 9-1 Development of Codes Regional Model Building Codes In the past, there were three regional model building codes written by three separate organizations of building officials. Each state, county and municipal jurisdiction typically adopted one of these regional codes. They were known as the Uniform Building Code (UBC) published by ICBO, the BOCA National Building Code, and the SBCCI Standard Building Code. In order to try to create one uniform code used by all jurisdictions, an International Code Council (ICC) was developed to replace the previous three. The code developed by the ICC to address commercial construction is the International Building Code (IBC). An updated edition of the code is published every three years. This code and its revisions don't become law until adopted by the local jurisdiction Model Energy Codes About one-third of all energy in the United States is consumed in buildings. This high level of usage led to the development of various energy standards and codes, with support from the U.S. Department of Energy (DOE). Many states, such as California and Oregon, publish their own energy codes. Other states rely heavily on the Model Energy Codes, or the International Energy Conservation Code, which replaced the Model Energy Code in The Model Energy Codes were initially developed through a joint effort of the three model code agencies, BOCA, ICBO and SBCCI, called CABO (Council of American Building Officials). This joint effort was superceded by the formation of the International Code Council (ICC) by these same three agencies in Subsequently, the name of the Model Energy Code was changed to the International Energy Conservation Code (IECC) to be consistent with the other codes published by the ICC. See Table 9-1 for contact information. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 9-3

111 ICC (International Code Council) 500 New Jersey Avenue, NW 6th Floor, Washington, DC Phone: 888/ Fax: 202/ Web: Table 9-1 Building Code Agencies There are also several housing codes that may refer to window and door installation. They include the following: Basic Housing - Property Maintenance Code HUD Code ICC - International Building Code SCBBI SSTD 10, Standard for Hurricane Resistance Residential Construction Standards There are numerous groups that work diligently to develop standards for the window and door (see Table 9-2). Agencies and departments within the federal government also develop standards to protect the health, safety, and welfare of citizens. Many of their standards, which have been adopted as federal codes, address window and door requirements and must be followed. ADA Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) became law in 1990 and was implemented by the Department of Justice on July 26, These regulations have had far-reaching effects upon the glazing trade, especially regarding access to, and use of, buildings by the disabled. CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC) is a federal agency that regulates product safety. Safety glazing regulation 16 CFR Part 1201 became law on July 6, 1977, and mandates safety glazing in all doors designed primarily for human passage. OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) is a division of the U.S. Department of Labor that develops and enforces safety requirements for the protection of employees in the workplace. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 9-4

112 AAMA (American Architectural Manufacturers Association) 1827 Walden Office Square Suite 550 Schaumburg, IL Phone: 847/ Fax: 847/ Web: ANSI (American National Standards Institute, Inc.) 25 West 43rd Street, 4th Floor New York, NY Phone: 212/ Fax: 212/ Web: ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials) 100 Barr Harbor Drive PO Box C700 West Conshohocken, PA Phone: 610/ Fax: 610/ Web: IGMA (Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance) 1500 Bank Street, Suite 300 Ottawa, Ontario K1H 1B8 CANADA Phone: 613/ Fax: 613/ Web: NFRC (National Fenestration Rating Council) 6305 Ivy Lane, Suite 140 Greenbelt, MD Phone: 301/ Fax: 301/ Web: AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 9-5

113 WDMA (Window & Door Manufacturers Association) 1400 East Touhy Avenue, Suite 470 Des Plaines, IL Phone: Fax: Web: Table 9-2 Agencies Developing Standards 9.2 Home Rule Doctrine Because of the large number of specifications, codes and standards that affect the window and door industry, conflicts between their requirements will inevitably arise. When a conflict occurs, one shall remember the concept of "Home Rule Doctrine," which means, the most stringent requirement applies." Our governmental structure allows the lowest governing body to have final control, as long as their requirement is equal to, or more stringent than, the state or federal requirement. An example of "Home Rule Doctrine" might be maximum sill height for an egress window in an apartment building (see Figure 9-2). The 2003 IBC allows a maximum of 44 in. A state code may reduce this to 42 in. The county code may be 40 in, and the local code may be even lower, specifying a maximum of 38 in. In this case, the 38 in maximum would be enforced because it is the most stringent. The Property Owners' Association's CC&Rs (Covenants, Conditions and Restrictions) could reduce the sill height even more. 9.3 Accessibility The Fair Housing Amendments Act of 1988 and the American Disabilities Act Access Guidelines (ADAAG) require that public buildings and multifamily dwellings (generally considered to be buildings consisting of four or more dwelling units) include certain features of accessible design. Therefore, installers of doors must have an awareness of the Fair Housing Act and ADAAG design and construction requirements Windows The Fair Housing Act Amendment requirement does not apply to windows; however, the ADAAG and ICC/ANSI A117.1 do have requirements for accessible windows. These requirements are provided in Chapter 11 of the IBC Doors The ADAAG and ANSI A117.1 require some doors to be accessible. The requirements can be found in Chapter 11 of the IBC. The requirements apply to all doors that are on an accessible path of egress in the building, which includes accessible spaces or dwelling units, and most public areas in buildings where accessible spaces or dwelling units are required. This includes most commercial buildings, and the common areas of multi-family housing developments. When installing exterior glass doors in multi-family dwelling units, consider this list of pointers and cautions: AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 9-6

114 Doors must be wide enough to enable a person in a wheelchair to maneuver through easily. Doors must have a minimum clear-opening width of 32 (measured from face of door to the stop with door open 90 degrees) for wheelchair access. Exterior door thresholds and sliding door tracks typically are not to exceed 1/2 to 3/4" in height. Thresholds and changes in level at these locations are to be beveled with a slope no greater than 1:2. Consult with governing authorities for specific height dimensions. Minimum clear width for an accessible route inside the unit is 36. All types of doors used for human egress are covered - hinged, sliding and folding. Overhead doors and similar doors used for the movement of goods and equipment are not covered. Doors leading to any outdoor amenities that the accessible dwelling may have (e.g. balcony, patio, deck) shall comply with these requirements. If a deck or patio has doorways leading into two or more separate rooms, all these doors must be accessible. Requirements apply to: - Public and common-use doors; - Doors leading into an individual dwelling unit that is required to be accessible. The number of accessible dwelling units required depends upon the total number of dwelling units provided, and is given in tabular form in Chapter 11 of the International Building Code; and - Most doors within the accessible dwelling unit itself. There are some exceptions for doors within the accessible dwelling unit that are not normally considered egress doors, such as doors to small closets or access doors for mechanical equipment. Doors in public or common-use areas, when installed, must be in conformance with ICC/ANSI A Hallways, passages and corridors must be wide enough to allow room to maneuver a wheelchair throughout. 9.4 Emergency Escape Requirements Emergency escape and rescue opening (previously called emergency egress ) refers to a means of exiting a building in the event of emergency, or defines the opening by which an emergency rescue can be performed. The Model Codes (and the National Fire Protection Association NFPA 101) include specific requirements for emergency escape and rescue for doors and windows. This section briefly discusses emergency escape, which is titled "Emergency Escape and Rescue Openings" in the 2006 IBC, Section Each sleeping room in buildings of four stories or less, above grade (some exceptions may apply), is required to have at least one emergency escape and rescue door, window or skylight. An emergency escape and rescue opening must conform to the following requirements (see Figure 9-2): A minimum net clear openable area of 5.7 square feet, A minimum net clear openable height dimension of 24", A minimum net clear openable width dimension of 20" and A finished sill height of not more than 44" above the floor. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 9-7

115 The required dimensions are to be achieved through the normal operation of the window without the use of keys or tools. Normal operation of the window does not include removing a sash or removing a pin on the casement hardware to swing it fully open. When installing windows (new construction and replacement windows), the installer must be aware of the emergency escape and rescue requirements enforced by the local jurisdiction. Often one type of window, such as casement, will meet the requirement, but a slider or hung window of the same size would not. The installer shall not install windows into residential sleeping rooms that do not meet emergency escape requirements. This limitation includes retrofit windows installed into existing window frames that may significantly reduce the emergency escape opening dimensions. Some jurisdictions have adopted special regulations that dictate the amount the emergency escape and rescue opening can be reduced. This permitted reduction varies from 3 to 6, depending on the jurisdiction, and is generally permitted in both the vertical and horizontal direction. To be safe, an installer shall always consult the local building official on the requirements in their particular area before installing windows. Some manufacturers offer windows or skylights that are designed specifically for emergency escape and rescue. They might be used in areas that open up directly onto a roof or balcony. Windows of this nature are designed for emergency escape and rescue only, and may incorporate a label that signifies Emergency Escape Only. This typically means that the window is large enough to be used in an emergency, yet it s not designed to be used to provide typical everyday ventilation. If emergency escape and rescue windows or skylights of this type are used for purposes other than emergency escape and rescue, especially if they open to the exterior or are left open for extended periods of time, they may pose a significant liability issue. Always caution building owners against allowing the use of these windows for anything other than emergency escape and rescue, and insist that the warning labels not be removed. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 9-8

116 Figure 9-2 Emergency Escape Requirements 9.5 Safety Glazing The IBC, as well as the federal government and each of the three previous model codes, requires safety glass to be installed in hazardous locations (locations subject to human impact). This requirement is intended to protect occupants from injury caused by hitting the glass with a dynamic force, which may be caused by running, walking, or falling into the glass. The requirements discussed in this chapter are based on safety glazing requirements set forth by the 2003 International Building Code, Section The sections that follow provide an overview of the safety glass requirements; however, the prevailing code must be reviewed for each specific locality. The most current version of the International Building Code is the 2006 IBC Types of Safety Glass The most common forms of safety glass used in commercial applications are tempered and laminated. Safety glass can be plain, patterned, clear, tinted or translucent (such as "obscure" panels sometimes used adjacent to entry doors). All safety glass must be manufactured and tested to one, or both, of the following safety glass standards: American National Standards Institute ANSI Z (reaffirmed 1994), and the Code of Federal Regulations CPSC 16 CFR The 2003 IBC Section permits compliance with ANSI Z97.1 instead of CPSC 16 CFR 1201, only for wired glass in assemblies that are required to be rated for fire resistance These assemblies are not permitted in educational buildings (kindergarten through grade 12), or in the playing areas of athletic facilities (gymnasiums, basketball and racquetball courts, etc.). The 2006 IBC does not reference this exception. The IBC dictates which assemblies are required to be fire resistance rated. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 9-9

117 9.5.2 Safety Glass Labeling Each lite (pane) of safety glass must be permanently identified with a label etched or painted with a ceramic frit fired into the glass. A permanent identification label, commonly called a "bug", must be present on each pane of glass installed where safety glazing is required. The permanent label must identify the labeler (whether manufacturer or installer) by name or logo, and state the ANSI or CPSC safety glazing standard it complies with. In the IBC, the label is to be provided through participation in a third-party, quality control program that reviews the testing of the product, and conducts periodic inspection of its production. There is no standard specifying the location of permanent labels on safety glass; however, manufacturers most commonly place them in a bottom corner. Shown in Figure 9-3 are examples of three "bugs" and the information they typically contain. Figure 9-3 Permanent Label "Bugs" One of the first things any installer shall do is to check each window on the job for the safety glazing identification. This will help installers recognize that there is a requirement for safety glazing on the job and assist them in making the determination as to the correct location of the product IBC Safety Glass Standards The most widely enforced safety glass requirements for windows and doors are based upon the 2000 or 2003 IBC. The following information is a summary of what is presented in Chapter 24 of the 2003 IBC. Always refer to the latest version of the code for complete and up-to-date information as well as those items not covered in this summary. The latest version of the International Building Code is the 2006 IBC. Glazing in Operable Windows and Fixed Glazed Panels (Adjacent to Doors) 1. Safety glass is required in any operable window or fixed panel adjacent to a door (see Figure 9-4) where: AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 9-10

118 The nearest exposed edge of the glazing is within a 24 arc of either vertical edge of the door in a closed position; and Where the bottom exposed edge of the glazing is less than 60" above the walking surface. Exceptions: Not required when there is an intervening wall or other permanent barrier between the door and the glazing. Not required for glazing in walls that are perpendicular (90 ) to the plane of the wall the door is in. Figure 9-4 Safety Glass for Operable Windows and Fixed Glazed Panels (Adjacent to Doors) Glazing In Operable Windows and Individual Fixed Panels (Not Adjacent to Doors) 1. Safety glass is required in individual fixed or operable panels which meet all of the following conditions: The exposed area of an individual pane is greater than 9 ft 2 ; The exposed bottom edge of the glazing is less than 18 above the floor; The exposed top edge of the glazing is greater than 36 above the floor; and One or more walking surface(s) is within 36 horizontally of the plane of glass (see Figure 9-5). Exceptions: Not required when a protective bar 1½ or more in height, capable of withstanding a horizontal load of 50 pounds per linear foot without contacting the glass is installed on the accessible sides of the glazing 34 to 38 above the floor. Not required in the outboard lite in an insulating glass unit or multiple glazing where the bottom exposed edge of the glass is 25 or more above any grade, roof, walking surface or other horizontal or sloped (within 45 of horizontal) surface adjacent to the glass exterior. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 9-11

119 Figure 9-5 Safety Glass in Fixed and Operable Panes (Not Adjacent to Doors) Glazing In Guards and Railings or Walls and Fences Enclosing Swimming Pools, Hot Tubs and Spas, etc. Glazing in special areas like those listed above is outside the scope of this manual; however, installers shall be aware that special requirements may apply. Always refer to the governing code for special requirements. Safety Glazing in Hazardous Locations (Swing and Sliding Glass Doors) The following are considered specific hazardous locations and require safety glazing according to the IBC: Glazing in swing doors, except jalousies Glazing in fixed and sliding panels of sliding door assemblies Glazing in unframed swing doors. Exceptions: Not required for glass in doors where a 3 sphere would be unable to pass through the glass opening. Safety Glazing in Stairways, Ramps, Athletic Facilities and Glass in Floors and Sidewalks The IBC specifically covers additional special areas requiring safety glazing, which are outside the scope of this manual. Always consult the codes to determine safety glazing requirements for special areas on your particular project. Notes: AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 9-12

120 Table of Contents 10.1 Manufacturer's Installation Instructions General Installation Guidelines Following Shop Drawings Special Circumstances When Conflicts Arise Common Cautions For Installers...3 This voluntary specification was developed by representative members of AAMA as advisory information and published as a public service. AAMA disclaims all liability for the use, application or adaptation of materials published herein. Copyright 2015 American Architectural Manufacturers Association 1827 Walden Office Square, Suite 550, Schaumburg, IL Phone: 847/ Fax: 847/ webmaster@aamanet.org Web Site: AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 10-i

121 10.0 Manufacturer's Installation Instructions There are numerous manufacturers of windows and glass doors across the country. Many manufacturers have developed specific uses and installation procedures for their products, which are referred to as "manufacturer's installation instructions." These manufacturers provide installation instructions for guidance and direction in the proper installation of their products. Never take action(s) inconsistent with the manufacturer s installation instructions without consultation with all appropriate parties. Manufacturer's instructions shall be considered a requirement, not an option. At any time that the manufacturer's instructions appear inconsistent with the job requirements, the installer must seek further information from the responsible architect, builder, and manufacturer. Action(s) inconsistent with manufacturer instructions must never be taken without consultation with all appropriate parties Manufacturer's Installation Instructions Manufacturers develop and build products to meet industry standards. These products must meet specific performance requirements when built and installed in a certain manner. It is not the intent of this manual to override the manufacturer's recommendations on proper installation techniques. This manual is meant to provide guidance and to reinforce the use of the manufacturer's installation instructions. For example: Assume that there are no architectural drawings, specifications, or shop drawings. If a manufacturer's installation instructions indicate that the products are to be installed with 1/4" diameter 3" long anchor bolts at 16 on center, those recommendations must be followed. The manufacturer is being specific regarding the need to attach the product at certain locations. It is entirely possible that the manufacturer has determined through testing and/or calculations that the product will perform better when attached in this manner. If another source, such as this manual, indicates that products are to be attached at a minimum of 18 on center, the manufacturer's instructions shall still be followed. Understanding this distinction is critical to an installer's success in meeting his obligation to install the products in an appropriate manner. To reduce the potential for confusion on the requirements of the project, carefully review the construction documents listed below: Local, Regional and National Building Codes Contract Documents Architectural Specifications and Drawings Detailed Shop Drawings, Installation Instructions and Job Calculations AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 10-1

122 10.2 General Installation Guidelines The guidelines and principles outlined in this manual are general installation guidelines and minimum recommended project requirements. The manufacturer's instructions always take precedent over the guidelines contained in this manual. This manual does not offer recommendations specific to every manufacturer, but it does offer recommendations for basic installation practices. The installation practices outlined in this manual have been developed by consensus among industry experts in the field of building construction Following Shop Drawings If installation instructions are not provided with the product, consult the contractor, manufacturer or dealer to determine if detailed shop drawings are available before proceeding. Shop drawings are commonly provided, and may include job specific applications based on architectural drawings, specifications and other contract documents. Whenever job approved shop drawings are provided, follow the installation procedures specific to the job. When no installation instructions or shop drawings are available, use the procedures outlined in this manual as a minimum installation requirement Special Circumstances Occasionally, the installation of windows and doors differs from the "norm." If the manufacturer's installation instructions and the guidelines offered in this manual, do not address a special circumstance found on the job, the installer is responsible for contacting the contractor or manufacturer for specific instructions relative to the job in question. Many manufacturers have trained engineering personnel on staff who can assist with special applications. Often the manufacturer provides products based on a specific order without knowing the intended use of the products. Share detailed information with the manufacturer to correctly address the special circumstances that arise When Conflicts Arise There will be cases when conflicts arise between the installer and the approving authority. An installer may be told to install a product in a certain manner, which is in direct conflict with the manufacturer's instructions, job calculations, and/or the principles outlined in this manual. When this situation occurs, immediately contact the responsible party about the situation. The responsible party shall handle and resolve any disputes and get a written wavier of responsibility if the work is to proceed as instructed by the approving authority. Full documentation of the situation including the conflicting instructions, specific details, photographs and the actions taken by the installer must be done in writing as a matter of permanent record. Installers and their management are encouraged to maintain these records for a period of not less than 10 years. AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 10-2

123 10.6 Common Cautions For Installers Manufacturers report that a number of common problems are found in the field. The following list of cautions is provided to help the installer avoid these problems: Always follow the installation instructions and/or shop drawings. When working from shop drawings or measurement sheets, make sure you have the latest version. Check the route for the manufacturer s delivery vehicle making sure that it can meet the height restrictions and deliver to the site, especially under bridges and viaducts. Upon arrival, make sure to account for all materials delivered at the job site. Place these materials in a secure area to avoid damage and/or loss. Make sure to pinpoint where tempered, laminated, or obscure glass is required once the materials arrive on site. To avoid damaging the corners of the frames, use a protective mat on the ground when offloading products from the truck. Make sure that the condition you are anchoring to is of sufficient strength (especially on replacement work). Upon investigation you may find that the condition is rotten or loose. Handle windows/doors with grids carefully in order to avoid damaging the grids. Always check screen quantities, locations and sizes. However, in order to avoid damage, leave the screens off the product until the job is finished. Always check existing back seals that were applied in the factory. If the seal is damaged, contact the factory on the proper materials/methods required for resealing. Always check the windows/doors for missing or damaged weep hole covers which may have occurred during transport. In replacement applications always check for obstructions like columns, sheer walls, spandrel areas, etc. to determine if special installation techniques will be required. Be careful when removing existing window treatments if they are to be reused. Find out if the treatments are to be reused, and if they will still work based on the new window sizes and configurations. When sash must be removed, make sure to mark the sash and the corresponding frame (example: F-12 and S-12). Always place sash back in the correct frame; it may have been adjusted in the factory to specifically fit that unit. Inspect the opening conditions not only for the correct size, but also for square, anchorage and sealant adhesion. Don t remove any windows until double-checking the openings to verify the correct fit. Check the drawings and the actual building conditions for hardware operation clearance. Raised stools, blinds and window treatments often block the rotation and/or access to operable hardware handles. Make sure enough of the correct size and type fasteners and shims for installation are available. AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 10-3

124 Non-corrosive hardware and fasteners are commonly provided as an upgrade to avoid corrosion in coastal areas. If the project is in proximity of a coastline, make sure the manufacturer is informed at the time of order. Make sure all accessories and the window/door frames are set plumb, level and square. Never block weep holes with sealant or any other materials that will keep water from draining properly. Check windows for hardware damage and proper operation. Operate and adjust hardware as required in order to avoid future damage and/or accidents to those who might use them in the future. Don t drill through window/door frames to apply alarm systems. Drilling through frames often allows water into places where it can t get out. To avoid sagging, use extra precautions when attaching the hinge jamb of casement windows and hinged doors. Don t apply films to the glass without first consulting with the window/door or glass manufacturer. Films can often lead to heat buildup and glass breakage. Don t block the drainage path (weep holes) at doors when used in conjunction with patios involving brick, stone or concrete pavers. When necessary, use a starter sill, and/or shim the door high enough to clear any obstructions. Don t attach through the glazing cavity with fasteners. This may cause glass breakage in the future. Don t apply field limit devices or other types of hardware without first consulting with the manufacturer. Limit devices may cause additional clearance and/or operation problems, and may void the warranty or violate ventilation codes. Don t block breather holes with sealant on dual sash. Breather holes are meant to allow air circulation. Always seal metal-to-metal joints. Also make sure end dams are sealed properly on sub-sills. Be careful about stripping out the head of fasteners on hardware or other materials that may require future removal or adjustment. If the head looks like it is starting to strip out, replace it with the same size fastener. Use compatible sealants that are meant to allow for movement due to expansion/contraction and/or interstory displacement. Know the sealant manufacturer s guidelines for maximum and minimum temperatures when applying sealant. If a sealant will be used for purposes other than those specified or recommended, check with the window and sealant manufacturers to ensure that the substituted sealant has adequate adhesion, and is compatible with all contact surfaces. Check blind tilt control knobs to ensure they are not missing or damaged. Don t use (or allow others to use) the finished window/door opening as an access for material delivery. This often results in the build up of debris inside the frame and/or causes damage to window frames and door thresholds. Make sure the framing surfaces are protected from corrosive materials such as mortar and sulfuric acid, which are commonly found in most external cleaning solutions. AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 10-4

125 Don t leave adhesively applied covers on the finish for extended periods of time. Be sure to remove these materials prior to the final perimeter seal. Be extremely careful about welding after installation. Shield the glass and frame from weld flash as damage/breakage may occur. Use extreme caution when field applying items such as air conditioners, security screens, sun shades, window guards, window treatments and others, as drilling and mounting to frames may cause water and air infiltration and may have an effect on the operation of the units. When drilling through the frame to make attachments, make sure to seal the penetration. Don t assume anything. If you need clarification, seek guidance. Notes: AAMA CIM-XX, Draft #X, Dated X/X/15 Page 10-5

126 Table of Contents 11.0 Measuring and Ordering Taking Measurements Following Manufacturer's Requirements Vertical and Horizontal Measurements Measuring Spring Lines and Making Templates for Curves Wall Depth and Window Location Checking Wall for Plumb Checking Level Clearance Provisions Allowing for Clearances Allowance for Out-of-Square Allowing for Accessories Installation Tolerances Shipping Instructions This voluntary specification was developed by representative members of AAMA as advisory information and published as a public service. AAMA disclaims all liability for the use, application or adaptation of materials published herein. Copyright 2015 American Architectural Manufacturers Association 1827 Walden Office Square, Suite 550, Schaumburg, IL Phone: 847/ Fax: 847/ webmaster@aamanet.org Web Site: AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 11-I

127 11.0 Measuring and Ordering Many factors must be considered before ordering a window or door. Frequently, windows and doors arrive on site and do not fit in the opening properly because the exact opening measurements were not taken. Additionally, some errors occur when the proper allowance for clearance, sealant joints or accessory items are not taken into consideration. In addition to opening measurements, it is critical to determine the following factors prior to ordering a window or door: 1. The Type of Wall Masonry or Concrete Block Pre-cast Concrete Wood Frame Steel Stud 2. The Frame Style (see Figure 11-1a) Equal Leg Frame Unequal Leg Frame Equal Leg Frame (with Receptor System) Equal Leg Frame (with Panning Trim) Extended Flange (Retro Flange) Welded Vinyl Frame (see Figure 11-1b) AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 11-1

128 Figure 11-1a Various Styles of Frames Figure 11-1b Welded Vinyl Frame 3. Types of Windows or Doors and their related hardware (see Chapters 4 and 5) 4. Desired Thermal Factors (see Chapter 2, Sections 2.4 through 2.10) 5. Other Design Considerations (see Chapter 2, Sections 2.11 through 2.14) 6. Check for Obstructions and Other Special Conditions AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 11-2

129 Build-ups at the head, sill, or jambs where the original detail has been covered with ceramic tile, Corian, marble, mirrors, sheetrock or other materials that will affect the installation or anchorage of the new window. Consider the presence and location of louvers, air-conditioners, electrical wire, and conduits and determine whether these materials need to be removed and reinstalled Obstructions such as a drop ceiling, window treatments or sill conditions that will prevent the proper operation of the window must be considered. Check the entire pathway, starting from where the trucks are to be unloaded to where the final installation will take place for each opening. This must be done in order to determine if the windows and/or accessories can be distributed without possible damage. Most manufacturers build windows to order based on exact sizes provided by the customer. Others, as part of their contract, determine the appropriate size based on field measurements. The process of establishing field measurements for window/ door sizing is critical to the proper determination of the exact product size. In new construction applications, the sizes are generally based on a set of architectural drawings and/or shop drawings. In the case of retrofit construction, the window sizes are based on a set of field measurements taken by professionals at the job site. Examples of "Field Measuring Sheets are provided at the end of this chapter Taking Measurements If the installer is the party responsible for ordering the window or door, he must first determine the exact measurements of the opening. There are three critical opening measurements: Width (Exterior and Interior) Height (Exterior and Interior) Squareness (Diagonals) An installer is required to practice the correct methods of taking measurements, and make allowances necessary for any field problems or clearance requirements. Remember: 1. When replacing or installing more than one product in a building, measure each opening. 2. Use consistent measuring units for the project, either the inch-pound units of feet, inches, etc., or metric units, but never mix two measuring systems on the same project. 3. Always show width dimension first Following Manufacturer's Requirements Installation practices and measuring requirements may vary among manufacturers. It is important to check the manufacturer's measuring requirements before measuring. In the event that the manufacturer's measuring instructions provided with a product differ from the requirements of this manual, the manufacturer's instructions shall prevail Vertical and Horizontal Measurements Construction methods and/or building movement can alter the size of an opening from bottom to top and from side to side. An opening may measure (from jamb to jamb) 4'-5" at the top of the opening and measure 4'-5½" at the bottom. To eliminate the problem of inaccurate measuring, measure the opening at three different locations, horizontally and vertically, to ensure he is using the proper dimensions. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 11-3

130 Width When ordering a product, the width measurement is given first. Measure the width from jamb to jamb for new construction openings as well as for replacement products (see Figure 11-2). 1. Measure width at three locations: Top Middle Bottom 2. Record the three dimensions and use the smallest dimension for determining the new window size. For existing steel frames that are to remain, measure to the smallest daylight opening. Figure 11-2 Measuring Width Height The height of the window is calculated by measuring from the sill to the header. Replacement products are sometimes measured from head jamb to finish sill (see Figure 11-3). Use the steps below to measure the height of the opening: 1. Measure the height at three locations: Left side Center Right side 2. Record the three dimensions and use the smallest dimension. For existing steel frames that are to remain, measure to the smallest daylight opening. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 11-4

131 Figure 11-3 Measuring Height Measuring for Square Openings are seldom square. Always measure the diagonals for squareness before ordering a product (see Figure 11-4). Out-of-square openings can force a new product out-of-square during installation, resulting in seal failure, water leaks and incorrect operation of locks. Determine if the opening is square by: 1. Measuring from bottom left corner to top right corner 2. Measuring from bottom right corner to top left corner Record the two dimensions. If they are equal, the opening is square. If they are not, the opening is out-of-square. Note: For more information on openings that are out-of-square, see Chapter 11, Section AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 11-5

132 Figure 11-4 Measuring For Square Measuring Spring Lines and Making Templates for Curves Curve-top windows, or windows with other arches, require special measurements. When taking field measurements for windows to be installed in arched openings, determine the spring line (the point at which the arch starts) and provide accurate templates of the opening. Templates allow the windows, panning, and trim to be made to the exact curvature of the opening. Providing physical templates with detailed dimension points is a great way of reducing the chance for miscommunication or error. To make a template, use the following steps to determine the location of the spring lines: 1. Perform a visual inspection of the opening. 2. Find the point on the opening at the jamb where the straight vertical wall intersects with the arched portion. 3. Place a straight edge across the full width of the opening (plus 6 or more), aligning one side with the previously found spring line. 4. Next, use a carpenter s level to move the straight edge to a level position while maintaining the original starting point (see Figure 11-5). AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 11-6

133 Figure 11-5 Determine Spring Line and Center Line 5. Once the straight edge is level, it can be nailed in place on the wall using a small nail at each end. 6. After securing the straight edge in position, draw a 4 line (or apply a piece of tape) as a reference point on each side of the opening. These lines represent the spring lines at the jambs. To find the center of the arc, continue using the straight edge and follow these steps. 1. Measure the width of the opening and locate a mark on the straight edge corresponding to half the width. 2. Use a plumb line to transfer the center of the opening on the straight edge, 4 above the top of the opening. 3. You now have three marks on the opening corresponding to the spring line and centerline of the opening. To make a template, use the following steps and the marks that were previously made. Note: These instructions are for partial templates; for a full size template, cut the paper 6 larger than the full height of the opening. 1. Cut a piece of cardboard or heavy paper 6 wider than the opening, and 6 taller than the opening at the spring line (see Figure 11-6). AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 11-7

134 Figure 11-6 Prep Paper/Cardboard for Template 2. Draw a straight line 3 from the bottom edge of the paper along the full width of the template. 3. Determine the location of the center of the paper (horizontally), and then draw a line (perpendicular to the bottom horizontal straight line) up the full height of the template. 4. Place the template paper on the wall and align the horizontal lines with the marks on either side of the opening (see Figure 11-7). Figure 11-7 Scribing the Template 5. Slide the paper from side to side until the centerline on the paper lines up with the centerline on the arch. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 11-8

135 6. Tape the template to the wall. Stretch the template tight across the opening being sure to remove all wrinkles; verify all marks line up. 7. Using a smooth piece of plywood or hardboard, cover the template on the inside; from the opposite side, transcribe the arch onto the template. 8. Add any notes or dimensions that will be of help to the manufacturer in making the desired finished product Wall Depth and Window Location Although walls are generally of standard thickness, wall thickness can vary in old or remodeled buildings (see Figure 11-8). Wall depth will influence the type of product ordered, and the size of jamb extensions or interior trim, when needed. Observe the following steps when measuring wall depth and locating the product in the opening: 1. Measure wall depth from interior to exterior. 2. Determine the location of the product in the wall. (Where will it be positioned?) 3. Determine if jamb extensions or interior trim will be necessary. Take into consideration the projection (extended depth) of the panning if it is being used. 4. Determine whether the manufacturer will provide the jamb extensions and/or trim, or whether it is necessary to build them on site. Figure 11-8 Check Wall Depth Checking Wall for Plumb Sometimes the settling of the foundation of a building will force a wall out-of-plumb. If the wall is out-of-plumb, it may affect how the product will fit in an opening. Check for plumb by placing a level against the wall on both sides of the opening. Be prepared to make adjustments when installing the product if the wall is out-of-plumb. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 11-9

136 Checking Level When products rest on a rough sill, it is important that the sill be level. Out-of-level sills may distort the frame and cause problems with the operation. 1. Determine if the opening is level by placing a level at the head and the sill. 2. If the opening is not level, placement of bottom shims can help to level the sill (see Chapter 13, Section 13.2, "Shims") Clearance Provisions Allowing for Clearances Always provide adequate clearance to prevent distortion of the frame. Some manufacturers build the frame to the dimensions provided by the installer. Others take the net opening dimensions and undercut a specified amount. Always follow the manufacturer's measuring and ordering procedures. Proper clearances allow for installation clearance as well as building and installation tolerances. In proper installation practices, installers provide clearance between the window/door and the opening. Remember the following: 1. Clearances shall conform to the manufacturer's specifications. 2. Unless otherwise specified, provide at least 1/4" at the top and 1/8" clearance on each side in applications where a sealant joint isn t being applied between the window and the substrate. In applications where a sealant joint is being used, allow for a 3/8 nominal joint (more if necessary, based on the frame size) around the entire perimeter. 3. Large windows and doors may require more clearance. (See Chapter 17, Section for expansion and contraction guidelines.) Allowance for Out-of-Square Out-of-square openings require more clearance than square openings. It s common to find openings out-ofsquare, especially when doing replacement work. When taking measurements to order products, it may be necessary to make adjustments to the product size for out-of-square openings. To determine if the opening is out-of-square, measure both diagonals from corner to corner of the rough opening or existing window. To avoid interference with the rough opening or existing window frame, the installer should strongly consider ordering a smaller product if the diagonal measurements differ by more than 1/4" Allowing for Accessories Some accessories may affect the clearance and the exact window size. Before ordering the product, determine how much (if any) additional clearance (often called deducts) will be required to accommodate accessory items. Establishing a deduct involves determining what dimension needs to be deducted from the opening size in order to determine the window size, while allowing for the appropriate clearance to fit the window and accessories in place. The following accessory items are commonly used in the field and may require specific deducts. Panning Use When planning to use panning, keep in mind that numerous styles, shapes and configurations are available. Typically the type of panning selected is determined by making a sketch of the existing brick mold. If trying to AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 11-10

137 replicate the existing building trim (brick mold), the sketch will help the manufacturer find an existing shape within their inventory that is suitable for use on the project. Some manufacturers may agree to provide custom panning to match the configuration on the job (see Figure 11-9 for some examples of common panning shapes). Figure 11-9 Examples of Common Panning Shapes If an exact replication isn't necessary, or if the building owner desires to change the look of the existing window trim, manufacturers typically have standard shapes that will meet the intended look. A few important things to consider when deciding to use panning are: The amount of clearance between the existing window and the new window. The depth the new panning must reach in order to extend out and over the existing trim. The amount that the new panning must extend in order to cover over the existing trim and sealant while allowing enough tolerance for field trimming. Whether the panning will have a contoured appearance often called historical panning, or whether the panning will have a relatively flat profile. Historical (contoured) panning normally requires that the head and jamb pieces be identical in shape, and that they be mitered together at the corners. All of these factors will play an important part in determining what the new panning shape will look like, as well as determine how much to deduct from the opening size in order to get the exact order size for the new window. (See Figure to see how two different types of panning will change the deductions made when determining the exact window size.) AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 11-11

138 Figure Panning Height and Projection Determine Like Sizes Ordering windows also involves grouping like sizes together in replacement applications. After determining all of the opening sizes, group like sizes (openings within 1/4 ) together. When doing this, group sizes together that are less than (smaller than) the largest size in the group. For example, assume there are openings that measure 28-1/2, 28-3/8, 28-5/16 and 28-1/4". Each of these could be grouped together based on the smallest opening size of 28-1/4" and still fit nicely in the opening. When deciding to group windows, always verify the acceptable tolerance for grouping with the manufacturer. Trim Use When using panning, trim is often used as a finished piece on the interior. Trim is also available in numerous shapes, sizes and configurations (see Figure 11-11). Because trim may be used to hold the window into position and is often a structural component, the design of the trim must take into consideration the amount of overlap on the both the window and the existing condition. The amount of overlap, the clearance provisions and the configuration of the existing trim (if it is to remain in place) all have an impact on the size and profile of the new trim. (See Figure for examples of how trim size and shape are determined.) AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 11-12

139 Figure Common Types of Trim Figure Determining Trim Requirements Receptor and Subsill Use: Receptors and subsills are often used in situations where more clearance is required due to field tolerances and various types of movement. Custom shapes are often used in buildings where excessive movement is expected AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 11-13

140 from building live load, product expansion and seismic movement. (See Figure for examples of various receptors and subsills.) The type of receptor and subsill used also has a bearing on the exact size of the window/door ordered. Often the specifications and/or architectural drawings will dictate the amount of movement expected. Using this information, and considering the amount of overlap between the receptor and the window, an exact window size can be determined. (See Figure for an example of how to establish exact sizes based on the required overlap and the allowance for movement.) Other accessory items will have an impact on the exact sizing of the new windows and doors ordered for a particular job. Always consult with the manufacturer for assistance in establishing the exact window size when ordering the windows. Regardless of who is responsible for placing the order, the installer is responsible for making sure the intent is followed. This means a coordinated effort between the installer and the manufacturer to ensure that the design intent, clearance provisions and allowance for movement are followed. Caution: When using high performance subsills, consult with the owner about the overall sill height (as measured from the floor) and the potential for a trip hazard. To reduce the potential for trip hazards, installers may want to offer to build a suitable step or ramp in front of the door opening. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 11-14

141 Figure Common Receptors and Subsills AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 11-15

142 Figure Example of Window Sizing Based on the Use of Receptor and Subsills 11.3 Installation Tolerances The following chart provides guidelines for installers regarding installation tolerances for finished work. This chart indicates acceptable deviations (plus or minus) from plumb, level and square as suggested by window manufacturers. The manufacturer may dictate stricter tolerances; therefore consult with the manufacturer regarding the specific requirements. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 11-16

143 Unit Shimming Tolerance (+/-) Nominal Inche s/ Foot Inches Maximu m Level (Horizontal 1/32" 1/8" Measurement) Plumb (Vertical Measurement) True (In Plane Measurement) Straight/True (Measure of Straightness) Square (Diagonal Measurement) 1/32" 1/8" 1/32" 1/8" 1/64" 1/16" NA 1/8" * 1/4" ** Method of Measureme nt Level and steel rule or tape Level or plumb-line and steel rule or tape Using strings across corners Level or plumb-line and steel rule or tape Steel rule or tape * Openings up to 20 square feet ** Openings over 20 square feet It would be impractical to assume every window/door unit would be installed perfectly plumb, level and square. However, following these unit shimming tolerances is critical to the water performance integrity of the installed unit. For this reason, AAMA recognizes that the expected results for field water performance tests are typically less than that of a laboratory test. Consult AAMA for installed unit water performance test requirements and expectations Shipping Instructions In addition to providing measurements and templates, critical information pertaining to shipping requirements is also important. The person placing the order needs to communicate the desired load sequence and shipping instructions to the manufacturer. Shipping sequence/distribution is usually critical on larger projects with numerous phases, but may be important to the installer on any job. Installation companies often are aware of specific project information of which the manufacturer has no knowledge. As an example, there may be times when only the windows on the east side, or just windows on floors 12-18, can be installed. Without this information, the manufacturer may ship the products without regard for sequence, requiring storage on the job site. This information will also help the manufacturer mark and load the windows and accessories on the truck so that upon arrival at the job site, they can be unloaded and distributed to the proper place with much greater ease. At the job site, coordination is necessary, but the task will be much easier if the correct information is provided upon placement of the order. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 11-17

144 Information such as building number, floor number, elevation number, opening number and unit number can all be of assistance. Provide all job related requirements pertaining to labeling, shipping sequence and marking to the manufacturer prior to the award of the contract. Notes: AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 11-18

145 Table of Contents 12.1 New Window and Door Inspection Verifying Proper Location Inspection of New Products Verification of Size and Clearances Handling and Storage...2 This voluntary specification was developed by representative members of AAMA as advisory information and published as a public service. AAMA disclaims all liability for the use, application or adaptation of materials published herein. Copyright 2015 American Architectural Manufacturers Association 1827 Walden Office Square, Suite 550, Schaumburg, IL Phone: 847/ Fax: 847/ webmaster@aamanet.org Web Site: AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 12-I

146 12.0 Inspection and Storage of Windows and Doors Conduct a thorough inspection of the product immediately after receipt. Be careful to store windows and doors properly and in accordance with the guidelines of this manual or the manufacturer s instructions when installation will not take place immediately New Window and Door Inspection When new windows and doors arrive on site, it is important to verify that they are the correct size and type. Always inspect them for damage Verifying Proper Location Prior to installation, the installer shall verify the proposed location of the new product by: 1. Checking the plans 2. Verifying the physical location of the installation such as floor, elevation and opening number 3. Checking the packaging for mark and location numbers, which are to be coordinated with the shop drawings Inspection of New Products Carefully inspect the new product for size, type, operability and damage. Observe the following steps when inspecting new products: 1. Unwrap and thoroughly inspect the products. In replacement applications, do this prior to removing the existing window. Be aware that some manufacturers include banding, spacers, shims or other packaging items that are not to be removed until after the window or door is properly installed. Be sure to follow the manufacturer's instructions for how and when to remove these items. 2. Check for shipping or material damages, seal fractures and racked corners. If found, file a freight claim. Inventory the miscellaneous parts, panning, trim, receptors, etc. Always count the material as it is unloaded, and document any missing or damaged materials. 3. If any component of the main frame is damaged, repair or replace it prior to demolition of the old product. 4. Some moving parts can be repaired after the product is installed: Locks Balances Glass Rails 5. If the window was opened during inspection, make sure it is closed and locked again prior to installation. 6. If the operable sash is to be removed prior to installation, make sure to mark the sash with the corresponding frame so that it can be reinstalled in the original window frame. 7. Be aware of protective coverings that are applied to the frames. If present, make a determination as to when they will be removed, but be sure to remove them before the final perimeter seal is done Verification of Size and Clearances It is important to check the measurements of the new unit and compare them to the opening prior to installation. Practice the following steps to verify size and clearance: 1. Determine the amount of clearance required for each product according to the manufacturer's recommendations and/or shop drawings. 2. Place product in opening. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 12-1

147 3. Check for adequate clearance Handling and Storage When windows and doors are not installed immediately upon delivery, they must be properly stored and protected until used. The following recommendations will be useful when handling and storing windows and doors: Check manufacturer's instructions for: - Recommendation for transporting, storing and handling products. - Suggestions for extreme cold or hot weather use and handling. Unload products safely. Make sure the truck is not positioned such that the windows/doors are leaning and could fall toward the installer (see Figure 12-1). If necessary, reposition the truck. Windows and doors shall be transported in an upright position with temporary bracing in place. Never stack windows/doors on top of one another (flat) on the floor. Use special care when transporting heavy frames, being careful not to pull the sash or glass away from the frame. Don t use the banding to carry the window frames. Bands are not designed to support the weight of the frame and may break due to the excessive load. Temporary cross-bracing shall be applied to maintain squareness. Diagonal braces or spacer strips, where possible, shall not be removed until after the installation is complete. Wear clean gloves when handling new windows and doors. Always use caution when handling the frames/glass in order to avoid material or finish damage Figure 12-1 Safely Unloading Trucks To properly store windows and doors, remember these tips: AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 12-2

148 1. Do not remove packaging except to verify dimensions and conditions of contents, until just prior to installation. 2. Windows and doors shall be stored upright on a flat surface. Whenever possible, allow them to sit on their sill (see Figure 12-2). 3. When storing materials at the job site, make sure they are in a secure location. Also, make sure they cannot be blown over by the winds. 4. Store windows/doors so that the first in is the last out. Plan to store the products in the sequence they will be installed. 5. Windows, doors and accessories shall be stored out of the weather in a clean, dry, low traffic area, off the ground, not in direct sunlight, and not subject to damage. Don't stack products in a row against each other in the sun as the glass units may experience excessive heat absorption. 6. If not fully packaged, use some type of cover to prevent damage from dust, dirt and moisture. Windows shall be protected until the finish trim is installed to help protect from dust, and other materials and processes employed on the site. 7. Block and secure the corners of windows and doors with relatively thin flanges to prevent damage to the flanges prior to installation. 8. Sills shall be protected to prevent damage during construction. Figure 12-2 Properly Storing Windows To prepare for installation of accessories, make sure to distribute the correct pieces to the corresponding opening. Use the following tips as a guide: 1. Check the shop drawings to determine the opening type and location. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 12-3

149 2. Look for mark numbers on the drawings (per floor/elevation) which correspond to the mark numbers on the packaging. 3. Check the shipping sheets and verify all materials were shipped and accounted for when they arrived on the job site. 4. Make sure the job site is secure so the accessories don t end up missing. Notes: AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 12-4

150 Table of Contents 13.1 Introduction Shims Purpose Types of Shims Shim Application Flashing Purpose Types of Flashing Materials Flashing Application Fasteners Purpose Fastener Materials Fastener Application Sealants Purpose Sealant Materials Choosing the Proper Sealant Joint Movement and Sealant Movement Capability Sealant Adhesion Sealant Compatibility This voluntary specification was developed by representative members of AAMA as advisory information and published as a public service. AAMA disclaims all liability for the use, application or adaptation of materials published herein. Copyright 2015 American Architectural Manufacturers Association 1827 Walden Office Square, Suite 550, Schaumburg, IL Phone: 847/ Fax: 847/ webmaster@aamanet.org Web Site: AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 13-I

151 Joint and Sealant Dimensions Surface Preparation Use of Back-Up Materials Sealant Application and Tooling Final Sealing (Interior) Cavity Insulation Purpose Materials Installation Expanding Foam Product Precautions Priming and Painting Purpose Materials Application Separation from Incompatible Materials AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 13-II

152 13.0 Material Selection and Use 13.1 Introduction Various materials are required for installing windows and doors. Selecting shims, flashings, sealants and other window or door installation materials can sometimes be complicated. Therefore, read this chapter carefully, and remember that the manufacturer's instructions take priority and shall be followed when selecting and installing materials Shims Purpose In commercial applications, shims are commonly thin, flat pieces of high-impact plastic or metal, used to level or plumb a window or door frame during installation. They also help to prevent sagging, deflection, distortion and rotation of the frame. Lateral shims are placed at the jambs, and setting shims are placed at the sill. Some jurisdictions may require metal shims for fire resistance Types of Shims Shims are often classified by material and/or style (see Figure 13-1). There are numerous variations of shims, including: Flat Rectangular Horseshoe Single or stackable shims that come in packs Figure 13-1 Types of Shims Flat shims can be used singularly or stacked on top of one another. Rectangular shims, horseshoe shims and shim packs are typically made of high-impact plastic. These shims can be used in all applications and often come in a range of colors that indicate the thickness. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 13-1

153 Plastic shims are sometimes manufactured in packs, which can measure up to an inch or more in thickness. To use a shim pack, determine the thickness needed and then snap off what isn't necessary. After obtaining the right thickness for the application, slide the shim pack under the frame. Follow these guidelines when selecting shims for a specific use: Shim material must be adequate for each application. Shims for sill support require greater compressive strength. The high-impact plastic or metal shims shall be capable of supporting a compressive load of 1100 psi. This capacity is particularly important for windows that support their entire weight on a narrow ridge or flange Shim Application The proper number and positioning of shims are important. Position them where support is needed (see Figure 13-2). Do not over or under shim; either can cause distortion of the frame. Position shims so that the edge of the window frame does not vary more than ±1/16" from being straight. Whenever possible, locate shims directly under the fastener. At the jambs, a horseshoe shim can easily be placed over the shaft of the fastener so the shim will stay in place. Shims shall be installed to allow clearance for continuous bond breaker or backer rod and sealant, and permit proper sealant joint depth and width. The outside surface of shims must be parallel and provide continuous contact and uniform support across the entire depth of the window frame. When necessary, blocking can be added within the cavity of the frame to help create a suitable support surface. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 13-2

154 Figure 13-2 Typical Shim Application Prior to Trimming Sides and Top "Lateral" shims are often placed between the side jambs and frame to square the window. Shims used to establish spacing at anchor points must be penetrated by the anchor. They are trimmed as needed, but not removed. Temporary shims used in the leveling or squaring process are not required for permanent support, and may be removed after the frame is securely anchored. Bottom "Setting" shims and support blocks are installed between the window sill and the rough sill. When installing replacement windows, shims may be placed between the new sill and old window sill. The sill must be supported in a straight and level position at a minimum of three points. In the absence of manufacturer's instructions, place these shims shall be placed 3" from the ends and at the middle of the sill. Support windows that are wider than 38" with shims located approximately 16" on center Flashing Purpose Flashing in commercial applications consists of a piece of waterproof material that bridges the joint between the interior construction and the exterior building components. Flashing is used for the purpose of diverting any moisture from above or below the opening back to the exterior. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 13-3

155 Most wall leaks can be attributed to lack of flashing, poor flashing techniques, or deteriorated flashing. Flashing actually helps drain water away from the window/door to the exterior. There are two basic types of flashing products used in conjunction with the installation with windows and doors in commercial applications: Flexible Flashing; and Rigid Flashing Types of Flashing Materials Flexible Flashing Flexible flashing typically consists of a flexible, formable, water-proof sheet material. Flexible flashing materials are typically applied to the condition prior to the window or door installation. As an example, flexible flashing is often used above the head of the window on top of the steel lintel in brick or stone applications. Flexible flashing must include an upturned leg on the interior to keep any residual water that is collected from running toward the interior. Flashing must also be properly terminated with end dams and spliced to be waterproof and direct water out and away from the opening. Whenever attaching window or door components to the opening condition, consider whether the fasteners will penetrate any flashing components. Always review the architectural drawings to determine where flashing may occur and avoid penetrating the flashing with attachment fasteners. When determining where to set the window within an opening, make sure to look for flashing at the head, and avoid positioning and sealing the window in front of the flashing (see Figure 13-3). If the sealant line is positioned in front of the flashing, water can be trapped behind the installation, causing water to drain on top of the window or door. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 13-4

156 Figure 13-3 Proper Placement of Window when used in Conjunction with Flashing Rigid Flashing Rigid flashing is typically galvanized metal, stainless steel, aluminum or copper sheet metal (see Table 13-1). It is often custom made to fit a particular condition. Rigid flashing is typically used at the head and sill condition to carry incidental water from the interior to the exterior of the opening. While these materials are often not supplied or applied by the installer, the installer must use caution when working in conjunction with these materials in order to keep from destroying their performance characteristics. The installer should never penetrate the flashing components with fasteners unless they can be properly sealed to keep them watertight. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 13-5

157 RIGID FLASHING Material Galvanized Metal and Stainless Steel Aluminum/ Copper sheet or step flashing Terne Metal Traits and Uses Shall be no less than 26 gauge in thickness Sheet metal other than 300 series stainless steel shall be zinc coated on both sides, and the coatings can be hot dipped galvanized or electroplate. Can be surface-treated for painting by phosphatizing. Rigid flashing shall be no less that 0.40" thick except for rigid head flashing made with 0.019" (min.) coil stock. Can be mill finish if totally concealed. If exposed, must be anodized or coated with appropriate paint. In all cases, aluminum sheet must be separated from dissimilar metals and/or masonry with: 1. Tape 2. Gaskets 3. Elastomeric sheets 4. A heavy coat of bituminous paint 5. Other approved separation materials Must consist of copper bearing steel Coated both sides with lead-tin alloy Coating weights are typically lb/sf Table 13-1 Types of Rigid Flashing Sill Pan Flashing A sill pan is a piece of flashing where the interior leg and ends are bent up vertically (or panned) to prevent water from flowing into the wall or interior finishes. When part of the contract, sill pans may be provided for the job and installed by the installer. When sill pans are provided: AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 13-6

158 Sill flashing shall be sloped toward the exterior. Height of the pan must be appropriate for the windows and glass doors being installed. Always follow the manufacturer's instructions, or the advice of a professional architect or engineer. When flashing needs to be spliced due to length, follow the guidelines provided in the sealant section of this chapter regarding joint types. Seal between the upturned leg of the sill pan and the interior face of the product in order to maintain the air/water seal. Pan flashing materials by design extend through most of a wall's thickness. When fabricated from sheet metal, pan flashing can act as a thermal bridge, transferring cold from exterior to interior. Where this poses a problem, such as in cold-climate areas along with high indoor humidity, choose materials with a lower thermal conductivity. The selection of the pan flashing material is the responsibility of the approving authority and/or building designer, not the installer. The installer is encouraged to consult with these authorities when the sill pan material is not specified. Note: The interior leg (H1) of the sill pan flashing is based on the expected performance level of the window or door being installed (see Figure 13-4). Table 13-2 can be used to determine the interior leg height if the water test pressure (in psf) or the corresponding design pressure (in psf) is known. Determining Interior Leg Heights Figure 13-4 Sill Pan Diagram AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 13-7

159 WTP DP H1 Water Test Pressure (PSF) Design Pressure (PSF) Water Height and Minimum Leg Height " /8" /16" /16" /8" /4" /8" " / / /16 Table: 13-2 Pan Height Example: The product being installed is rated to meet a 6.0 psf water test pressure. To make the sill pan flashing meet the same level of performance, the height of the interior leg is required to be at least 1-5/16" tall from the inside of the bend. Note: Water height and minimum leg height calculations are approximate. To allow for field-installed tolerances, 1/8 was added to the figures before rounding up to the nearest 1/ Flashing Application The installation of flashing is critical to maintaining the water performance integrity of the completed installation. Be cautious when applying flashing. Proper installation of flashing means four things: 1. Flashing is installed in "Weather-Board Fashion;" this means that each piece of flashing is logically applied and integrated with other components. Always starting with the lowest section (if more than one piece is used), overlapping the lower section with the next higher section. 2. Flashing must be protected from damage. Always take the steps necessary to secure the flashing into position so that when the windows are installed, the flashing is still functional. When flashing has been damaged, the material shall be replaced or repaired properly. 3. Flashing is subject to various types of damage throughout the construction process. Holes caused by screws, nails and other fasteners penetrating the flashing can reduce the weather-shielding ability of the installation. 4. Be sure to use proper sealing and splicing techniques. Use appropriate sealant joint designs as outlined in Section The flashing must be properly integrated with any water resistant barrier being used on the job. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 13-8

160 13.4 Fasteners Purpose For products to perform as indicated through testing, they must be installed as instructed by the manufacturer. Fasteners must be selected and installed to secure the weight, wind load and temperature variations of the product to meet the correct requirements. Consult with the window/door manufacturer and/or a qualified structural engineer regarding fastening requirements to ensure the units are installed to meet and/or exceed the expected performance criteria. Manufacturers frequently are required to provide a complete set of calculations to pinpoint the fastener requirements for projects. When provided, calculations will supply clear instructions as to what fasteners are to be used in specific applications and conditions. When calculations are not provided, the selection of the appropriate fastening method is the responsibility of the approving authority in cooperation with the installer. Always refer to the local codes, building official, window manufacturer and/or a qualified structural engineer for fastener requirements in regions with special wind-loading considerations (e.g., special wind-load regions, seismic-loading zones, hurricane prone areas, etc.). The anchoring of mulled and/or multiple units will most certainly require different fastener spacing requirements. Always consult with the manufacturer regarding the fastening requirements for mulled units. See Chapter 17, Section for more information on expansion, contraction and other movement when attaching windows and doors Fastener Materials Fasteners must be corrosion resistant and compatible with the materials contacted and/or penetrated. Table 13-3 is provided to show some of the recommended performance requirements based on anticipated fastener exposure. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 13-9

161 Fastener Application Fastener Selection Chart Fastener Material Steel Cadmium Plated Steel Zinc Plated Steel Nickel/Chrome Plated Magnetic Stainless Steel 400 Series Min. 16% Chrome Nonmagnetic Stainless Steel. 300 Series Fastener Exposure Not Visible after Installation Visible after installation Not Visible after Installation Visible after installation Not Visible after Installation Visible after installation Not Visible after Installation Visible after Installation Not Visible after Installation Visible after Installation Performance Requirement ASTM B766 (8 Microns Thick) Not Recommended ASTM B633 (8 Microns Thick) Not Recommended ASTM B 456 Type SC 2 Not Recommended Recommended Not Recommended Recommended Recommended Table 13-3 Fastener Selection Chart The type of fastener used will vary from job to job and may change numerous times according to your job specific application and/or building conditions. As an example, the fastener used in a solid concrete wall condition will typically not work in a hollow masonry wall. Fastener manufacturers are very knowledgeable about fastener types and uses, and should be consulted whenever there is a question about the type of fastener to be used and how it is applied. Many fasteners require special application techniques and tools. The supplier of these fasteners will be able to assist the installer in selecting and using the right tools for the job. Determine the type of substrate that you will be anchoring into first (see Table 13-4), then make a selection as to the appropriate type of fastener to use. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 13-10

162 Window/Door Anchor Types Concrete Stone Substrate Solid Masonry Hollow Masonry Structural Steel Cold Formed Steel Wood Fastener Type Expansion Anchors Epoxy or Acrylic Adhesive Set Threaded Rods Tap-in Anchors Tap-in Anchors Epoxy or Acrylic Adhesive Set Threaded Rods Expansion Anchors Epoxy or Acrylic Adhesive Set Threaded Rods Tap-in Anchors Toggle Anchors Epoxy or Acrylic Adhesive Set Threaded Rods Powder Actuated Fasteners Welding Self Drilling Screws Self Drilling Screws Wood Screws Table 13-4 Anchor Types Consider the following cautions and general rules of thumb when installing fasteners: Always follow the fastener/anchor manufacturer s guidelines for proper edge distance, load capacity and installation techniques. Never place fasteners too close to the edge of a concrete or block wall, or too close together when applying fasteners in pairs, as damage may occur to the concrete or block. (A general rule of thumb is to keep bolts at least six times the diameter away from the edge, and 10 times the diameter away from an adjacent fastener. Thus, the edge distance for a 1/4 diameter fastener would be 1-1/2, while the center-to-center distance would be 2-1/2.) The embedment depth of an expansion bolt can also have an impact on edge distance. (A rule of thumb is that the edge distance for an expansion bolt shall be no less than the embedded length. Thus, a 3 bolt with a 2-1/4 embedment would dictate that the edge distance be a minimum of 2-1/4.) Many fastener manufacturers have specific guidelines available for each particular product type, and often have service technicians available for field consultation. The fastener head must be wide enough to cover the pre-punched hole or slot in the frame or accessory. When slotted connections are used, the fastener head may need to be backed up by washers to allow for adjustment and expansion. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 13-11

163 Manufacturers may supply slots in their framing which are designed to be structurally adequate for the fastener and anchor loads expected. Do not slot the framing or enlarge holes or slots provided by the manufacturer without consulting the manufacturer or a licensed professional engineer. Fasteners must not cause warping or distortion of the frame/sash, and must not hinder proper operation of the unit. Fastener length must allow for sufficient penetration into the substrate to comply with fastener installation instructions and local code requirements. Avoid penetrating the sill tracks unless recommended by the manufacturer. If screws must be installed in the sill, inject sealant into the hole before installing the screw, and seal over the head after seating the screw. Be careful not to over shim at fastener locations, as undue stress and bending of the fastener may result. Always provide suitable support at fastener locations. (A good rule of thumb is to limit the shim pack height to twice the diameter of the fastener. Thus, use a maximum of a 1/2 shim pack when using a 1/4 diameter fastener.) When screws pass through the first layer of a hollow extrusion which is visible after installation, fill the holes with compatible plugs or cover with trim. Make sure that fasteners are secure after installation. In block, brick or concrete applications, check each fastener to ensure that it is properly grabbing the substrate. Follow the manufacturer's instructions when attaching window and door frames to the building condition, especially at hinge points where loads may increase significantly. Always consult with the contractor when attaching into concrete masonry units (CMU). Determine if the cells are filled with grout as this will have a bearing on what type of fastener is used. Another rule of thumb is that bigger is not always better. Due to edge distance requirements, bigger bolts may actually create problems when substituted for a smaller fastener that was specified. Always consult with a structural engineer when planning to make substitutions. When using self-tapping fasteners, make sure you follow the fastener manufacturer s instructions. The type and thickness of the material you are penetrating will have an impact on the type of fastener and the point required. (Example: When the fastener specifications say, appropriate for a maximum of aluminum, don t use it in steel.) When using self-drilling fasteners, be sure to select fasteners that will not allow hydrogen embrittlement (see AAMA TIR A9 for further information) Sealants Purpose Sealants are used to prevent infiltration of air and water through joints between the opening and the window or glass door, or accessories. When visible, sealants also contribute to the finished appearance of the installed product. The long-term continuity between the components of the building envelope relies on the proper sealant selection, joint dimensions and sealant application. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 13-12

164 Many windows and doors are installed adjacent to building materials such as brick, stone, concrete and numerous others. When windows and doors are installed after these building materials are set in place a properly sized perimeter joint must always be used. Some substrate materials like stucco, EIFS and metal panels require a receiver (often J-shaped molding) that is designed to be applied after window installation. Always seal the joint between the receiver and the window or door, rather than sealing the product directly to the substrate material. Always follow the EIFS/Stucco manufacturer's instructions for the proper method of sealing, and use receivers as required. Proper joint size and sealing techniques outlined in the following sections must be followed. The building contractor (or the installer if he is also the building contractor) is responsible for the proper integration and coordination of this work in order to ensure the completion and quality of this seal; however, proper installation is the responsibility of all parties Sealant Materials Sealing requirements will vary from job to job. It is important that the installer select and use the proper sealant based on the materials and design considerations (anticipated movement, locations where sealant will be used, etc.) on each job. Frequently, the architect, builder or window manufacturer will specify sealants to be used for installation. If not, seek input from the approving authority and/or sealant manufacturer. If no other information is available, use Tables 13-5 and 13-6 as a starting point in the selection process. All sealants have a shelf-life. Care should be taken that sealant is used before the end of the shelf-life. Sealant labels and technical data sheets from the sealant manufacturer provide some documentation of the basic selection principles listed in the following section Choosing the Proper Sealant It is important to properly select and apply sealants. ASTM standards C 1193 and C 1299 provide information on sealant selection and use. There are basic principles one must consider when selecting and/or installing sealants: Movement Adhesion Compatibility Surface preparation Joint and sealant dimensions Use of back-up materials Sealant application/tooling AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 13-13

165 Sealant Adhesion Guide Aluminum Mill Finish Aluminum Anodized Asphalt Bldg. Paper Silicone Polyurethane Latex (meeting ASTM C920) Solvent Released Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes NR Brick Yes Yes Yes Yes Concrete Yes Yes Yes Some Copper Yes Yes Some Yes EIFS Yes Yes Some NR Fiberglass Yes Yes Some Some Galvanized Steel Yes Some Some Yes Glass Yes Some Yes Yes Painted Surfaces Yes Yes Yes Yes Polyethylene Some Yes No Yes Polystyrene Foam Board Yes Yes Yes NR Stucco Yes Yes Yes Some Bld g. Wrap Some Some Some Some Vinyl Some Yes Yes Som e Yes Som e Some Wood Yes Yes Yes Yes = Neutral Cure Silicone Only = Check Paint Individually = Check for Compatibility NR = Not Recommended Some = Many Are Not Adequate Yes = Majority Are Adequate Table 13-5 Sealant Adhesion AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 13-14

166 All sealant make-ups (e.g. Silicone) are not equal thus, one product may work while another product may not. Make sure to verify the use of the sealant for the particular application with the sealant manufacturer. Note: All sealant make-ups (e.g. Silicone) are not equal thus, one product may work while another product may not. Make sure to verify the use of the sealant for the particular application with the sealant manufacturer. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 13-15

167 Sealant Application Guide Silicone Polyurethan e Latex (meeting ASTM C920) Solvent Released Header Expander Yes Yes Yes Some Sill Expander Yes Yes Yes Some Sill Angle Yes Some Yes Some Blind Stop Yes Yes Yes Yes Capping Yes Some Yes Some Interior Trim and Stool NR Yes Yes NR Mull Seal Yes Yes Some NR Subsill End Cap and Splice Joints Yes Yes Some Some Receptor Yes Yes Yes Some Exterior Perimeter Yes Yes Yes Some Stack Mullion Yes Yes Yes Some Panning Yes Yes Yes Some Box Frame to Opening Under Flashing Yes Yes Yes Some Yes Yes Some Some Threshold Yes Yes Some Some Sill Pan Yes Yes Some Some = Match Sealant Movement Capability to Anticipated Joint Movement (See Table 13-6) = Check Adhesion and Compatibility to Mating Surfaces NR = Not Recommended Some = Many Are Not Adequate Yes = Majority Are Adequate Table 13-6 Sealant Application AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 13-16

168 Joint Movement and Sealant Movement Capability Sealant joints are designed to move with the expansion and contraction of different building materials. Joints in commercial installations require an elastomeric sealant. The following specifications (see Table 13-7) apply to joint movement: Amount of Joint Movement Sealant Specification 15% 25% ASTM C920 Class % 50% ASTM C920 Class 25 Table 13-7 Joint Movement If joint movement is unknown and cannot be determined, use a sealant meeting ASTM C 920, Class 25 or better. Note: Whenever there is a question about what sealant to use in a given application, do not hesitate to contact the sealant supplier. They typically have a staff of technical representatives on hand to answer questions and perform tests on job site materials to verify and approve sealant types and application methods Sealant Adhesion Many kinds of materials are encountered in window and door installation. The variety of substrates, flashings, framing materials and window materials is almost infinite. In addition, sealant products within any one sealant type (polyurethane, silicone or acrylic) can vary considerably in adhesion to a given material. Therefore: Verify with the material or sealant manufacturer(s) that the sealant has acceptable adhesion to the specified materials. Submit required sample materials to the sealant supplier for testing purposes. Obtain documentation of adhesion to specific materials. Adhesion recommendations are based on: ASTM C 794 testing. Exposure to outdoor conditions for exterior applications. See Section 23.1 for information about quality control and spot-checking for adhesion on the job site Sealant Compatibility Compatibility with all surfaces in direct contact with the sealant is essential. The sealant(s) and other materials must retain their properties without being affected by one another. Common indications of sealant incompatibility are evident when the sealant shows signs of: Hardening Softening Tackiness Loss of adhesion Discoloration and bleeding Always obtain documentation of compatibility between the various materials and the sealant from the sealant manufacturer(s). AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 13-17

169 Joint and Sealant Dimensions No matter how good the sealant's movement capability and adhesion, the sealed joint can still fail if proper joint and sealant dimensions (joint geometry) are not incorporated into the installation. This is particularly critical in joints where large amounts of movement occur, such as in perimeter joints. Refer to Chapter 17, Section , for more information regarding the expansion and contraction of various materials when considering joint sizes. Shop drawings and architectural blueprints shall be reviewed and followed for sealant joint details. If there are no drawings or specified joint dimensions, the sealant manufacturer shall be contacted for recommendations on minimum and maximum dimensions. Some guidelines can also be found in ASTM C Unless otherwise specified by the sealant manufacturer, observe the following practices: 1. A minimum of 1/4" wide sealant bond to each contacting surface is necessary to ensure adequate adhesion. Only mechanically fixed joints with little or no movement can be sealed with less bond area. Never try to bond to a surface which is less than 1/4". 2. In butt joints, the width must be large enough so that there is sufficient sealant to accommodate joint movement. The principle is that wider joints accommodate more movement than do narrow joints. Again, a general rule of thumb is 3/8 nominal width. In butt joint applications, the sealant joint should be at least twice the expected expansion. In butt joints 3/8" to 1/2" wide, the depth of the sealant shall be no less than 1/4", and in no case shall the depth be greater than the width. For joints 1/2" to 1" wide, the depth shall be one-half the width Surface Preparation Each joint surface (including the window/door) must be inspected and properly prepared to ensure that the sealant will adhere properly. Surfaces must be: 1. Sound (Free of rotted wood, loose paint, mortar or concrete, corrosion, etc.) 2. Clean (Free of dirt, dust, oily substances, and/or old sealant.) 3. Dry and free of frost. Follow sealant manufacturer's instruction for specific material and conditions. Some general guidelines are as follows: 1. Removal by abrasive cleaning may be needed to obtain acceptable adhesion. Abrasive cleaning may involve: Sanding Wire brushing Grinding Saw cutting Sand or water blasting Mechanical abrading Combination of these methods Note: Avoid breathing dust caused by any of these methods. Sealants and adjacent materials can contain hazardous chemicals. Wear a NIOSH approved dust mask when performing this type of work. See Section for more information. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 13-18

170 2. Remove dust, dirt and other loose particles by brushing or wiping. 3. Remove oily substances with solvent dampened cloth. Change cloths frequently to prevent redepositing oily residue. The solvent-cleaned surface must be immediately wiped dry with a clean cloth (solvent should not be allowed to evaporate on the surface). 4. When working with irregular surfaces like stone aggregate, consider using a diamond cup grinding wheel to grind a smooth surface for the sealant. Rough surfaces will often not allow the sealant to get into the crevices. 5. When resealing joints previously sealed with silicone sealants, use silicone sealant or remove all old sealant residue to ensure adhesion of the new sealant. Completely remove all visible sealant by scraping the surface. Next, remove the thin layer of porous joint surface by sanding. If the surface is a nonporous material, wipe with solvent. 6. Consult with the sealant manufacturer to determine if primer is recommended. Follow instructions for primer application very carefully Use of Back-Up Materials Backer Rod Backer rod (usually cylindrical in shape and compressible in structure) is used to limit joint depth and provide a nonadherent (bond breaker) surface. A variety of backer rod materials are available. Compatibility with sealant and primer should be confirmed by contacting the sealant manufacturer. Sealant shall not adhere to the backer rod, thus allowing the sealant the freedom to move (expand/contract) within the joint. Backer rods are typically made of closed-cell polyethylene, urethane, neoprene, vinyl, butyl rubber or polyvinyl chloride, and shall be compatible with the primers and sealants being used. ASTM C 1193 covers the use of all types of backer rods in more detail. For specific recommendations, check with the sealant manufacturer. In perimeter butt joints, use backer rods to control joint depth so the sealant thickness is in accordance with guidelines in Section A closed-cell polyethylene backer rod is an ideal joint filler for several reasons: Most sealants do not adhere to it. It is resilient so it conforms to joint irregularities and responds to joint movement. It resists moisture absorption. It is typically a requirement in exterior insulation and finish systems. For proper installation of this type of rod: The diameter of the rod shall be approximately 30% larger than the nominal width of the joint. (Rule of thumb: rod diameter is at least 1/8" greater than joint width.) (See Figure 13-5). Backer rod should be inserted into the joint using a blunt probe or roller. Do not puncture, fold or crease the backer rod as that could cause emission of gas and bubbling of the sealant. Do not apply joint primer to the backer rod. Additional types of backer rods are available. See ASTM C 1193 for more information. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 13-19

171 Figure 13-5 Perimeter Butt Joint Bond Breaker A bond breaker is usually a flat tape (e.g., polyethylene tape). It is used in butt and fillet joints to prevent sealant adhesion to certain areas of the joint surfaces, thus preventing what is commonly referred to as "three-sided adhesion" (see Figure 13-6). Three-sided adhesion restricts the sealant's ability to move with expansion and contraction. It can cause premature cohesive failure of the seal. In butt joints that are too shallow for a backer rod, a bond breaker is installed over the bottom of the joint. In a butt joint, the sealant bead should adhere only to the ends of the two side surfaces. Failure to do so can cause the bead to tear during joint expansion (see Figure 13-6). A bridge joint may also be applicable in this condition. Bridge joints span over the joint and adhere to the exposed surfaces. Do not apply primer to a bond breaker. Confirm compatibility of the bond breaker with the primer. In fillet (corner) joints, a bond breaker can be installed on one surface starting in the corner and extending out only as far as needed to allow adequate bond area for the remaining surface contacted by sealant (see Figure 13-7). AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 13-20

172 Figure 13-6 Butt/Bridge Joint with Bond Breaker Figure 13-7 Fillet Joint Sealant Application and Tooling All sealants have minimum and maximum application temperatures. If sealant is applied outside the recommended temperature range, it may not develop adequate adhesion or physical properties. Contact the sealant manufacturer for the recommended temperature range and any limitations due to inclement weather. Several installation tips are listed below: 1. Cut the nozzle to the desired opening with a sharp knife. The angle of the cut should be approximately For a smooth sealant bead, hold at a 45 angle and push the sealant in front of the nozzle. 3. Apply the sealant in a continuous bead. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 13-21

173 4. Force sealants into the joint to ensure 100 percent contact with joint surfaces and in such a manner that will not leave hidden voids below the sealant surface. The joint must be completely filled. Joints should be filled from the bottom up to avoid entrapment of air pockets. 5. Tool the sealant surface to complete the filling of the joint and to provide a smooth surface. 6. Tool the sealant with light pressure before a skin forms (refer to the sealant manufacturer's product literature). Tooling forces the sealant to fill the joint completely. Do not use liquid tooling aids, such as water, soap or alcohol, because these materials may interfere with the curing process. Sealant cure will be slowed in applications that significantly isolate the sealant from air. Examples of such situations are bedding of flanges and flashing, and sealing under thresholds or panning (see Figure 13-8). Use sealants recommended for these applications and confirm compatibility in these isolated situations. Figure 13-8 Bedding Joint Final Sealing (Interior) Interior sealant is applied to the interior side of the rough opening. Observe the following steps when applying interior sealant. Before sealing, check operation of the window/door. Use adequate ventilation and follow safety information supplied by the sealant manufacturer Cavity Insulation Purpose Cavity insulation is placed in the cavity between the new window unit and the sill, jambs and headers to reduce air infiltration and heat transfer Materials Recommended insulation materials include: Fiber insulation (e.g., fiberglass batting or other fiber insulation.) Other code and manufacturer approved materials, which may include gun injected low-pressure foam. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 13-22

174 Installation After the window/door is shimmed, secured, and checked for proper operation (plumb, level and square), fill gaps larger than 1/8" with insulation (see Figure 13-9). Figure 13-9 Cavity Insulation Insulation is not required in small openings if they can be completely filled with sealant. Do not overly compress fiber insulation; press it loosely into small cavities with a putty knife or other tool. When using products with thermal barriers between the inboard and outboard portions of the metal frames (i.e., thermally broken aluminum frames), be sure to insulate the space between the thermal barrier and the inner-most portion of the frame. This will aid in protecting the interior side from the presence of exterior ambient temperatures. When replacing wooden hung window frames, insulate cavities before enclosing them Expanding Foam Product Precautions Always follow foam and window manufacturers' instructions to avoid excessive expansion of the foam and distortion of the window frame. Apply a single bead of foam, sufficient to provide an air seal, but yet allowing for movement of the header and expansion/contraction of the frame. Install foam, allowing it to fully expand and become tack-free (approximately 20 minutes) before injecting more material as needed (see Figure 13-10). After the foam is fully cured, trim away any excess to allow for proper installation of the trim. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 13-23

175 Figure Application of Foam 13.7 Priming and Painting Purpose Exposed steel can be damaged by exposure to the elements. All exposed steel on the exterior must be primed and painted to avoid corrosion. This is not always the responsibility of the installer, but when necessary, the installer can use the following tips Materials For a durable finish and professional appearance, use only a high-grade coating that is compatible with the surface to which it is applied. On the exterior, all primers and paints must be rated for exterior use. Begin with a primer coat and finish with at least one coat of rust-resistant paint. On the interior, a primer is recommended. The finish coat should be rust-resistant. Surfaces to be painted must be dry and free from dust, dirt, oil, grease, wax, chalk, mildew and other contaminants. Remove dust and dirt with a brush, compressed air, or by washing, then drying. Remove oil, wax and grease with paint thinner or other recommended solvent. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 13-24

176 Remove mildew with a solution of bleach or commercial products intended for that purpose Application Application practices and conditions, including temperature and relative humidity, are as important as the quality of paint. Ideal temperature range of the product, surface, and air is 50 F to 90 F or as specified by the manufacturer. Relative humidity should be below 85 percent. Apply smooth, even coats. Allow adequate drying time between coats. Do not apply coating to weather-stripping, vinyl, plastic, cladding or other non-steel parts unless specifically allowed by the manufacturer. Immediately remove any undesired coating from weather-stripping, etc Separation from Incompatible Materials Appropriate paints may be used to provide separation from incompatible materials in lieu of plastic or elastomeric tapes, vinyl liner, etc. An alkali-resistant coating may be used to separate aluminum surfaces from masonry materials and pressuretreated wood. Paint may be applied to prevent direct contact of wood surfaces with incompatible materials. In all cases, aluminum must be protected from direct contact with steel, concrete or mortar with paint, nonabsorptive plastic, elastomeric tapes, gaskets or bituminous paint. Steel shall receive a sufficiently thick layer of protective coating (two coats). Notes: AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 13-25

177 Table of Contents 14.1 Protect the Client's Property Removal of Sash from Wooden Windows Removal of Sash from Single/Double Hung Windows (Inside Removal Method) Removal of Sash from Single/Double Hung Windows (Outside-Removal Method) Removal of Sash Only from Steel Windows Removal of Entire Frame: Aluminum or Steel Windows Removal of Steel Window Frame by Unscrewing Removal of Steel Window Frame by Cutting Assessing the Opening Determining Squareness of the Opening Check the Fit of the Replacement Window Make Modifications for Out-of-Square Verify the Structural Integrity of the Opening Egress Requirements Prepare the Opening Protect Incompatible Materials Cleaning...12 This voluntary specification was developed by representative members of AAMA as advisory information and published as a public service. AAMA disclaims all liability for the use, application or adaptation of materials published herein. Copyright 2015 American Architectural Manufacturers Association 1827 Walden Office Square, Suite 550, Schaumburg, IL Phone: 847/ Fax: 847/ webmaster@aamanet.org Web Site: AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 14-I

178 14.0 Preparing the Opening for Replacement 14.1 Protect the Client's Property When removing and installing doors and windows, caution must be exercised to prevent workers and the elements from damaging furnishings and interior finishes. Proper work-site preparation will not only protect furnishings and finishes, but will also aid in the work process and facilitate cleanup when the job is finished. Items to be reviewed and coordinated with the approving authority may include the following: 1. Make sure that the owners/occupants have removed and stored away all draperies and window treatments. 2. Check to see that furnishings have been moved far enough away from the work area to provide adequate room to work safely and effectively. If possible, have the occupants do this before the workers arrive. 3. Suggest that any pictures/decorations attached to the walls around the work area be removed. 4. Using clean fabric drop cloths or new disposable plastic sheeting, cover all furnishings within the immediate work area to prevent them from becoming soiled. 5. If a great deal of dust may be generated, completely cover all furnishings in the room. 6. Cover the floor around the window/door to be worked on with fabric drop cloth or plastic sheeting, and use appropriate foot coverings. Tape the sheeting to the floor with appropriate tape to keep it from moving when workers walk on it. Do not use tape to attach plastic sheeting to painted surfaces because it may pull off the paint when it is removed. 7. Extend floor protection at least 6 feet from the wall Removal of Sash from Wooden Windows This section covers removal of the sash from existing wood window frames, and the preparation of the existing window frame for the installation of the new window. The procedure followed will be determined based on the method of installation and the accessories used. For applications where the new window frame will be applied against the existing exterior stops, the interior set of stops, sash, the parting bead and all existing hardware, are removed. Once these items are removed, exterior capping and new interior trim will typically be used. If the frame components are in good condition, the existing jambs, header and sill can remain in place. This will allow the replacement unit to be inserted into the existing wooden frame and sealed against the exterior stop, as described in Chapter 15 (see Figure 14-1). If the frame components are damaged or deteriorated, it may be necessary to repair or replace them. For window replacements using new panning and interior trim, the interior set of stops, sash, the parting bead, and all related hardware must be removed prior to the new window installation. In this case, it may be desirable to replace the interior stops/trim to provide a backup and support condition for the new interior trim (see Figure 14-2). Job conditions vary, so these decisions need to be made prior to ordering the product. Prior to removal of stops and sash, determine the most practical location from which to remove and replace the window/door. There may be cases where a wall or other obstacle may force the installer to remove the sash from the exterior and do the installation from the outside. If it is easier to remove or replace the unit from inside the building, then the "inside-removal procedure should be followed (see Figure 14-3). The parting beads and interior stops are removed, but the blindstops and exterior AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 14-1

179 casing, if separate, remain intact. If it is more practical to remove or replace the window from the outside, use the "outside-removal method (see Figure 14-4). The blindstops and exterior casing, if separate, and the parting beads are removed, but the interior stops and the stool remain intact. Figure 14-1 Window Installation Using Exterior Stops and New Interior Trim AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 14-2

180 Figure 14-2 Window Installation Using New Panning and Trim Figure 14-3 Inside Inside-Removal Method AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 14-3

181 Figure 14-4 Outside Outside-Removal Method Removal of Sash from Single/Double Hung Windows (Inside Removal Method) For the Inside Inside-Removal Method, use the following steps as a guide for removing the old sash and window components: 1. Remove the interior trim casing/stops. If the wood is painted, carefully score the joints with a utility knife to break the bond before prying out the stop. Pry the stop (trim) out by using a wide chisel. Be careful to avoid damaging, gouging or marking the stop as it may be reused later (see Figure 14-5). AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 14-4

182 Figure 14-5 Pry Out Blindstops 2. Cut the sash cord or remove the sash balance, and pull the bottom sash out of the frame (see Figure 14-6). Figure 14-6 Remove Old Sash Caution: Some sash balance mechanisms may react when the weight of the sash is removed, so always proceed with caution to avoid injury. 3. Pry out the parting stops, which typically will not be saved. Use pliers if necessary. If the stops are too heavily AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 14-5

183 painted and will not come out easily, chisel them flush with the surface of the head and side jambs. 4. After the parting stops have been removed, take out the upper sash. 5. Remove pulleys and sash weights if required. If mounting screws are corroded, it may be necessary to pry out the pulleys. 6. If the existing window was installed with pre-formed aluminum tracks, it will usually contain a wooden parting stop at the top, and aluminum tracks on the sides. For removal of this type of unit follow these steps: Remove the wooden parting stop and pull out the fasteners (staples or nails) securing the side tracks. Remove the small aluminum blocks located at the top and bottom of each track, then remove the two side tracks and sash as one unit Removal of Sash from Single/Double Hung Windows (Outside Outside-Removal Method) Although uncommon, with this method the interior stops and trim remain intact while the exterior casing is removed. This procedure minimizes interior finish work and is often used when access to the interior is prohibited because of an intervening wall. In order to use this method however, wraparound panning is typically used. Follow these steps: 1. Remove the exterior casings and blindstops (casing may be blindstop). If painted, carefully score the joints with a utility knife to break the bond before prying out the stop. Pry with a wide chisel. Be careful to avoid damaging the stop and frame (see Figure 14-5). 2. Remove cords or sash balances if required, and pull the top sash out of the frame (see Figure 14-6). 3. Pry out the parting stops, which typically will not be saved. Use pliers if necessary. If the stops are too heavily painted and will not come out easily, chisel them flush with the surface of the head and side jambs. 4. After the parting stops have been removed, take out the lower sash. 5. Remove pulleys and sash weights if required. If mounting screws are corroded, it may be necessary to pry out the pulleys. 6. If the existing window was installed with preformed aluminum tracks, usually there is a wooden parting stop at the top and aluminum tracks on the sides. To remove this type of unit follow the points outlined in Section Removal of Sash Only from Steel Windows To remove steel window sash for replacement, do the following: 1. Remove the operable sash. 2. Remove the stationary sash. 3. Remove mullions, fasteners. 4. Remove any protruding metal, hinges and obstructions on the metal frames. 5. If the replacement unit is an emergency escape window, make sure the net clear opening of the new window meets code requirements. This should have been done when the window was ordered; however, if frame modifications are needed, cut away the frame as required in order to allow for the installation of a window meeting emergency escape requirements (see Figure 14-7). AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 14-6

184 Figure 14-7 Cut Frame to Increase Size of Opening 6. Replace or repair damaged or deteriorated components, and remove mildew to prevent further degradation Removal of Entire Frame: Aluminum or Steel Windows In solid barrier wall applications, steel windows were either installed by attaching the window frame to the rough frame with screws or by embedding the flange into the masonry. The installer should determine the appropriate method of removal prior to proceeding Removal of Steel Window Frame by Unscrewing To remove a steel window frame intact: 1. With operable sash open, remove accessible screws. 2. For fixed sash, locate screws and chip away any putty covering them (see Figure 14-8). AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 14-7

185 Figure 14-8 Remove Glazing Compound and Screws Caution: Don t forget that asbestos and lead may be found in and around old putty glazed windows. Be sure to check for these materials and take all precautions necessary to eliminate health risks for you and the building occupants. 3. Remove screws or drill them out. 4. After all screws are removed, pull out the entire window unit if possible Removal of Steel Window Frame by Cutting When the frames of old steel windows are obstructed, or have embedded flanges or anchorages, the unit can be removed as described below: 1. Remove operable window assemblies. Disassemble the hinges or cut through them with a reciprocating saw or metal cutting tool. 2. Remove the glass from the fixed nonoperable windows. 3. Cut out the mullions and cut through the metal frame at the sill. Leave the sides and top of the frame temporarily intact (see Figures 14-9 and 14-10). 4. Pull up on the severed halves of the frame bottom, thereby pulling the jambs away from the opening and pulling the head down (see Figure 14-11). Because the flanges are usually narrow, it should be possible to force the partially collapsed frame out of the opening (see Figure 14-12). 5. If the replacement unit is an egress window, make sure that the opening is properly sized. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 14-8

186 Figure 14-9 Cut Out Center Bar 1 Figure Cut Through Bottom Rail 2 AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 14-9

187 Figure Start Pulling Out Frame 3 and 4 Figure Pry Out Top of Frame Assessing the Opening Before installing a new window, the rough opening must be assessed (see Chapter 8, Section 8.3, "Preinstallation Inspection") Determining Squareness of the Opening Window openings are seldom perfectly square (see Chapter 11, "Measuring and Ordering."). One way to determine the squareness of the opening is to measure the diagonal distances of the opening. (See Chapter 11 for guidelines on measuring the opening.) 1. Measure from a bottom corner to the opposite top corner. 2. Measure the opposite diagonal the same way. 3. Compare the two measurements. If the diagonals are equal, the opening is square. If the measurements differ by more than 1/4", modifications may be necessary (see Chapter 11, Section for detailed information) Check the Fit of the Replacement Window AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 14-10

188 Verify that the new unit will fit properly into the existing opening by setting it in the opening and checking the clearance around the window. If panning and trim are to be applied around the window prior to replacement, install them prior to checking the fit (see Chapter 15 for instructions) Make Modifications for Out-of-Square If the opening is out-of-square, unlevel or untrue, then the window may not fit properly. Make necessary modifications to install the replacement unit properly. Because bottom supports must be flat, level the sill with blocking and bring it as close to level as possible. The sides of the opening should be parallel to each other and perpendicular to the sill. Each should also be in the same plane (true). If modifications or corrections severely affect the size of the opening, it may be necessary to order a smaller window than originally planned. If this is the case, be sure to check the egress requirements Verify the Structural Integrity of the Opening Check the existing window frame and/or rough frame to see if it is structurally adequate to allow the new window to be properly anchored. Check for the presence of decayed wood and rust on steel by poking or prodding with a punch or similar tool. If the punch goes into the wood with little or no resistance, the wood is decayed. Check masonry conditions to ensure that brick/block conditions are not cracked or deteriorated to the point that they are no longer suitable for anchorage. When deteriorated or damaged components are present, notify the appropriate party and repair as directed: Replace decayed wood or rusted steel with new materials as needed. Reinforce cracked and split wood and masonry conditions when possible. Patch and seal any cracks or holes. Anchor the existing window or door frame to the wall system to adequately transfer loads. Use the anchor clips or trim clips provided for this purpose and make sure they are properly secured to the existing conditions Egress Requirements Before replacing a window, determine whether the window must meet building code requirements for egress and safety glass (see Chapter 9) Prepare the Opening When preparing the opening for the replacement window, determine what accessories are needed. Complete the application of accessories before installation of the window. Refer to Chapter 6 for more information about accessories Protect Incompatible Materials Direct contact of incompatible materials must be avoided. Over time, materials can degrade due to contact with dissimilar materials. Examples of this include instances where unprotected aluminum comes into direct contact with unprotected carbon steel, poured concrete or mortar. Galvanic corrosion will occur due to an electrochemical reaction that takes place between the two materials (metals) while in the presence of moisture. In metal-to-metal applications, both the aluminum and steel are to be protected. Protect incompatible materials by following these recommendations: AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 14-11

189 Protect Aluminum with: Paint (Back painting as required) Caulks/sealants Non-absorptive plastic material Elastomeric tapes or gaskets Protect Steel with: Cold galvanized coating (two coats) Rust-proof coatings (do not use a coating that contains lead) Corrosion resistant coatings and/or inhibitors Cleaning The rough opening must be clean, dry, dust free and frost free before installing the window or door, and/or applying sealant. Mold/Mildew Precautions If mold or mildew is detected in, or around the window stop work on the installation and notify the responsible party. Proper Material Disposal Once materials are removed from the existing opening, it is the responsibility of the installer to dispose of them properly and safely Proper Material Disposal If hazardous waste will be generated, it must be disposed of properly. Typically, hazardous waste must be transported in sealed, nonreturnable containers from which materials cannot escape. Containers used to transport hazardous waste include: 6 mil plastic bags Cartons Drums Cans Note: Before transporting hazardous waste, check the local Department of Transportation's hazardous waste hauling requirements or with a waste management agency. Most states limit hazardous waste disposal by individuals to 50 pounds of material, and require that the waste be hauled to an approved treatment, storage or disposal facility. Notes: AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 14-12

190 Table of Contents 15 Replacement Window Installation Installing Windows With Panning and Trim Preset Panning Installation Wrap-Around Panning Installation Application of Trim and Clips Final Checking and Adjusting of Operable Sash Seal and Finish the Interior Extended Flange Replacement Installation Prior to Installing Extended Flange Replacement Windows Install Window and Seal the Exterior Finishing and Sealing the Interior Installing Replacement Windows In Wood Hung Windows with Trim Only Window Installation Completion of the Installation Application of Trim and Clips Seal and Finish the Exterior Installing Replacement Windows In Flat Conditions This voluntary specification was developed by representative members of AAMA as advisory information and published as a public service. AAMA disclaims all liability for the use, application or adaptation of materials published herein. Copyright 2015 American Architectural Manufacturers Association 1827 Walden Office Square, Suite 550, Schaumburg, IL Phone: 847/ Fax: 847/ webmaster@aamanet.org Web Site: AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 15-I

191 15 Replacement Window Installation There are too many possible replacement window scenarios to cover in one chapter; however, basic instructions for installing the more common types are presented here. Primary emphasis is placed on replacement of wooden double hung windows and steel casement windows using preset or wraparound panning and trim. These techniques will serve as a foundation for approaching other types of window and wall combinations. Also covered are applications where a new window is installed into an existing opening (without the use of panning) and sealed against the existing exterior blind stops, and applications where extended flange replacement windows are used. Remember, this manual provides general guidelines. Read and follow manufacturer's instructions, and always install in conformance with federal, state, and local codes. Before replacing windows in bedrooms and near doors, check the prevailing requirements pertaining to emergency escape windows and safety glass (see Chapter 9, Sections 9.4 and 9.5). The installer must decide which existing window components will be left intact, which will be removed and reinstalled, and which will be removed and discarded. Window removal is discussed in Chapter 14. Remove the old window sash in accordance with local code requirements, the manufacturer's recommendations, and the guidelines presented in Chapter Installing Windows With Panning and Trim Generally, commercial window installations require accessories such as panning and trim. The assembly of these components should be completed prior to installing the window. Some of the more common accessories are defined in the following sections. The most common types are: Preset panning Wrap-around panning/snap-on flanges Trim and clips Preset Panning Installation Preset panning is typically assembled, trimmed and installed before the window is installed. Complete the assembly of these components prior to installing the window. Since preset panning is first assembled together, then applied to the condition, the installer should gather all of the appropriate materials before beginning. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 15-2

192 Head, jamb and sill panning pieces Pressure plates and mullion covers Assembly fasteners Anchor clips Corner clips Installation fasteners Gaskets Sealant Assembly tools Whenever possible, work from a work bench/table. Lay all of the pieces on top of the table and prep them for assembly. 1. First apply gaskets into the grooves on the panning. Make sure to apply excess gasket material into the groove so that once normal shrinkage takes place, the gaskets won't be too short. (Example: Cut the gasket 1/4 longer per foot than the extrusion length. Consult the gasket supplier and/or window manufacturer for the recommended amount of excess.) 2. Attach the head, jamb and sill pieces together as directed by the manufacturer (see Figure 15-1). Figure 15-1 Assembly of Preset Panning AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 15-3

193 3. After assembly of the main pieces, apply any anchor brackets or assembly clips in place that will be used to facilitate installation later. Steel spring clips are often attached to the panning and will help hold the window frame in position on a temporary basis until the trim and clips can be applied. The temporary clips are not intended to be left in place overnight. 4. Once the preset panning is assembled, place the panning assembly into the opening to check the fit. Trimming will typically be required, so dry fitting will help establish the amount of trimming necessary. Check the fit and mark the panning for trimming. Remove the panning and trim the flanges as required to create a good fit. Use caution when trimming, being careful not to distort the frame or bend the corners. Cut/trim panning to allow for installation clearance and allow for the application of the specified sealant joint. 5. After all the pieces are trimmed, back seal the assembly by applying sealant over the mechanical joints and apply the corner reinforcing clips as needed. Make sure to clean all surfaces prior to sealing. Remove any residual oil, dust and moisture prior to sealing. Always try to back seal neatly so that the sealant won't be seen later. If the sealant will be visible, use a clear sealant or a sealant color that closely matches the finish of the panning. Only use sealant that is recommended for this type of application. Apply prescribed corner clips last, but be careful not to scrape off all of the sealant at the joints. 6. Reinstall the panning into the opening. Shim panning plumb, level and square, and attach according to the manufacturer s installation instructions or project shop drawings (see Figure 15-2). Make sure that the attachment fasteners penetrate a suitable condition providing the structural support necessary to hold the assembly in position. Panning must be in line (parallel) from opening to opening and unit to unit. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 15-4

194 Figure 15-2 Assembly of Panning Into the Opening 7. In openings where mullions must remain, apply the exterior pressure plate over the two opposing panning pieces (see Figure 15-3). Figure 15-3 Application of Pressure Plate and Cover over Existing Mullions and Panning AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 15-5

195 Measure the finished height from the bottom of the panning to the top of the panning where it fits against the building condition. Cut the pressure plate to the height dimension (less 1/4 ) to allow for clearance. Note: More clearance may be desirable if planning to use a backer rod under the panning where the panning has a return leg for this purpose. Install gaskets into the grooves in the pressure plate when applicable. Apply the pressure plate into position using the screws recommended by the manufacturer. Seal between the pressure plate and the panning as directed by the manufacturer. 8. Preset panning can be advantageous because the installer can apply the perimeter seal prior to installing the new window. Apply backer rod or bond breaker tape around the perimeter, between the panning flange (and pressure plate) and the building condition. Apply and tool the sealant into the joints. Be sure to push the sealant firmly in place to facilitate adhesion. 9. If pressure plates were previously applied, the snap on cover can be installed just prior to installation of the window frame. Cut the cover to size as required and snap it in place, centering it on the pressure plate. Apply sealant over the joint between the cover and the panning if directed by the manufacturer. 10. Once the panning and mullion covers are secured and sealed in place, the window can be set into position. This may require additional sealant at the panning/window interface. Apply sealant around the perimeter of the panning at the head, jamb and sill as directed by the manufacturer. Sealant is usually placed in line with where the window frame will make contact with the panning and/or gasket. Set the window into position at the sill, centering the window into the opening. Next, rotate the top towards the exterior. Some panning designs include steel spring clips that will allow the window to be snapped into position. Press the window into position and secure it with temporary anchors (clips) as required. 11. Use full blocking and/or extra shims under the window frame at the sill condition in order to ensure that the frame will not be racked or rotated out of position. 12. After the frame is secured in place, replace the corresponding sash (if they were removed) back in the frame. In hung windows, make sure sash stops are in the jambs. Always check the sash for proper operation before moving on to the next opening. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 15-6

196 Wrap-Around Panning Installation The assembly method for wrap around panning is similar to the preset panning, except these materials are wrapped around the window frame and assembled together prior to installation of the entire unit. First check the shop drawings to determine the proper mark number and location of the panning for each opening and window. Gather all of the appropriate materials prior to assembly. Window (typically with sash removed) Pressure plates and mullion covers Head, jamb and sill panning pieces Assembly fasteners Installation fasteners Gaskets Sealant Assembly tools Whenever possible, work from a work bench/table. Lay all of the pieces on top of the table and prep them for assembly. 1. First consider removing the operable sash from the frame. This may make it a bit easier to assemble and install the unit due to the reduced weight. Be sure to mark the sash and the frame with a corresponding number so they can be put back together in the same opening later. 2. Apply the gasket into the grooves on the panning. In cases where gaskets are not required, sealant will typically be required. Make sure to apply excess gasket material into the groove so that once normal shrinkage takes place, the gaskets won't be too short. (Example: Cut the gasket 1/4 longer per foot than the extrusion length. Consult the gasket supplier and/or window manufacturer for the recommended amount of excess.) 3. Place the head panning over the head of the window first, then apply the jamb pieces and finish with the sill (see Figure 15-4). When directed by the manufacturer, apply sealant in the assembly grooves prior to installation. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 15-7

197 Figure 15-4 Assembly of Wrap-around Panning 4. Attach the panning together at the corners as directed by the manufacturer. 5. Attach the panning to the window frame around the entire perimeter as directed by the manufacturer. For all panning assembly and attachment, use only the fasteners recommended by the manufacturer. 6. After assembly of the main pieces, apply any anchor brackets or assembly clips in place that will be used to facilitate installation later. 7. Once the wrap-around panning is assembled over the window and ready for installation, place the window assembly into the opening to check the fit. Trimming will typically be required, so dry fitting will help establish the amount of trimming necessary. Check the fit and mark the panning for trimming. Remove the assembly from the opening and trim the panning flanges as required to create a good fit. Cut/trim panning to allow for installation clearance and allow for the application of the specified sealant joint. Use caution when trimming, being careful not to distort the frame or bend the corners. 8. After the assembly is trimmed, back seal the assembly by applying sealant over the mechanical joints. Make sure to clean all surfaces prior to sealing. Always try to back seal so that the sealant won't be seen later. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 15-8

198 If the sealant will be visible, use a clear sealant or a sealant color that closely matches the finish of the panning and clean off excess. Only use sealant that is recommended for this type of application. Apply corner clips last, but make sure not to scrape off all of the sealant at the joints. Some manufacturers will also require that the perimeter of the window be sealed where it slips inside the panning, if this step wasn't done prior to slipping the panning over the window frame. 9. Reinstall the assembly into the opening. It is often desirable to wrap the assembly with batt insulation at the head and jambs prior to final installation. Set the assembly into position and shim plumb, level and square. Attach as directed by the project shop drawings or manufacturer s instructions (see Figure 15-5). Figure 15-5 Assembly of Window into the Opening Use full blocking and/or multiple shims at the sill condition to restrict rotation or racking of the frame. Make sure that all frames are in line (parallel) with each other (in the same plane) from opening to opening, and unit to unit. Make sure that the attachment fasteners penetrate a suitable condition that will provide the structural support to hold the assembly in position. 10. In openings where existing mullions are to remain, the installer can now apply the exterior pressure plate over the two opposing panning pieces (see Figure 15-3). Measure the finished height from the bottom of the panning to the top of the panning where it fits against the building condition. Cut the pressure plate to the height dimension (less 1/4 ) to allow for clearance. Install gaskets into the grooves in the pressure plate when applicable. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 15-9

199 Apply the pressure plate into position using the screws recommended by the manufacturer. Seal between the pressure plate and the panning as directed by the manufacturer. Note: More clearance may be desirable if planning to use a backer rod under the panning where the panning has a return leg for this purpose. 11. If pressure plates were previously applied, the snap-on cover can be installed just prior to installation of the perimeter seal. Cut the cover to size as required and snap it in place, centering it on the pressure plate. Apply sealant over the joint between the cover and the panning if directed by the manufacturer. 12. After installation of the panning/window assembly and the application of any pressure plates and mullion covers, the perimeter joint can be sealed. Often (if not already removed) the removal of the sash is necessary to allow for access to the perimeter joint. Be sure to mark the sash and frame so you can reinstall the sash back into the original window frame. Apply backer rod or bond breaker tape around the perimeter, between the panning flange and the building condition. Apply and tool the sealant into the joint. Be sure to push the sealant firmly in place to facilitate adhesion. 13. After the frame is secured in place, replace the corresponding sash back in the frame. In hung windows, make sure sash stops are in the jambs. Always check the sash for proper operation before moving on to the next opening Application of Trim and Clips After the window is temporarily secured in place (and if not previously done) insulation can be applied at the head and jambs. The type and amount of insulation will be dependent on the space available. Loosely apply 1 x 3 batt insulation at the head and jamb cavities with a putty knife or similar tool. For smaller joints, low or zero-pressure foam can be applied. After the application of the required insulation, the remaining anchor clips and trim can be applied (see Figure 15-6). Some projects will involve continuous trim clips, while others will involve clips that are 3" to 4" in length. Make sure to follow the manufacturer's installation instructions pertaining to the number, length and location of the trim clips. PVC frames may have an integral accessory groove that allows for a specially designed trim to snap into place. Trim clips typically are the only structural attachment between the window and the existing opening; therefore, it is critical that they be installed properly. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 15-10

200 1. Place trim clips tight against both the existing condition and the interior face of the new window. 2. Check the depth of the trim prior to installation to ensure that the proper coverage will be maintained over the existing condition. 3. When attaching the trim clips to the existing condition, make sure to only use fasteners that are recommended for the specific job application. 4. When attaching the trim clips to the new window, only use the fasteners recommended by the manufacturer. Note: Use caution when attaching the clips to the frame be sure not to interrupt the travel of the sash by penetrating the track. 5. Some projects will involve deeper trim at the jambs as compared to the head and sill. Others will have contoured trim at the head and sill and straight trim at the jambs. Check the requirements and apply the deeper trim first, then butt the shallow or contoured trim to it. Figure 15-6 Application of Trim and Clips Final Checking and Adjusting of Operable Sash 1. Make a final check of the installation. Check the sash to ensure they are set square and aligned within the frame and that the latches are properly aligned and functioning. Hung Windows Lift the bottom sash until it just clears the sill and check the gap. It will be even across the bottom of the sash if the unit is square. If it is not, adjust the window frame in the opening until it is. Shim and attach the frame at the meeting rail, or use jamb adjustment clips to secure frames at the center. When installing double hung side load sash, be sure to fully engage the sash clips and guides on top of the sash to ensure proper operation and sash alignment. When re-installing sash in tilt windows, be sure that the tilt triggers are fully engaged into the jambs, and that the pivot bars are completely engaged into the balance shoes. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 15-11

201 Never allow installation screws to deter the proper operation of the product. Check each sash for proper operation. Double check that the bottom and top sash stops have not fallen off during transportation, or were removed from the jambs. If they have been removed for any reason, make sure that they are replaced. Sliders Open each operable sash until it just clears the jamb and check the gap. It should be even along the vertical edge of the sash if the unit is square. If the sash is not square, remove the sash to reduce the weight and adjust the rollers prior to placing the sash back into the window frame. Continue to check and adjust until the sash is square in the frame. Make sure operable sliders are supported at the locking points so that if the sash is slammed shut, the frame will resist damage. Casements If the frame installation is square, the gap will be equal all the way around the sash. Adjust the hinge and install set screws to restrict movement later. Always fasten through the hinge into the building condition on butt hinge applications. This is especially critical in panning applications where anchorage may be limited. 2. When the window is plumb, level and square, tighten all screws without distorting the frame. The frame must be secure; however, it must not be twisted or warped by under- or over-shimming, or by improperly positioning and over tightening fasteners Seal and Finish the Interior To finish the interior on panning and trim installations, apply sealant to the joint between trim and the building conditions (and any other areas) as required per job Extended Flange Replacement Installation An extended flange replacement window can be installed without removing the existing window frame. The primary seal in an extended flange installation is located between the exterior side of the extended flange and the existing building condition. PVC frames may have an integral flange or accessory groove that allows for a specially designed flange to snap into place Prior to Installing Extended Flange Replacement Windows Removal practices vary with the type of window being replaced. For details on removing the existing sash, see Chapter 14, Section Install Window and Seal the Exterior AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 15-12

202 After removal of existing sash and mullion, check the opening size and fit, and install the new window following these steps: 1. Prior to installation, dry fit the extended flange window into the opening. Check the flange alignment with the rough opening and mark any necessary trimming in order to allow a proper fit during installation. 2. After trimming the flange, recheck the fit and make sure to allow for a good fit between the edge of the flange and the existing building condition (see Figure 15-7). Cut/trim the flange to allow for installation clearance and allow for the application of the specified sealant joint. Don t force the window in place. If necessary, trim again and re-insert into the opening. Figure 15-7 Sill Detail Extended Flange Window 3. Install shims and bottom support as needed or directed by the manufacturer, to ensure that the frame will be well supported along its base. 4. Follow the manufacturer's instructions when securing the window into position. In some cases predrilled holes are present in the frame. Use them as directed, or drill them as instructed. When fastening through the frame at the sill, seal the fastener hole, set the fastener, and then seal over the head. Note: Fasteners are sometimes installed through the head, jamb and sill frame, but never through the extended flange. 5. In most many cases, trim clips and trim are used to secure the window into position. When trim is provided, use the instructions outlined in Section to secure the window. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 15-13

203 6. After the replacement window is properly positioned and secured, install the primary seal around the perimeter of the window between the extended flange and the building condition (see Figure 15-8). Also refer to Section for final checking and adjustment. Figure 15-8 Apply Primary Seal Finishing and Sealing the Interior Follow the manufacturer s instructions regarding finishing and sealing. The following are general guidelines. Option #1: Existing Frame Cut Back If the existing frame was cut back, make the gap between the replacement frame and the opening as small as possible. With shims and bottom support in place, apply sealant to fill the joint between the replacement frame and the opening. Install a backer rod and a continuous bead of sealant to fill any voids. Tool the sealant to ensure good adhesion. Install low or zero-expansion pressure foam if allowed by manufacturer. Use precautions outlined in Chapter 13. Option #2: Existing Frame Left in Place without Modification If the existing frame is left in place and not trimmed back, fill the joint between the replacement frame and the opening. To finish and seal the frame: Install cavity insulation, paying particular attention to the manufacturer's instructions when using injected foam (use minimally expanding type only). Install finishing trim that spans the joint and mates neatly with the replacement frame (see Figure 15-9). When the interior edge of the replacement frame is recessed in the opening, jamb extensions may be required. If required, apply a small bead of sealant along both edges of the trim and tool for a finished appearance. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 15-14

204 Figure 15-9 Trim Installation - Extended Flange Window 15.3 Installing Replacement Windows In Wood Hung Windows with Trim Only There are applications where the existing wood windows will remain in place and a new window frame will be installed without the use of panning on the exterior. Although this is not as frequent an occurrence as projects involving panning and trim, this application does occur. This application is often called an inside-out installation technique. When this occurs, use the procedures for removing the existing sash from the interior as outlined in Section Once the removal procedures are completed, the installer can use the following practice for installation of the new window Window Installation 1. Assess and prepare the opening, making sure it is ready for installation of the new window. 2. Generally, the replacement window will either include an extended flange on the sill or an applied sill expander. This piece is designed to cover the gap between the existing window sill and the new window frame (see Figure 15-10). Check the requirements of the particular job and apply as needed. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 15-15

205 Figure Sill Expander at Sill Condition 3. Dry-fit the window into the opening to ensure it will fit properly. This may require trimming of the sill expander. 4. Before installing the window on a permanent basis, apply a nominal 3/8 diameter bead of sealant to the interior face of the exterior stops at the jambs and head, and to the exterior face of the stool (see Figure 15-11). Figure Sealant Application 5. Place the window in the opening and push it against the exterior stops. Apply temporary blocking, shims and/or clips as required to keep the window in place Completion of the Installation AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 15-16

206 After the window is temporarily secured in place, use techniques outlined in previous sections of this chapter for completion of the installation. The sections that apply are as follows: Application of Trim and Clips Final Checking & Adjusting of Operable Sash Seal and Finish the Interior Seal and Finish the Exterior Once the window is secured in place, the exterior finish work can be completed. The sash will typically either need to be removed or fully opened to complete this process. 1. If an extended flange or sill expander is present at the bottom of the window, apply an appropriate backer rod or bond breaker and a bead of sealant along the bottom edge where it butts to the existing window sill. 2. Determine whether the sealant applied to exterior stops is adequate. Remove excess where it squeezes out and/or fill any voids. Tool the bead so that it is fillet shaped and ensures a weather-tight seal Installing Replacement Windows In Flat Conditions. In barrier wall applications where the existing windows have been removed and relatively flat conditions are remaining, the application may be more like a new construction installation (see Figure 15-12). Figure Replacement Opening w/ Flush Condition AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 15-17

207 Examples of replacement window application include cases where: Existing steel windows are completely removed, resulting in a flush condition. Existing windows are completely removed (regardless of the material) to allow for the largest replacement window possible. Applications where a new wood buck is to be installed such as with unequal leg frames. In these cases, the head, jamb and sill conditions remaining are relatively flat and do not require panning. These types of installations typically will incorporate equal leg frame windows. When this situation occurs, follow the installation practices outlined in the new construction installation methods outlined in Chapter 16. Notes: AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 15-18

208 Table of Contents 16.1 Equal Leg Frame Window Installations Equal Leg Frame Window Installation without Receptor Systems Checking the Opening Preparation of the Window Prior to Installation Installation of the Window Application of the Perimeter Seal Equal Leg Frame Window Installations With A Receptor System Preparation of the Receptor System Prior to Window Installation Installation of the Receptor System Prior to Window Installation Application of the Perimeter Seal When Using Receptor Systems Preparation of the Window for Installation with a Receptor System Installation of the Window in Openings with a Receptor System Horizontal Ribbon Window Installations With A Receptor System Preparation of the Receptor System for Horizontal Ribbon Window Applications Installation of the Receptor System in Horizontal Ribbon Window Applications Installation of Windows and Mullions in Horizontal Ribbon Window Applications Male/Female Frames Independent Structural Mullions and Corner Mullions Mullions Installed In Sequence Mullions Installed Before the Window This voluntary specification was developed by representative members of AAMA as advisory information and published as a public service. AAMA disclaims all liability for the use, application or adaptation of materials published herein. Copyright 2015 American Architectural Manufacturers Association 1827 Walden Office Square, Suite 550, Schaumburg, IL Phone: 847/ Fax: 847/ webmaster@aamanet.org Web Site: AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-I

209 Corner Mullion Installation Finish Mullion and Window Installation Vertical Stack Window Installations With A Receptor System Preparation of the Receptor System for Vertical Stack Window Applications Installation of the Receptor System in Vertical Stack Window Applications Installation of Windows in Vertical Stack Window Applications Horizontal Stack Mullions Independent Horizontally Floating Structural Mullions Transoms / Transition Mullions and Knee Wall Applications Checking Installation for Plumb, Level and square Final Checking and Adjustment Finishing the Exterior Allowance for Moisture Escape Finishing the Interior Cavity Insulation Apply Backer Rod (Interior) Apply Sealant (Interior) Trim or Drywall Returns AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-II

210 16.0 New construction Window Installation This chapter contains basic guidelines for installing windows in new construction Equal Leg Frame Window Installations Generally, equal leg frame windows (see Figure 16-1) are the most common type of window frame used in commercial new construction. This term simply refers to the frame style of the frame being used. Windows used in these applications typically do not include panning and trim, and don't include extended flanges to facilitate installation over existing window frames and/or conditions, as they would be non-existent. The installation process for these window types will vary depending on the type of opening, and whether receptor systems will be used to help facilitate installation. Figure 16-1 Equal Leg Frame Window Equal Leg Frame Window Installation without Receptor Systems Equal leg frame windows can be used in buildings that involve a surface barrier system or a membrane drainage system (see Chapter 8, Section 8.1.3). Regardless, the installation of this product type depends on a sealant joint between the window (or receptor) and the exterior building surface for shedding water away from the building. When installing equal leg frame windows in applications that require receptors and subsills, follow the installation practices outlined in Section For equal leg frame installations without the use of receptors and subsills, use the installation procedures in this section Checking the Opening Prior to installation, check each opening to verify conformance to the architectural drawings, specifications and the design intent. The installer shall: 1. Verify the opening size to ensure a proper fit and joint geometry. Check each opening to determine if it is plumb, level and square. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-1

211 2. Check the construction materials, verifying that they are structurally suitable for attachment of the window frame. 3. Determine whether flashing materials are present at the head condition. If flashing is present, make sure that head attachment will not penetrate the flashing (see Figure 16-2). If flashing is present, determine where the window will be positioned to ensure that the perimeter seal is inboard of the flashing so water drainage will occur outboard of the perimeter joint. Figure 16-2 Checking Flashing at Head Condition 4. Make sure that the attachment fasteners specified for the condition will work as intended and that the conditions are suitable for attachment. Note: As an example, if the fasteners prescribed are self-drilling masonry anchors and the condition is not masonry but steel stud, the fastener type will need to be changed for the application. 5. Determine where the window will set in the opening and verify that the conditions allow for a suitable sealant joint (see Figure 16-3). Some conditions, such as brick veneer walls will incorporate an air space or cavity, which will dictate where the frame will be placed to ensure proper joint back up. Depending on the location of the frame relative to the interior conditions, the location of the frame may require interior trim and/or jamb extensions to finish off the interior. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-2

212 Figure 16-3 Checking Sealant Condition Preparation of the Window Prior to Installation Once the opening has been inspected and is ready for window installation, the window can be prepared. This includes unpacking the window and making sure it is ready for installation. Whenever possible, dry fit the window into the opening to verify the fit. Make sure to allow for a sealant joint around the entire perimeter. This will require that the installer determine the amount of shimming necessary to allow for a consistent perimeter joint of adequate width. If mounting clips or brackets are to be used for window attachment, it may be appropriate to install them prior to installation of the window (see Figure 16-4). Check the project shop drawings for the clip type and location, as they will vary from job to job. Use the fasteners recommended by the manufacturer to attach the anchor clips to the frame. Apply any other accessories, like perimeter caulk returns or closure channels, around the perimeter of the window as required for your specific job. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-3

213 Figure 16-4 Attachment of Anchor Clips to Frame Installation of the Window Install the window using the following steps: 1. After checking the fit and making sure the conditions are level, the installer can pre-apply the shims to the sill condition prior to installation of the window frame. 2. Manufacturers often require full support blocking under the window sill to help carry the glass weight. For applications where the window frame requires full support, use blocking as directed by the manufacturer (see Figure 16-5). 3. Set the window in place on top of the shims at the sill (see Figure 16-6). Shims are to be located under any anchor clips or at fastener locations if they occur within the window frame. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-4

214 Figure 16-5 Example of Full Sill Support Blocking Figure 16-6 Installation of Window Assembly 4. Center the window within the opening, allowing for a consistent joint width around the entire perimeter. 5. Place a level on the window sill to verify that the sill is level. Adjust the shims as needed to ensure a level condition. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-5

215 6. Once the window is positioned in the opening, attach the frame to temporarily secure it in place. Apply shims as needed at the head directly in line with the anchor clips. Attach the fasteners just tight enough to secure the window in position, yet allow for adjustment in the next step. 7. Check the head, sill and jambs with a level again to make sure the window is setting plumb, level and square within the opening. Measure across the diagonals to determine if the window is square. 8. Add shims and fasteners as required at the remaining anchor points. Be sure to attach the window frame with clips/fasteners according to the product performance tests conducted by the manufacturer. 9. For casement windows, add blocking and anchors at the hinge locations as directed by the manufacturer. For sliding windows, add support blocking behind the jamb condition at the locking point. This support blocking may also be needed at the head condition directly above the meeting rail of a horizontal slider. Be sure to fully block behind the hinges/locking points, and run fasteners through the hinge into a structural jamb condition (see Figure 16-7, and refer to Section 16.8). 10. Tighten up each fastener around the perimeter until a plumb, level and square installation is achieved. Be careful not to over tighten the fasteners in such a way that the frame is distorted. 11. Check the installed product to ensure that it operates properly and that the reveal is equal between the sash and frame. Figure 16-7 Blocking Behind Butt Hinge Anchor Points Application of the Perimeter Seal Once the window is securely attached in position, the installation is ready for the application of perimeter sealant. 1. If necessary, remove the sash or open the sash to gain access to the exterior. When removing sash, make sure to mark the sash so it will be placed back in the original window frame. In some instances, the perimeter joint is applied from the exterior side using scaffolding or work platforms. 2. Make sure the conditions are clean, dry and suitable for sealant application. Remove any loose debris and wipe any dirt or dust off the condition and the window frame. 3. Apply primer to the perimeter condition and to the window framing if recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Use only the primer recommended for the application. Do not apply primer to the backer rod, if present. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-6

216 Apply the proper amount of primer as prescribed by the sealant manufacturer. Do not apply an excessive amount of primer. 4. Apply an appropriate size backer rod around the entire perimeter. Use a blunt probe or roller to install the backer rod (see Figure 16-8). Do not puncture the rod as this may release gases that can affect the perimeter seal. Make sure to insert the rod at the correct depth so that the joint can be properly filled with sealant. Figure 16-8 Application of Backer Rod and Sealant 5. Once the joint is ready, apply the perimeter sealant. Start at one corner and push the sealant into the joint. Pushing, as opposed to pulling, the sealant ensures that the joint is filled with sealant and that the amount of air left behind the joint is minimal. Fill the joint completely around the entire perimeter, making sure to apply a continuous perimeter seal. 6. Once the joint is sealed, tool the sealant joint to remove any remaining air pockets and create a smooth joint of the proper depth and geometry. 7. Clean any excess sealant off the condition and the window frame. Double check the entire joint, making sure there are no voids left in the seal. 8. Reinstall the sash if it was removed in Step #1. 9. After installation of the sealant joint, recheck the operation of the sash to ensure proper operation and contact with the weather stripping. 10. Follow the guidelines for finishing the interior as prescribed in Section Equal Leg Frame Window Installations With A Receptor System The installation of equal leg frames often incorporates the use of receptors, subsills and flashing. The methods outlined in the following sections describe the installation of receptor systems prior to the window frames Preparation of the Receptor System Prior to Window Installation Prior to installation of the window frames, check each opening to verify conformance to the architectural drawings, specifications and the design intent. This includes: AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-7

217 1. Verifying the opening size to ensure a proper fit and joint geometry. Check each opening to determine if it is plumb, level and square. 2. Checking the construction materials, verifying that they are structurally suitable for attachment of the accessories. 3. Determining whether flashing materials are present at the head condition. If flashing is present, make sure that the attachment of the receptor at the head will not penetrate the flashing. If flashing is present, determine where the window will be positioned to ensure that the perimeter seal is inboard of the flashing so water drainage will occur outboard of the perimeter joint at the head receptor (see Figure 16-9). Figure 16-9 Checking Flashing at Head Condition 4. Make sure that the attachment fasteners specified for the condition will work as intended, and that the conditions are suitable for attachment on all four sides. Note: As an example, if the fasteners prescribed are self-drilling masonry anchors, and the condition is not masonry but steel stud, the fastener type will need to be changed for the application. 5. Distribute the receptor systems to the corresponding openings. Receptor systems are often shipped in bundles and may be marked to correspond with the opening. 6. If flashing is required at the sill, be certain that any flashing used does not compromise the thermal barrier in areas where cold temperatures can be expected. 7. Check the receptor system to determine if any field assembly or fabrication is required. Some receptor systems will require field cutting, drilling and the application of end dams, gaskets, anchor clips, splice plates, etc. If cutting is required, check the project shop drawings for sizing to ensure a proper fit. As an example, if subsills are used, the cut size may be dictated by the shop drawings so the window frames can be installed without interference. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-8

218 When cutting to length, such as in subsill applications, the installer will be required to apply the end dams after any gaskets have been applied as indicated in step #8, (see Figure 16-10). In cases where the subsill has previously been cut to length, the end dams and gaskets may already be applied. Figure Application of End Dams When applying end dams, make sure to properly clean off the ends of both the subsill and the end dam with appropriate solvent to ensure a good seal. After applying solvent, immediately dry off the material. Do not allow the solvent to air dry on the material. Note: It is critical that this step not be overlooked as oil, grease and dirt deposited during the manufacturing process can have a detrimental effect on the adhesion capability of the sealant. Apply and seal the end dams as directed by the manufacturer. Be sure to seal the joint between the end dam and the subsill, and then tool the sealant to remove air bubbles and promote good adhesion. 8. Check the receptors and subsill for grooves, which may require the installation of the gaskets (see Figure 16-11). If required, use the following steps before applying the end dams. Prior to installing the gaskets, remove the material from the roll and allow it to relax. Don't stretch the gaskets. Cut the gasket long enough to allow for crowd in, or compress it so that if it shrinks, it won't be too short. Example: Some gaskets are cut 1/4 per foot longer than the extrusion length. Check with the gasket and/or window manufacturer to determine cutting requirements. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-9

219 Figure Application of Gaskets 9. Drill the accessories as indicated on the shop drawings. Make sure to drill the hole-sizes and locations according to the drawings and/or any job calculations. Receptors may require expansion slots and subsills may require slip anchors to allow for expansion and contraction. Check the installation instructions when locating fixed points and expansion points and make sure to follow the recommended procedures for attachment of the receptor system to the substrate. Note: When applying fasteners in an expansion slot, it is generally recommended that the fastener be positioned in the center of the slot (see Figure 16-12). Check the shop drawings for specific instructions. Figure Attachment of Fasteners through Slots 10. If anchor clips are to be applied prior to installation, attach them now according to the manufacturer's instruction (see Figure 16-13). Use the fasteners specified by the manufacturer. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-10

220 Figure Attach Anchor Clips 11. Determine where the receptor system will set in the opening and verify that the conditions allow for a suitable sealant joint. Some conditions, such as brick veneer walls, will incorporate an air space or cavity that will dictate where the receptor system will be placed to ensure proper joint back up. Depending on the location of the receptor system relative to the interior conditions, additional interior trim and/or jamb extensions may be required and applied later to finish off the interior Installation of the Receptor System Prior to Window Installation When the opening has been inspected and the receptor system has been properly prepared in accordance with Section , the installation of the receptor system may begin. In some cases, the subsill will be installed first, followed by the head and jamb receptor. In other cases, the head and jamb receptors will be installed first, followed by the subill. There may also be other instances where the interior of the windows is inaccessible. In this case, the installation of windows must be done from the exterior, requiring the snap-on receptor clip to be on the exterior side of the wall. The job conditions and the design of the subsill/receptor (whether the jamb receptor is designed to be the termination point for the subsill, or the subsill is designed to be the termination point for the jamb receptor) will be the determining factors. Regardless of the design for the specific job condition, the following steps can be altered in sequence to allow for the variations. 1. Start by placing a level at the sill condition. Determine if the sill is level and how much shimming will be necessary to allow for the proper joint size. Check the shop drawings to determine the amount of shimming necessary to allow for normal field tolerances, and the proper overlap between the window frame and the receptor. Depending on the live load and dead load design criteria for the project, the amount of overlap between the receptor and the window frame can be critical. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-11

221 A story pole (a temporary measurement guide made by the installer) will generally be helpful to determine if enough clearance will remain to allow for the installation of the receptor and the window frame (see Figure 16-14). Figure Checking the Opening for Proper Fit If the minimum clearance shown on the shop drawings is not enough to allow for proper installation of the receptor and window frame, some adjustment in the shim height or the opening size may be necessary. Never install the product into an opening where it doesn t fit. Make sure to provide enough clearance to allow for building movement, as well as expansion and contraction (see Chapter 17). 2. Set and shim the subsill within the opening. Place a level on the subsill and check to ensure it is level. Adjust the shims as needed to create a level condition. Note: For water performance and drainage, it is critical that all subsills be set level because the application of the receptor and the window frame will follow. If the subsill is not set level, there is a good chance that the receptors and the window will not be set level. 3. Attach the subsill into position. Make sure to set the subsill straight within the opening. Attach through the subsill or through anchor clips according to the job specific application. 4. If applying fasteners through the subsill: Make sure to clean the subsill and fastener head/washers/nuts prior to the application of the sealant in order to provide good contact and adhesion of the sealant. Be sure to first pump sealant into the hole and on top of the surface the fastener will penetrate. Next, apply the fastener, any washers, and the nut as required. Finally, seal over the fastener/nut and washer assembly making sure to fully encapsulate the assembly. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-12

222 Tool the sealant to fill any voids, remove air pockets, and to create a water tight installation. 5. Continue to make adjustments as required, re-checking and verifying that the minimum/maximum overlap requirements between the window and the receptor system will be maintained (see Figure 16-14). 6. Once the subsill is set, apply a sealant bead between the end dam and the building condition. It is often necessary to apply a backer rod into the joint to control the amount of sealant used (see Figure 16-15). If the jamb receptor is going to be the termination point for the subsill, skip to Steps #8 and #9, then come back to Step #7. Figure Sealing the End Dam to the Jamb Condition 7. Tool the sealant against the jamb condition, creating a wash that will allow any residual water that gets behind the receptor to drain harmlessly into the subsill. If the subsill is set after the jamb receptor, seal the joint between the end dam and the jamb receptor, creating a wash to divert water into the subsill (see Figure 16-16). AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-13

223 Figure Sealing the Subsill End Dam to the Jamb Receptor 8. After installation of the subsill, the head receptor can be installed. Install the head receptor directly in line with the subsill. First, check the specific type of receptor to determine if a foam block or back up plate will be required to support the sealant joint at the ends of the receptor where the perimeter joint will occur (see Figure 16-17). Figure Plugging the Ends of the Receptor If a foam block is used, install it in place and seal over the ends to essentially create an end plug. If a back up plate is used, it may be applied prior to installation of the head receptor, or it may be applied after the head and jamb receptors are in place. Check the manufacturer's instructions for specific details. Use a laser or level to align the head receptor with the subsill below. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-14

224 Check the drawings to understand the relationship between where the window head will set within the receptor and where the window sill will set within the subsill. The proper relationship will only occur when the window frame is plumb within the opening after the receptor system is installed (see Figure 16-18). Figure Understanding Relationship between the Head and Sill Conditions Shim and attach the head receptor to the head condition using the fasteners specified for the condition. Make sure to shim the head receptor so that it is both level along its length, and from front to back (not rolled) within the opening. The installer is encouraged to use a story pole or a piece of the jamb receptor to line up the head with the sill and to determine the exact height location of the head receptor. Fasten the head receptor in place by tightening the fasteners snug, yet still allowing for further adjustment. Make sure the fasteners at the head will not interfere with the installation of the window frame. 9. Once the head receptor and subsill are in place, the jamb receptors can be installed. If the previous steps were used, the installation of the jamb receptors should be relatively easy. The jamb receptor should fit between the bottom outside leg of the head receptor and the top outside surface of the subsill, but will depend on your specific application (see Figure 16-19). In cases where extreme movement is expected, a sealant joint may be required between the head and jamb receptors. In this case, use a back up plate with bond breaker applied to the exterior face of the plate to bridge the gap (see Figure 16-20). Set the jamb receptor within the opening. Shim and fasten with the appropriate fasteners. Add blocking behind the receptor at the locking points and hinge points for casement and sliding windows. Recheck the opening to verify that the window will set into a plumb, level and square condition. Make any final adjustments that are needed. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-15

225 Figure Installation of Jamb Receptor Figure Splice between Jamb and Head Receptors at Moving Joints 10. Insert splice sleeve, bond breaker tape, and/or silicone splice sheet as required for joint backup at head/jamb receptor intersection. Back seal all joints between the head receptor and the jamb receptor, and the jamb receptor to the subsill. Tool the sealant to ensure good contact and adhesion. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-16

226 11. Prior to window installation, check the subsill for any debris. Clean out any debris that will block the weep holes or keep the subsill from draining. A method of field checking the water integrity of the subsill can be used by the installer to ensure it is water tight. This simple field test method can help reduce the expensive call backs associated with water penetration at the subsill. - Use a suitable tape to cover over the weep holes. - Fill the subsill with water and mark the high water point. - Leave the water in the subsill for at least fifteen minutes. If no water leakage is evident, the subsill is considered water tight. - If leakage occurs, pinpoint the place of escape, drain the water from the subsill, then reseal the point of leakage when the materials are dry. After checking the subsill for water penetration, make sure to remove the tape so the subsill can drain freely later Application of the Perimeter Seal When Using Receptor Systems Once the receptor system is securely attached in position, the installation is ready for the perimeter sealant application. 1. Generally, the installer can work from the interior to apply the perimeter joint between the receptors/subsills and the perimeter condition. In some cases, scaffolding and/or work platforms are provided to allow for easy access. 2. Make sure the conditions are clean, dry and suitable for sealant application. Remove any loose debris and wipe any dirt or dust off from the condition and the receptor system. 3. Apply primer to the perimeter condition and to the receptor system if recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Use only the primer recommended for the application. Do not apply primer to the backer rod, if present. Apply the proper amount of primer as prescribed by the sealant manufacturer. Do not apply an excessive amount of primer. 4. Apply an appropriate size backer rod around the entire perimeter. Use a blunt probe or roller to install the backer rod. Do not puncture the rod as this may release gases that can affect the perimeter seal. Make sure to insert the rod at the correct depth so that the joint can be properly filled with sealant. 5. Once the joint is ready, apply the perimeter sealant. Start at one corner and push the sealant into the joint (see Figure 16-21). Pushing, as opposed to pulling, the sealant ensures that the joint is filled with sealant and that the amount of air left behind the joint is minimal. Fill the joint completely around the entire perimeter, making sure to apply a continuous perimeter seal. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-17

227 Figure Perimeter Seal Application 6. Once the joint is sealed, tool the sealant joint to remove any remaining air pockets, promote good adhesion, and create a smooth joint of the proper depth and geometry. 7. Clean any excess sealant off the condition and the receptor system. Double check the entire joint, making sure there are no voids left in the seal Preparation of the Window for Installation with a Receptor System Once the receptor system has been installed and sealed to the opening, the installer can prepare for window installation. This includes unpacking the window and making sure it is ready for installation. Some projects require jamb reinforcement channels in the jambs of window frames for added strength. Check the requirements for the job and apply reinforcement channels as directed, making sure they are the right size and in the right location (see Figure 16-22). Whenever possible, dry fit the window into the opening to verify the fit. Check the amount of overlap between the head and jamb receptor and the window frame, making sure it is consistent and according to the design intent. If the fit is good, the installer can remove the window and proceed with the following steps for window installation. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-18

228 Figure Application of Reinforcement Channel Installation of the Window in Openings with a Receptor System Install the window using the following steps: 1. After checking the fit and making sure the conditions are level, the installer can prepare for installation of the window. In some cases, the installation will require a bead of sealant applied to the upturned leg of the subsill; follow the manufacturer s instructions. In other cases, gaskets are used as the air/water seal between the subsill and the window frame. Depending on the design of the subsill, this gasket was either previously applied in the groove or will be applied after window installation. 2. The installer may also be required to apply sealant to the head/jamb receptor prior to the installation of the window. Check the drawings to determine the design intent and apply the bead as directed (see Figure 16-23). AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-19

229 Figure Sealing the Receptor or Subsill 3. The opening is now ready for window installation. Position the window as close to the opening as possible. Lift the window and rotate the bottom out while holding the head inboard. 4. Before setting the window in place, try to get the window centered in the opening as much as possible. This is especially critical if sealant was applied at the subsill or receptor to avoid scraping the sealant off when moving the window from side to side. 5. Set the window in place, positioning the bottom of the window on top of the subsill. When setting the window in place, use caution so that the bottom edge of the frame is not rubbed against the exterior gasket at the jambs or head receptor. Doing so may pull the gasket out of the gasket pocket (see Figure 16-24). AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-20

230 Figure Verify Gasket is Secure Don t shove the window too far into the jamb receptor. This could cause damage to the end dams. 6. Rotate the head of the window up and push it out toward the exterior until it hits the head receptor and sealant. 7. Check the location of the window, making sure it is centered in the opening, allowing for a consistent overlap around the entire perimeter. Double check the gasket, making sure the gasket has stayed in place and has not dropped down or become dislodged. If the gasket has become dislodged, remove the window and reinsert the gasket; the gasket will not function if it is not installed properly. Apply pressure down on the window frame to make sure it is seated as far as possible into the bottom of the subsill. 8. Place a level on the window sill to verify that the sill is level. If the window is not level, remove it and determine why. Then make adjustments as required, and reseal the receptor and subsill again prior to reinstallation. 9. Typically, the window frame is not anchored to the receptor or subsill. This allows the window to float within the opening, allowing for building movement and product expansion. When working with multiple windows within a single opening, follow the additional instructions in Section When working with casement windows, it is often desirable to add an anchor at the hinge points (see Figure 16-25). Check the shop drawings for specific requirements relative to the job application. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-21

231 Figure Attachment at Hinge and Lock Points Apply fasteners near or through the hinge points directly into the structural jamb condition as directed by the manufacturer. When working with hung windows, apply blocking (wood and shims) at the meeting rails to help keep the jambs straight. Apply blocking at sliding windows at the center of the vertical jamb to help resist the load when the sash is shut and/or locked. 10. Once the window is positioned in the opening, temporary receptor clips can be applied to hold the window in place. Do not leave temporary clips in place as they are not designed to support the full load. 11. If temporary receptor clips are not used, or if it is time to complete the installation, apply the finished receptor clips as follows: Check the jamb receptor to subsill intersection. Prior to applying the jamb receptor clip, apply a bead of sealant at the space between the edge of the window and the receptor (see Figure 16-26). AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-22

232 Figure Application of Sealant at Receptor to Subsill Intersection There will not be a back-up surface for this sealant joint, but a blind seal (applied to the receptor clip later) will allow the two seals to integrate. Make sure to install the gasket material into the grooves on the receptor as required. Do not cut the gasket short. Cut it long enough (allowing for excess) so that if shrinkage occurs later, there will still be enough to cover the entire length. 12. Apply a heavy bed of sealant to the back of the receptor clip where it overlaps the sill framing of the window (see Figure 16-26). After applying the sealant, apply the receptor clip into position. Tool and clean any excess sealant that appears on the finished surface. 13. Check the installed product to ensure that it operates properly and that the reveal is equal between the sash and frame Horizontal Ribbon Window Installations With A Receptor System The installation of multiple windows (often called ribbon windows) is very similar to the instructions outlined in Section 16.2; however, additional preparations and steps will be necessary. Two things must be considered when installing windows in horizontal ribbons using receptor systems. First is the preparation and installation of the receptor system, which will often be spliced together in a single opening. The second consideration is the use of mullions, and the need to properly anchor the mullions between the units to handle the structural load Preparation of the Receptor System for Horizontal Ribbon Window Applications When installing receptors and subsills in horizontal ribbon window applications, the amount of preparation needed will be based on the width of the opening and whether splicing is necessary. The governing factor will be the length of the receptor/subsill, which is often determined based on the shipping capabilities. When preparing receptors and subsills, follow the procedures outlined below. The splicing requirements are common to both receptors and subsills. 1. Distribute the materials to the correct opening. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-23

233 2. Determine what field fabrication is necessary, such as cutting, drilling and the application of end dams, gaskets and anchor clips as outlined in Section Receptors may require expansion slots, and subsills may require slip anchors to allow for expansion and contraction. Check the installation instructions when locating fixed points and expansion points, and make sure to follow the recommended procedures for attachment of the receptor system to the substrate. When applying fasteners in an expansion slot, it is generally recommended that the fastener be positioned in the center of the slot (see Figure 16-27). Figure Expansion Slots/Slip Anchors 3. In addition to the preparations outlined in Section , splice plates will need to be applied (see Figure 16-28). Splices may be made of extrusions, formed from aluminum sheet or silicone compatible rubberized splice sleeves. Typically, rigid splice plates will be attached to one end of the extrusion and allowed to float freely with the opposing end of the mating piece, while flexible splices are sealed to both extrusions after installation. First, apply any bond breaker tape to the splice as indicated on the drawings. The application of bond breaker tape is necessary to back up the sealant joint and allow for expansion and contraction, while avoiding three-side adhesion. Once the bond breaker tape is applied, the splice can be installed. Attach the splice using the fasteners indicated on the shop drawings. Check the design of the splice and determine if the receptor/subsill is designed to simply sit down or nest with the opposing piece, or if the two pieces are to be slipped together prior to installation. The application will vary based on the design of the extrusion and the splice. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-24

234 Figure Application of Splice Sleeve Installation of the Receptor System in Horizontal Ribbon Window Applications After preparation of the receptor system and assembly of the splice plates, the receptor/subsill can be installed into position. Follow the installation procedures outlined in Section and the perimeter sealing procedures in Section , and use the additional following precautions. 1. Starting from one end of the opening, install the receptor system. The receptor system must be carefully applied to ensure that all materials are properly lined up to allow for window installation later. It is a good idea to use strings or a laser to help locate the position of the receptors and subsill. Setting string will help keep the accessories straight within the opening. As mentioned in previous sections, a story pole and laser will also help keep the receptor and subsill in line with one another from top to bottom, and ensure that the amount of clearance between the head receptor and subsill is correct. 2. Check the installation of each piece to ensure it is set plumb, level and square within the opening and in relationship to each other. 3. Once all of the pieces are installed in the opening, seal the splice joint (see Figure 16-29). Apply the splice sleeve and sealant over the joint, and then tool it to ensure that all air pockets are removed and to promote good adhesion. Use caution when applying the sealant. Make sure the amount of sealant will not create interference with the installation of the window later. Note: Installing too much sealant may cause the window to rest on top of the sealant, causing the window to sit out of level. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-25

235 Figure Sealing Splice Joints 4. Prior to installation of the windows, re-check the installation of the receptor system and make sure all adjustments are made prior to the application of the perimeter seal. 5. Apply the perimeter seal as outlined in Section Re-check all joints to ensure that no voids are left in the sealant around the perimeter or between the perimeter seal and the splice joints Installation of Windows and Mullions in Horizontal Ribbon Window Applications The installation of multiple windows in horizontal ribbon applications can be classified into two basic categories. These categories are defined as male/female frames, or frames with independent structural mullions (see Figure 16-30). The differences between the two categories are relatively simple. Frames with male and female mullions are designed to mate (slip) together during installation, and may or may not require additional anchor clips at the head and sill depending on the height of the window opening. Frames installed with independent structural mullions typically involve the attachment of the mullion to both the receptor and the subsill. Independent mullions are often required to support the structural load imposed on the jambs of the window frames. The structural mullions carry the load to the extreme top and bottom, which in turn distributes the load to anchor clips within the subsill and receptor. Check the project shop drawings to determine the design intent and mullion type for the job application. Each job is different. The shop drawings, installation instructions, and job calculations will dictate the requirements for the application. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-26

236 Figure Variations in Mullion Types Male/Female Frames If male/female frames are used, the installation of the window frames is typically done in sequence, starting from one end and working towards the opposing end. The installation of each window sets up the position for the next window. This makes it very important to keep the frames in the proper position so that when the opposing jamb is reached, there is enough clearance to get the last window in place. Use the following guidelines when installing male/female window combinations: 1. Check the first window frame to determine if the male/female jamb requires gaskets. If the gasket is not already applied, install it now. Make sure to insert enough of the gasket (crowd-in-place) to allow for shrinkage and still provide the necessary coverage. When required, back-seal between the male and female frame halves to create an air/water seal (see Figure 16-31). AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-27

237 Figure Installing Male/Female Frames 2. Set the window into position in the subsill, and then rotate the head toward the exterior pushing it against the receptor. 3. Move the window horizontally until it nests with the jamb receptor. Don t push it too far as that may cause damage to the end dams. Check the horizontal dimension and make sure the window is in the proper position before proceeding. Put pressure on the bottom of the window to make sure it is seated as far as possible into the sill. Once the first window is installed, apply any additional anchor clips at the head and sill as directed by the project shop drawings. This will help keep the frame from moving or shifting out of position. Attach the clips and/or fasteners recommended by the manufacturer for this application. 4. Apply temporary receptor clips in place along the head and/or jamb to secure the window into position until all the windows are installed in the opening. Do not leave the temporary clips in place, as they are not designed to carry the full load. 5. Bring the next window over to the opening. Check the designed overlap, and position the window into the subsill so it will just clear the window frame installed previously. Again, if the window frame requires a back-bead of sealant, apply it prior to setting the window in position. 6. After setting the next window in place, slide frame horizontally until it mates with the male/female frame of the window set previously. The frame may need to be raised slightly to reduce interference or drag within the subsill. Check to ensure that the frames are properly aligned; then push the frame horizontally until the male/female intersect with one another. From the interior, check the fit. Make sure the frames mate together according to the shop drawings. Some male/female combinations are designed to allow for expansion and contraction. Check the drawings and be sure to leave the appropriate joint width. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-28

238 7. Continue the installation process, setting each window in place, applying anchor clips as required until the last window in the opening is reached. 8. The last window in a run is usually the trickiest. Check the opening clearance to ensure there is enough room between the last window frame and the jamb receptor (see Figure 16-32). Figure Setting the Last Unit in a Ribbon In most cases, the clearance allowed for the last window will be enough to get it in place without interference with the jamb receptor. In cases where there is slight interference, it might be necessary to raise the last window frame high enough to clear the subsill (holding the window plumb), then rotate the male/female jamb into the opposing window frame before setting the window down on the subsill. 9. Once the last window frame is set into the proper position, the finished receptor clips can be installed around the perimeter and the final interior sealing work can be completed Independent Structural Mullions and Corner Mullions The installation process for independent structural mullions will vary from job to job. Some applications will require that the mullions are installed in sequence along with the window frame; however, the mullions are not an integral part of the window frame. Other applications will require that each mullion be installed independently of the window frame. This will involve locating and attaching the mullions within the opening, then installing the window frames. Regardless of which application is used, the attachment of the independent structural mullion is generally a requirement. Special anchor clips are designed to carry the load imposed on the mullion from the adjacent framing (see Figure 16-33). AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-29

239 Figure Example Clip for Structural Mullions Mullions Installed In Sequence When mullions are installed in sequence (i.e., window frame, then mullion, then window frame), the practice is very similar to the steps outlined in Section , the main difference is that a structural mullion (commonly one piece) will be installed after each unit. The mullion will typically be a double male or double female so it easily mates with the opposing frames (see Figure 16-34). Check the project shop drawings or installation instructions to determine if gaskets/sealant or both are to be applied to the mullion or frame before installation. Determine if anchor clips are required at the frame and/or at the mullion interface with the head receptor and subsill. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-30

240 Figure Mullions Installed In Sequence Mullions Installed Before the Window 1. When mullions are installed first (before the windows), a three-piece type mullion is often used. Use the following guidelines: Make sure the receptor and subsill are properly positioned and anchored. Use the shop drawings to determine the exact location of the mullions (where they are to be positioned in the opening). Mark the points on the head receptor and subsill for use later. Special reinforcing plates and/or anchor clip receivers may be necessary. In some cases, anchor clip receivers are pre-inserted into the subsill prior to installation. In other cases, the anchor clip receivers can be dropped or slipped into the subsill and/or receptor, and are positioned by the installer as needed to allow for mullion attachment (see Figure 16-35). Figure Reinforcing Plates in Subsill AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-31

241 2. In cases where the clip angle does not lock in place or integrate with a receiver, and attachment of the clip involves penetration of the subsill, the installer must make sure the clip assembly is properly sealed in place using the following guidelines: First determine the location of the clip in the subsill. Using the clip, find and drill the appropriate size hole in the subsill. To seal the clip/fastener assembly, first pump sealant into the hole in the subsill. Apply a bed of sealant on top of the subsill over the entire area where the clip will rest (see Figure 16-36). (This bed shall be 1/8 thick.) Figure Attaching Through Clip in Subsill Set the clip into position into the sealant, pressing it in place, causing the sealant to compress out and around the clip perimeter. Install the fastener(s), any washers, and the nuts into the clip, placing sealant between each layer. Encapsulate the entire head of the fastener/washer/nut with sealant to ensure a water tight joint. Tool the sealant at the fastener and around the clip to remove any air pockets and help promote good adhesion. Randomly check installations with water after the clips are attached and the sealant has had time to properly cure. Corner Mullion Installation When corner mullions are used, they may be the type that are installed in sequence with the window, or installed before the window frame as outlined in the previous steps. Usually the corner mullion design will be similar to the rest of the mullions on the project, so the same steps for installation and attachment can typically be used. However, corner mullions are available in a number of configurations in order to allow for the various corner types (e.g., 135º, 45º, 90º Inside and Outside Corners, see Figure 16-37). AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-32

242 Figure Various Corner Mullions Finish Mullion and Window Installation 1. Once the anchor clips have been installed into the head receptor and subsill, mullion installation can begin. Use the fasteners recommended by the manufacturer to attach the mullion to the anchor clip. Check for slots in the clip at the head condition. Slots are designed to hold the frame in place, yet allow for expansion/contraction and building movement. If slots are present, it s best to locate the fasteners in the center of the vertical slot. Make sure the fastener heads and the anchor clip will not cause interference with the installation of the window frame later. Apply a bead of sealant at any metal-to-metal joints where the mullion will interface with the subsill or receptor (see Figure 16-38). Check the project drawings for seal locations. After setting the mullions in place, tool the sealant on both the inboard and outboard side. Clean off any excess sealant that will show on the exposed finish. It s a good idea to dry fit a frame into place between two opposing mullions to ensure it will fit properly prior to attaching the remaining mullions in place. Check the location of each mullion as the installation progresses. Make sure there will be enough room for the last mullion and frame in the opening so that there will not be an interference problem. Check each installation to ensure that the mullion is plumb and leaves a square opening to receive the next window (see Figure 16-39). AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-33

243 Figure Application of Sealant for Mullion Figure Checking Opening for Plumb/Square 2. Once the mullions are secured in place and the opening is given a final check to ensure a good fit, the installation of the window frames can begin (see Figure 16-40). Before setting the window frame in place, check to see if a bead of sealant is required in the subsill or receptor. Check the shop drawings and apply sealant as required (see Figure 16-23). AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-34

244 Figure Installing Windows between Mullions 3. Insert each window into the opening left by the mullions. Center the window between the mullions and set the window frame in place. Also refer to Section for typical instructions involving window frame installation. Never leave a frame unsecured in the opening. Use short temporary clips (pressure plates) to secure the frame in place until continuous clips can be applied. Do not leave the temporary clips in place, as they are not designed to carry the full load. Always use the pressure plate fasteners recommended by the manufacturer never substitute. When applying continuous pressure plates, make sure to leave enough clearance to apply the receptor clips. Once the continuous pressure plates and receptor clips are applied, the finished covers can be snapped on (see Figure 16-41). Figure Application of Pressure Plates and Covers AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-35

245 4. After all of the window frames are secured in place, complete the installation by applying any additional sealant/insulation as required for this project. See Section 16.9 and for information relative to finishing the interior and exterior Vertical Stack Window Installations With A Receptor System The installation of vertical stack windows is similar to the instructions outlined in Section 16.3 for horizontal ribbons; however, additional preparations and steps will be necessary. Two things must be considered when installing windows in vertical stacks using receptor system. First is the preparation and installation of the receptors, which will often be spliced together in a single opening. The second is the use of horizontal stack mullions, and the need to properly anchor the mullions between the units to handle expansion/contraction, dead load and building movement Preparation of the Receptor System for Vertical Stack Window Applications When installing receptors and subsills in vertical stack window applications, the amount of preparation needed will be based on the height of the opening and whether splicing of the receptors is necessary. Typically, the width of the opening will be small enough to allow for the installation of a single piece (non-spliced) subsill. The guidelines outlined in Section and are appropriate for the installation of the subsill. When installing vertical stack windows, follow the procedures outlined below. Omit the splicing instructions if the openings on the job are small enough to use a single piece of receptor at the jambs. 1. Distribute the materials to the proper opening. 2. Determine what field fabrication is necessary, such as cutting, drilling and applying gaskets as outlined in Section In addition to the preparation outlined in Section , splice plates may need to be applied to the receptors (see Figures and 16-29). Splices may be extrusions formed from aluminum sheet, and/or silicone compatible rubberized splice sleeves. Typically, rigid splice plates will be attached to one end of one extrusion (preferably the upper extrusion) and allowed to float freely with the opposing end of the mating piece, while flexible splice sleeves are sealed to each opposing extrusion. First apply any bond breaker tape to the splice as indicated on the drawings. The application of bond breaker tape is necessary to back up the sealant joint and allow for expansion and contraction while avoiding three-side adhesion. Once the bond breaker tape is applied, the splice can be installed. Attach the splice using the fasteners indicated on the project shop drawings or installation instructions. Check the design of the splice and determine if the receptor is designed to simply sit down or nest with the opposing piece, or if the two pieces are to be slipped together prior to installation. The application will vary based on the design of the extrusion and the splice Installation of the Receptor System in Vertical Stack Window Applications After preparation of the receptor system and assembly of the splice plates, the receptor system can be installed into position. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-36

246 Follow the installation procedures outlined in Section and the perimeter sealing procedures in Section , and use the following additional instructions: 1. Starting from either the top or the bottom of the opening, install the receptor. The receptor must be carefully applied to ensure that all materials are properly lined up to allow for window installation later. It is a good idea to use strings or a laser to help keep the position of the receptors in line with the subsill. Lasers will help keep the accessories straight within the opening. A story pole and laser will also help keep the accessories in line with one another from side to side. This will ensure that the amount of clearance between the jambs is appropriate for horizontal mullion and window installation, which will be done later. 2. Check the installation of each piece to ensure it is set plumb, level and square within the opening and in relationship to each other. 3. Once all of the pieces are installed in the opening, seal the splice joints. Apply sealant into the joint, then tool it to ensure that all air pockets are removed, and to promote good adhesion between the opposing ends of the extrusion. Use caution when applying the sealant. Make sure the amount of sealant will not create interference with the installation of the window later. Note: Installing too much sealant may cause the window to rest against sealant, causing the window to rack out of plumb. 4. Prior to installation of the windows, re-check the installation of the accessories and make sure all adjustments are made prior to the application of the perimeter seal. 5. Apply the perimeter seal as outlined in Section Re-check all joints to ensure that no voids are left in the sealant around the perimeter, or between the perimeter seal and the splice joints Installation of Windows in Vertical Stack Window Applications The installation of multiple windows in vertical stack applications can be classified into two basic categories: frames with stack mullions and/or frames with independent horizontally floating structural mullions. Frames with horizontal stack mullions are designed to mate (slip) together during installation, and may or may not require additional anchor clips at the jambs, depending on the height and weight of the window (see Figure 16-42). Frames incorporating independent horizontally floating structural mullions typically involve the attachment of the mullion to the receptor with anchor clips. Independent horizontally floating mullions are often required to support the structural dead load imposed on the mullion from the frame above. This weight is then carried to the jambs through dead load clips. Solid shimming at the anchor points, and between the receptor and structure, is very important at these locations. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-37

247 Figure Examples of Horizontal Mullions Note: The clips are designed to support the load, yet allow for free movement (expansion and contraction) of the window below. Check the project shop drawings to determine the design intent and mullion type for the job application. Every job is different, and both the shop drawings and job calculations will dictate the requirements for each application Horizontal Stack Mullions When horizontal stack mullions are used, installation of the windows is done in sequence, starting from the bottom and working towards the top. The installation of each window sets up the position for the next window, so it is important to keep the frames in the proper position. This ensures that there is enough clearance to get the last window in place at the top. Use the following guidelines when installing horizontal stack mullions in vertical stack window combinations: 1. Check the subsill and make sure it is ready for window installation. 2. Apply sealant into the subsill and receptor as directed by the manufacturer. 3. Set the window into position in the subsill. Rotate the head toward the exterior and push it against the receptor at the jambs. 4. Move the window horizontally until it nests in the center of the jamb receptor opening. Check the horizontal clearance, and make sure the window is in the proper position before proceeding. 5. Place pressure on the sill of the window to make sure it is seated into the subsill as far as possible. 6. Use a laser or level to check that the head of the window just installed is level before proceeding. Adjust if necessary. If the head is not level it may cause the next window installed to be racked in the opening. 7. After installation of the first window, place the stack mullion on top of the frame at the head (see Figure 16-43). Check the shop drawings and installation instructions to determine if sealant or a gasket is required. Frequently, a bead of sealant is required between the frame and the stack mullion; apply the sealant as directed. Apply temporary receptor clips in place along the jamb to secure the window in position until all the windows are installed in the opening. Do not leave temporary clips in place as they are not designed to carry the full load. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-38

248 Figure Install Horizontal Stack Mullion 8. Install the next window down on top of the horizontal stack mullion, pushing the frame against the jamb receptors. Bring the window over to the opening. Raise the window into the opening and center it between the jambs before setting it in place. After setting the next window in place, slide frame horizontally until it is centered within the opening. The frame may need to be raised to reduce interference or drag within the horizontal stack mullion. 9. From the interior, check the fit. Make sure the frame(s) is seated properly and mates together according to the drawings. 10. Continue the installation process, setting each window in place until the last window is to be installed in a vertical run. 11. The last window in a run is usually the trickiest. Double check the opening clearance to ensure there is enough room between top of the window frame below and the head receptor (see Figure 16-44). In most cases, the clearance allowed for the last window will be enough to get it in place without interference with the horizontal stack mullion. In cases where there is slight interference, you may need to pre-apply the stack mullion on the bottom of the window frame prior to setting it on top of the window below. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-39

249 Figure Installation of the Last Unit 12. Once the last window frame is set into the proper position, the finished receptor clips can be installed around the perimeter Independent Horizontally Floating Structural Mullions The installation process for independent horizontally floating structural mullions is similar to the procedures outlined in the previous section, but with one critical difference. When installing long runs of vertically stacked windows, there must be an allowance for expansion and contraction while supporting the weight of the frame. This is accomplished by using floating mullions, which are supported by dead load clips. Typically, horizontally floating structural mullions are also installed in sequence, alternating window frame and mullions one after another. The most important part of the sequence is to attach the dead load clip after the lower window frame is installed, and just prior to the installation of the horizontal mullion (see Figure 16-45). AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-40

250 Figure Installation of the Dead Load Clip Use the following guidelines for installing window frames and independent horizontally floating structural mullions: 1. First check the opening and make sure the receptor and subsill are properly positioned and anchored. 2. Apply sealant into the subsill and receptor where directed, and install the first window frame into position. 3. Use the shop drawings to determine the exact location of the horizontal mullion (where it is to be positioned). Mark the points on the jamb receptor using a level to locate both ends. 4. Attach the dead load clip into position within the jamb receptors. In some cases, the attachment of the dead load clip will go through the receptor, directly into the building condition. This will transfer the load to a structural building element. In other cases, the anchor clip can simply be attached to the receptor, as long as the load is not too significant for the application. 5. Once dead load clips are installed, the floating horizontal mullion can be positioned in place on top of the clip and attached (see Figure 16-46). Use the fasteners recommended by the manufacturer to attach the horizontal mullion to the dead load clip. Check for slots in the clip or mullion. Slots are designed to hold the frame in place, yet allow for horizontal expansion and contraction due to the width of the mullion. If slots are present, it is best to locate the fasteners in the center of the slot to allow for this movement. Check each installation to ensure that the horizontal mullions are set level, and that a square opening remains to receive the next window. Make sure the fastener heads and the anchor clip will not cause interference with the installation of the window frame later. Check the location of each mullion as the installation progresses. Make sure there will be enough room for the last mullion and frame in the opening. This will ensure that there will not be an interference problem later. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-41

251 Figure Installation of Floating Horizontal Mullion 6. Install the next window in place, centering the window between the receptors at the jambs. Never leave a frame unsecured in the opening. Use short temporary receptor clips and/or pressure plates (when applicable) to secure the frame in place if continuous clips are to be applied later. When applying pressure plates, always use the screws recommended by the manufacturer; never substitute. Once the continuous clips are applied, the finished covers can be snapped on over the pressure plates. 7. After all of the window frames are secured in place, complete the installation by applying the finished receptor clips and sealant as directed by the manufacturer Transoms / Transition Mullions and Knee Wall Applications Special circumstances and conditions frequently appear on jobs. When referring to transitions, there are too many possible combinations to list in this section, but it is important to define a few of the more common conditions an installer may experience. Some of the more common conditions involve transoms, transition mullions and knee wall applications. Transoms Transoms typically involve the installation of a window unit (generally fixed) over or under another unit in a separate master frame. An example of this might be a double horizontal slider with an 18 transom light above. This is not to say that frames can t be made with operable and fixed combinations in the same master frame; they can, but when they are not in the same master frame, they are known as transoms (see Figure 16-47). Transoms typically involve the application of a horizontal stack mullion, sealant, and a method of attachment between the two frames. Many window and door transoms are built as combination units in the field before they are installed. This is often done to facilitate the transportation to the job site without the worry of damage at the horizontal stack. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-42

252 The assembly practices used for transom units are very similar to those outlined in Section involving horizontal stack mullions. The biggest difference is the frequent need for additional fasteners, and reinforcing at the horizontal stack mullion. However, the manufacturer will typically specify the fastener type and spacing, and any reinforcement necessary (see Figure 16-48). Figure Example of a Transom Unit Figure Attachment of Horizontal Stack Proper sealing is a critical element, and must be done such that water penetration is restricted. Any water that does enter the horizontal stack mullion must be allowed to escape at the exterior joint. Pay particular attention to the assembly and anchorage requirements of field assembled units, as the structural requirements are critical to safety and the long-term performance of the assembly. Loads are transposed AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-43

253 differently in these kinds of units, and often require special reinforcing within the assembly, as well as unique anchoring. The project shop drawings or a set of project calculations will typically define the requirements for a given application. Transition Mullions Transition mullions involve the transition from one frame to another. This could include the transition from a 4 - deep door frame section to a 3-1/4 window frame section (see Figure 16-49). Transition mullions may also involve changes in height in a given opening like at a knee wall condition. An example of this would be where the window opening goes from a full height window to a window sitting on a knee wall (see Figure 16-50). Figure Transition Mullion Between Frames Figure Transition Mullion at Knee Wall AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-44

254 The installation of a transition mullion is similar to a three-piece structural mullion as outlined in Section The biggest difference, however, occurs at the sill and head receptor and how they are terminated to accommodate the difference in frame depth. For transition mullion applications, use the following installation procedures in addition to those already defined in Chapter : 1. Start by preparing the opening and setting the receptor and subsill. Generally this will require the installation of the subsill first, followed by the jamb and head receptors, then the transition mullion (see Figure 16-51). Figure Installation Sequence for Knee Wall Applications 2. Prepare the transition mullion for installation. This may require closure channels in knee wall applications where the mullion abuts the jamb condition. Install the closure channel on the lower half of the mullion. This will act as a back up for the sealant joint as well as provide stability for the mullion. Seal the channel and attach it in place with fasteners as indicated by the project shop drawings. Anchor the mullion in place, using clip angles and attachment screws at the head and sill condition. Block with shims and attach through the mullion into the knee wall when possible, to provide extra support (see Figure 16-52). Seal all fastener penetrations. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-45

255 Figure Special Blocking and Anchoring At Knee Walls 3. Seal the joint between the mullion and the end dam on the subsill at the knee wall intersection (see Figure 16-53). First apply a small backer rod into the joint between the mullion and the end dam. Apply sealant into the joint. Tool the sealant creating a wash, which will divert any residual moisture into the subsill. Once the transition mullion is in place and the sealant, fasteners and other accessories are applied, the typical installation practices used for window installation as outlined in Section may be followed AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-46

256 Figure Special Sealing Requirements at Transition Mullions and Knee Walls 16.6 Checking Installation for Plumb, Level and square Regardless of the installation practice used, all windows and accessories shall be installed plumb, level and square within the opening. To check for level and plumb the installer has a couple of very good options. The technique used for years has been to place a level on the window frame at the head, sill and jambs (see Figure 16-54). Use caution to make sure that the level is on the frame, not the sash, and that the frame is flat so you are not trying to put a level on an irregular surface. Lasers can also be used with great accuracy, and are becoming more and more affordable. The best way to check for square is to measure between the opposing corners (see Figure 16-54). When checking for square, the measurements taken from corner to corner (on the diagonal) should be within 1/8 of one another. Checking for true, or making sure the frame isn t racked within the opening (see Figure 16-55), is very important as well. This can be accomplished by using two strings stretched from the opposing corners. By stretching two strings tightly from corner to corner you can check to see if the strings touch at the center of an opening. If they just barely touch, the frame is true within the opening; if they interfere with one another or they don t touch at all, the frame is racked within the opening. Whenever the frame is not plumb, level and square within the opening, there is a great chance the window will not operate properly. This can easily lead to both water penetration and air infiltration, and must be corrected before proceeding. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-47

257 Figure Check for Plumb, Level and Square Figure Check for True (Racking) 16.7 Final Checking and Adjustment Make a final check of the installation. Check the sash to ensure they are set square within the frame, and that the latches are properly aligned and functioning. Hung Windows Lift the bottom sash until it just clears the sill and check the gap. If the unit is square the gaps between the frame and the sash will be equal. Shim and attach the frame at the meeting rail, or use jamb adjustment clips to secure frames at the center. When installing double hung side load sash, be sure to fully engage the sash clips and guides on top of the sash to ensure proper operation and sash alignment. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-48

258 When re-installing sash in tilt windows, be sure that the tilt triggers are fully engaged into the jambs and that the pivot bars are completely engaged into the balance shoes. Never allow installation screws to deter the proper operation of the product. Check each sash for proper operation. Check that the bottom and top sash stops have not fallen off during transportation, or were removed from the jambs. If they have been removed for any reason, make sure that they are replaced. Sliders Open each operable sash until it just clears the jamb and check the gap. It should be even along the vertical edge of the sash if the unit is square. If the sash is not square, remove the sash to reduce the weight, and adjust the rollers prior to placing the sash back into the window frame. Continue to check and adjust until the sash is square in the frame. Make sure that the frame of the operable slider is supported at the locking points so that if the sash is slammed shut, the frame will resist damage. Casements If the unit is square the gaps between the frame and the sash will be equal. Adjust the hinge and install set screws to limit movement. When using butt hinges, always fasten through the hinge into the building condition. This is especially critical in panning applications where anchorage may be limited. If the set screw penetrates the window frame, set it in sealant. All Window Types When the window is plumb, level and square, tighten all screws without distorting the frame. The frame must be secure; however, it must not be twisted or warped by under- or over-shimming, or by improperly positioning and over tightening fasteners Finishing the Exterior The following guidelines are provided in addition to the instructions outlined in the previous sections regarding finishing the exterior. These instructions relate to the application of a perimeter seal. Select a backer rod with a diameter approximately 30% larger than the nominal width of the joint. (Rule of thumb: the rod diameter should be at least 1/8" greater than the joint width.) Insert the backer rod into the joint using a blunt probe or roller. Do not puncture, fold or crease the backer rod as that could cause emission of gas and bubbling of sealant. Do not apply joint primer directly to the backer rod. Push the sealant into the joint over the backer rod in a continuous manner. The bead should be an even, unbroken seal, sufficient to fill the gap between the window unit and the rough opening. Always follow the manufacturer's instructions. (For detailed information on sealants see Chapter 13, Section 13.5.) Remember, there are five basic steps for proper joint preparation and sealant application for windows and doors: 1. CLEAN Joint surfaces must be clean, dry, dust free and frost free. 2. PRIME If required, primer is applied to the clean surface(s). 3. PACK Backer rod or bond breaker as required. 4. SHOOT Sealant is applied by "pushing the bead" into the joint cavity. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-49

259 5. TOOL Dry tooling techniques are used to strike a flush joint and make certain the sealant has the proper configuration and fully contacts the joint walls Allowance for Moisture Escape Most windows are manufactured with weep holes to allow moisture to escape. The installer shall avoid covering these weep holes with sealant, paint, or any other obstructive material. Remove any construction debris from the drainage path to ensure proper drainage Finishing the Interior Cavity Insulation Whenever possible, place insulation in the cavity between the new window unit and the building components, or between the receptor and the building components. This will help reduce air infiltration and thermal conductivity. Use fiber insulation or low pressure foam (see Chapter 13, Section 13.6). Follow the manufacturer's guidelines. Exception: Insulation is not required in small openings if they can be completely filled with sealant (see Chapter 13, Section 13.5 for sealant information) Apply Backer Rod (Interior) Like the exterior, backer rod should be placed over cavity insulation on the interior side of the window to control sealant width and depth Apply Sealant (Interior) On the interior of the window where exposed joints occur, place sealant over the backer rod in a continuous manner. The sealant bead shall be even, unbroken and fill the gap between the window unit and the rough opening. For detailed information on sealants, see Chapter 13, Section Trim or Drywall Returns Buildings often involve cavities within the wall system. These cavities may introduce air at the joint between the innermost surface of the window and the building condition. This air must be controlled in order to help reduce air infiltration and reduce energy consumption. If there are no open-air passages, the blockage of air becomes secondary, and the interior seal between the drywall and the window frame becomes a cosmetic joint. If the dry wall is intended to be a component of the air barrier system, the drywall J-channel shall be sealed to the window (see Figure 16-56). This may or may not be a part of the installer's contract. 1. The responsible party shall coordinate the installation of the drywall and the J-Channel when abutting against the window/accessory. Do not attach J-Channels to the window assembly or receptor unless otherwise approved by the window manufacturer. 2. It is preferable that a 1/4 wide joint be left to allow for movement of the window due to wind load and/or live load movement. If a properly sized joint is not left, cracking of the drywall may occur, or the sealant may tear, requiring future maintenance. 3. If the window is installed toward the outside of the wall assembly, a drywall J-channel return shall be installed in the recess, and the joint between the face of the window frame and the drywall J-channel shall be sealed. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-50

260 Figure Trim and Drywall Returns Notes: AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 16-51

261 Table of Contents 17.1 Expansion and Contraction Installing Windows with Mullions/Expansion Joints Structural Limitations Allowance for Expansion and Contraction Safety Precautions Building Movement Dead Load Movement Live Load Movement Seismic Movement Inter-story Drift Putting It All Together... 9 This voluntary specification was developed by representative members of AAMA as advisory information and published as a public service. AAMA disclaims all liability for the use, application or adaptation of materials published herein. Copyright 2015 American Architectural Manufacturers Association 1827 Walden Office Square, Suite 550, Schaumburg, IL Phone: 847/ Fax: 847/ webmaster@aamanet.org Web Site: AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 17-I

262 17.0 Expansion/Contraction and Building Movement Allowing for expansion/contraction and building movement can present complex problems involving a number of issues. Installers need to be aware of the different causes for movement as well as how to plan for these movements when installing commercial windows and doors. Section 17.1 addresses expansion and contraction of various materials due to temperature differences a product may experience in the field. The impact of this temperature variation will vary, based on the coefficient of thermal expansion of the materials being used. Section 17.2 addresses live load, dead load, seismic movement and inter-story drift within the building. We will explore what causes these types of movement and how to allow for them when installing commercial products Expansion and Contraction Regardless of the type of product or the materials used, thermal expansion and contraction will occur. The amount of movement that can be expected will be based on the length of a given piece of material, the coefficient of thermal expansion, and the degree of temperature change it experiences. One of the most important situations where expansion and contraction should be considered involves windows that are installed in horizontal ribbons or vertically stacked. This may involve windows that are placed side by side or stacked on top of one another, or both. Variations can include any combination of operable windows and fixed windows used together. The assembly and installation of combination windows are discussed below Installing Windows with Mullions/Expansion Joints Installers often mull units together in long runs, usually referred to as ribbon windows. This is usually done in the field because if they were to be assembled in the factory, the units would be too large to ship and handle. Products are usually assembled using male/female frames or supplementary profiles, independent structural mullions or horizontal stack mullions Male/female mullions (see Figure 17-1a) that are integral to the frame of the unit are used to "mull" frames together side by side. Supplementary profiles (see Figure 17-1b) in a male/female configuration snapped onto the adjacent frames perform the same function. Independent structural mullions (see Figure 17-2) are independent of the master frame, yet are still used to "mull" the frames together in an opening. Horizontal stack mullions, or "H" mullions, are used to stack one unit on top of another (see Figure 17-3). Regardless of the mullion type used, special installation and sealing requirements are generally expected to protect against water and air infiltration. Always check the manufacturer's shop drawings for special requirements pertaining to attachment of the mullions/framing, splice locations and special sealing/installation techniques. Figure 17-1a Male/Female Frame Mullions AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 17-1

263 Figure 17-1b Supplementary Profiles Male/Female Figure 17-2 Independent Structural Mullions Figure 17-3 Horizontal Stack Mullion Structural Limitations There are structural limitations associated with combination windows, and they must never be assembled in openings that exceed the manufacturer's recommendations. To avoid problems, consult the manufacturer before starting each job. A professional engineering staff is usually available to assist in making the proper decisions regarding the structural limitations of their products Allowance for Expansion and Contraction Always consider and allow for thermal expansion and contraction. The materials used, the variations in temperature, and the rate of expansion and contraction can vary greatly (see Table 17-1). Windows subject to AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 17-2

264 large amounts of movement can often result in loss of adhesion and sealant failure. Buckling and structural failure is also possible in extreme cases. Whenever the amount of expansion and contraction exceeds the recommended maximum joint movement or the allowable clearance, consider dividing the units into smaller rough openings. Think about separating the units with framing components, as opposed to stacking units on top of one another or mulling units. As shown in Table 17-1, depending on the material, windows exceeding 16 feet in height could result in thermal movement of up to 7/8" for Rigid PVC. This could cause excessive stress on the fasteners or the window materials if the appropriate clearance is not provided. Expansion and contraction rates shown in the table are based on the total amount of movement anticipated from a specific length of material, based on a specific range in temperature. As an example, an aluminum extrusion measuring 96" in length will typically move a total of 1/8" based on a temperature change of 100º F. As the type of material, the material length or temperature range increases or decreases, so does the anticipated amount of movement. Manufacturers provide accessories that allow for movement, but they should be consulted regarding their applications. The color of the material and the product's exposure to sunlight will also have an effect on the amount of movement, since darker materials absorb more heat from the sun's rays. This is important to consider when installing products. APPROXIMATE THERMAL MOVEMENT FOR COMMON MATERIALS (Based on a 100 F Temperature Change Using an 8' Section of Material) MATERIAL RANGE OF MOVEMENT DECIMAL FRACTION *Rigid PVC.22" to.44" /32" to 7/16" Aluminum.130" 1/8" Steel.065" 1/16" *Wood.017" to.025" 1/64" to 1/32" *Glass Reinforced Polyester.100" to.140" 3/32" to 5/32" *Consult Manufacturer: Amount of movement will vary from these numbers depending on compound or species used. Table 17-1 Examples of Thermal Movement Safety Precautions When working with multiple units, consider the weight of the assembly. Window and glass door frames can weigh hundreds of pounds and can be extremely difficult to handle. Always use a sufficient number of people to set the windows or glass doors in place. Sometimes it may be more practical to set the units in place one at a time, as opposed to joining them together prior to installation. Setting units into place individually requires a step-by-step process of setting the first unit, AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 17-3

265 sealing the mullion in place, then setting the next unit. This process requires careful planning. Chapter 16 addresses this in more detail Building Movement An installer should be aware of four common types of building movement. They include: Dead load movement Live load movement Seismic movement Interstory drift Each of these types of movement is independent of each other, yet they must all be considered where the potential for such movement exists. Frequently, job specifications list the expected movement requirements for a given building. In turn, the project shop drawings should show how the design of the product/installation would allow for the movement specified Dead Load Movement Dead load movement is the amount of movement that occurs due to the weight of the building components. This includes the weight of the floor, the exterior façade, and the weight of the windows themselves. To simplify dead load, just think of it as the weight of the materials that will not be removed or moved around in the building. All buildings experience dead load movement, and all buildings are designed to accommodate this movement. The steel or concrete structure is designed to flex. In other words, floors are designed to deflect based on a specific amount of dead load per square foot of area. The steel or concrete structure itself is designed to move a certain amount based on the strength of the structure. How much the building is allowed to move and where this movement will take place are the questions that must be asked. Buildings are typically designed on a grid pattern. That is, buildings are based on a vertical and horizontal structural grid system, known as columns and beams. As an example, a building may have columns that are spaced 20 feet on center. Between the columns are beams, which carry the floor load to each column. The design of the beams is based on an expected amount of movement or deflection (see Figure 17-4). AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 17-4

266 Figure 17-4 Example of Dead Load Movement An example of this movement might be where the architect specifies the floor movement as L/360. This means the amount of allowable movement can be determined by taking the column spacing/length, "L," (the length of the beam in inches), and dividing it by the allowable deflection criteria (360). The result of this equation is the amount of movement allowed at the center of the beam. For an allowable deflection of L/360 between columns spaced at 20 feet on center, the equation would be 240"/360". The results of this formula would be.667" or just about 11/16. Keep in mind that this movement may be both plus and minus, meaning that the floor may raise 11/16" between columns or it may drop 11/16", depending on the spacing and load between columns adjacent to the span in question. With that in mind, imagine what would happen if windows were installed under the second floor incorporating a 1/4 joint. The results would be that in the middle of the beam, between the two columns, the floor would push down on the top of the window by over 7/16", thereby destroying the sealant joint and potentially crushing the window frames. Design engineers can reduce the amount of movement by designing beams to deflect less, but this costs more in terms of stronger beams. There is nothing a window manufacturer or an installer can do to avoid dead load movement. They can only allow for this movement in the design and installation of their products. To allow for movement, manufacturers offer receptor systems, which float with the floor. The receptor captures the head of the window, while allowing for this movement without disrupting the sealant joint and/or placing the weight on top of the window (see Figure 17-5). AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 17-5

267 Figure 17-5 Using a Receptor to Accommodate Dead Load Movement at the Head Some buildings require a 1/4" or less movement, while others require 3/4" or more. This is a critical factor when deciding which receptor system to use and designing the sealant joints around windows. Always check the project shop drawings and the job specifications for both the design criteria (amount of movement expected), and direction on how this movement is to be accommodated in the installation of the window products Live Load Movement Live load movement is similar to dead load with respect to how buildings move, but the loads that cause this movement come from a different source. In simple terms, live load is the expected movement caused by things that move, or may be expected to move, over the life of the building. An example would be furnishings, like a grand piano. Another consideration might be a gathering of people, like in a hotel where there may often be activities involving hundreds of people on a particular floor (see Figure 17-6). AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 17-6

268 Figure 17-6 Example of Live Load Movement While the equation is expressed the same way, the loads are different. The loads are still based on an expected amount of weight on a per square foot basis. To understand this, just think about what would happen to the floor if a large weight were placed in the middle of a span. The floor would deflect (drop) a certain amount, depending on the stiffness of the beam below. This is true for all buildings; they are meant to move a given amount. Again, the use of receptor systems will allow the window to remain stationary while the floor above or below moves. This is not to say that a properly sized sealant joint won t do the same job, but the combination of dead load and live load movement on some buildings may be in excess of the capacity of any sealant joint Seismic Movement Seismic movement is all together different from dead load and live load movement. An earthquake causes seismic movement. Keep in mind that not all buildings are expected to experience this kind of movement, but when they do, it is expected that the windows and doors will be required to accommodate the movement. While some movement is expected vertically, most of the movement is horizontal. This can be in the plane of the window frame (from side to side), or it may be perpendicular to the plane of the window, from inboard to outboard of the opening. (See Figure 17-7 for examples of seismic movement.) Allowing for seismic movement can again be accomplished by the use of receptors or expansion joints designed specifically for this purpose (see Figure 17-8). In the case of seismic movement, the idea is to allow the frame to move without causing serious glass breakage. Receptors will allow the frame to move both horizontally and vertically, yet still give a great degree of protection from glass breakage. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 17-7

269 Figure 17-7 Example of Seismic Movement Figure 17-8 Allowing for Seismic Movement Inter-story Drift Inter-story drift is the difference in displacement or movement between a floor and the roof/floor above or the floor below whenever a building sways. The swaying is most pronounced during an earthquake but could occur from high winds or live and dead loads as described earlier in this manual. Since inter-story drift is defined in terms of a single story, in a multi-story building this term applies to a single story within the building frame. The differential movement between the floors, when the building sways, must be accounted for in the building design (including AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 17-8

270 use of fenestration products). For example, a 10 foot story height that has a 0.10 story drift will experience a differential movement between the floors of 1 foot. Whatever the anticipated movement is must be addressed when designing for windows and doors. The inter-story drift can be transferred to the frames resulting in racking from side to side. This could result in a number of problems ranging from windows not opening to catastrophic failure. Also, some problems are so minor as to be overlooked. These include rotation of glass within the frame or tears in perimeter seals. The impact of the movement on windows or doors can be minimized or completely eliminated through proper design of the opening and connections The greater the drift, the greater the likelihood of damage. Typically, inter-story drift values larger than indicate damage could be serious enough to threaten human safety. Values larger than 0.06 point to severe damage, while values of 0.10 or larger mean probable building collapse Putting It All Together It is safe to say that receptors can be designed to accommodate some or all of the movement indicated in the previous sections. Putting all of these factors together is the responsibility of the design professional; yet it is the installer's responsibility to recognize why receptors and special anchor clips (with vertical movement slots) are used on a given project, that allows these materials to work as intended. Notes: AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 17-9

271 Table of Contents 18.1 Specially Shaped Window Construction Modifications to Standard Installation Instructions Allowing for Additional Attachment Where Needed Proper Shimming Techniques Windows With Eyebrows...4 This voluntary specification was developed by representative members of AAMA as advisory information and published as a public service. AAMA disclaims all liability for the use, application or adaptation of materials published herein. Copyright 2015 American Architectural Manufacturers Association 1827 Walden Office Square, Suite 550, Schaumburg, IL Phone: 847/ Fax: 847/ webmaster@aamanet.org Web Site: AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 18-I

272 18.0 Specially Shaped Window Installation Many manufacturers offer specially shaped window products and accessories to complement their standard product offering (see Figure 18-1). These windows can add variety and beauty to any project. Specially shaped windows, however, usually require more attention to detail. Some of the special considerations may include preparation of the opening, panning and trim application, and special installation techniques. This chapter addresses some of the more common requirements. Figure 18-1 Specially Shaped Window Examples 18.1 Specially Shaped Window Construction Specially shaped windows can be ordered on a custom basis in almost any shape and size. Circular, oval, gothic style, elliptical, half round, quarter round, hexagon, octagon, triangular and any number of other shapes are possible. Framing for these windows is commonly fabricated and assembled by the manufacturer. In retrofit applications, curved sections are usually custom made by the manufacturer using templates made in the field by the customer during the field measuring process. Special shapes for new construction are typically made from templates based on a set of architectural drawings. Regardless of whether the windows are used for new construction or retrofit, there are limitations to what a manufacturer can do when fabricating the window. For this reason, some windows will be fixed while others may be operable. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 18-1

273 18.2 Modifications to Standard Installation Instructions The installation methods outlined in Chapters 15 and 16 for standard products are applicable to specially shaped windows. However, the diagonal or curved components are generally the conditions that require special attention (see Figure 18-2). Figure 18-2 Modifications for Curved Windows In cases where panning and trim are used, these components may also be custom fabricated to either wrap around the window frame, or be preset in the opening. Always consult with the manufacturer regarding the configuration of the opening and the plans for installation. Manufacturers can assist in designing the panning and trim configuration to allow for proper installation. As an example, a window with an arched top may be easier and more economical to manufacturer with the jambs running through as opposed to stopping at the spring line (see Figure 18-3). The manufacturer can help make this determination based on information gathered from the field. Always place information supplied by the manufacturer or concerning the framing on the field measurement sheet or exact size form. Figure 18-3 Determining Fabrication Requirements AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 18-2

274 Because of the nature and complexity of curved shapes, panning and trim will usually require a little extra care. Depending on the construction tolerances of the existing building, curved openings are typically not exact and not symmetrical; therefore, more attention to detail will be required when trimming and fitting the panning into the opening. Regardless of the type or shape of window, the installation methods for the anchors, attachment clips, and trim will usually remain the same. Any special conditions requiring custom applications will typically be depicted on the project shop drawings. If the shop drawings do not depict a condition evident on the project, consult the manufacturer for further instructions Allowing for Additional Attachment Where Needed Probably the most important thing to consider when installing a window in a specially shaped opening is to make sure that structural support is provided. All window openings shall provide adequate anchorage around the entire perimeter. Although it may not be the installer's responsibility to build the opening, the installer should be able to recognize when additional support/attachment is needed, and make a determination as to the proper means of anchorage. In arched or circle top applications, trim is commonly provided on the interior for anchorage (see Figure 18-4). Without the trim, the attachment of the new window frame to the building condition would pose some problems. Figure 18-4 Attachment of Windows in Specially Shaped Openings Specially shaped windows and glass doors may require fastener spacing which deviates from the manufacturer s typical fastener spacing for more standard products. If this information is not included on the project shop drawings, consult the manufacturer for fastener locations Proper Shimming Techniques Another important consideration when installing specially shaped windows is the shimming techniques used. Curved windows and diagonal windows always present special problems, as shims cannot always be placed along the entire length. It is important to shim the windows within the opening in such a way as to distribute the load properly. Never place shims where all of the weight of the window frame will be applied over one point. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 18-3

275 The examples shown (see Figure 18-5) indicated shimming methods used to help distribute the weight of the frame to more than one point. This procedure is common to all windows that are made with curved or sloping sill conditions. Figure 18-5 Shimming for Specially Windows Always follow the manufacturer's shop drawings and instructions, and remember: Shims placed on the diagonal may cause the window to shift. Place shims at the sill and at both opposing jambs to prevent shifting (see Figure 18-5). Never place a shim where a point load will be applied at the tip or mitered end of a product. Move the shim to where a larger bearing-surface area can support the weight of the window. Place shims at fastener locations, using the fastener to penetrate and hold the shim in position. Use caution when applying shims. Do not distort the frame or cause it to rotate. See Chapter 13, Section 13.2, for details on shimming Windows With Eyebrows Windows involving eyebrows generally require the addition of a fixed panel along the head (see Figure 18-6). This will depend on whether the intent is to replicate the existing window or not. In most cases, the window being reinstalled into the existing opening will replicate the old window, therefore special design and installation techniques will be required. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 18-4

276 Figure 18-6 Window with Eyebrows In retrofit applications, the eyebrow portion of the frame will be made up of the same contoured panning shape used at the jamb. A panel (usually backed up by insulation) will run from the top of the rectangular portion of the window frame to the head or curved section. Typically, the manufacturer will fabricate the window, and apply the panel and panning based on a set of field measurements and templates taken during the field measurement process. The installation process will involve removing the eyebrow portion of the existing frame prior to installation of the new window. Once the existing materials are removed, the installation process may begin involving pre-fitting the window into place and trimming to ensure a good fit. After the window is set in place, the normal installation procedures outlined earlier will be applicable. Notes: AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 18-5

277 AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 18-6

278 Table of Contents 19.1 Replacement Hinged and Sliding Glass Door Installation Door Installation without Accessories Checking the Opening Preparation of the Door Frame for Installation Installation of the Door Assembly Use of Fasteners at Door Hinges Installation of Door Panels (For Sliding Glass Doors) Application of the Perimeter Seal Checking Installation for Plumb, Level and Square Finishing the Exterior Allowance for Moisture Escape Finishing the Interior Cavity Insulation Apply Backer Rod (Interior) Apply Sealant (Interior) Application of Trim Covers Trim or Drywall Returns...18 This voluntary specification was developed by representative members of AAMA as advisory information and published as a public service. AAMA disclaims all liability for the use, application or adaptation of materials published herein. Copyright 2015 American Architectural Manufacturers Association 1827 Walden Office Square, Suite 550, Schaumburg, IL Phone: 847/ Fax: 847/ webmaster@aamanet.org Web Site: AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 19-I

279 19.0 Hinged And Sliding Glass Door Installation (Replacement) The installation of replacement doors in commercial construction involves jumping over the existing frame. This chapter contains guidelines for installing exterior hinged and sliding glass doors in replacement applications. Although the installation process for hinged doors is similar to the process for sliding glass doors, there are some minor variations. Where these differences occur, special precautions are noted. This chapter does not address the installation of commercial storefronts and entrances Replacement Hinged and Sliding Glass Door Installation Generally, unequal leg frame doors (see Figure 19-1a) or equal leg frame doors with applied adaptors (see Figure 19-1b) are used in commercial replacement applications. The installation process will vary depending on the type of opening, which portions of the existing frame remain, and the use of accessories for installation. This chapter only addresses the installation of doors over existing frames. For other door types, the use of subsills/receptors and other installation practices, see Chapter 20. Figure 19-1a Unequal Leg Aluminum Frame Door AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 19-1

280 Figure 19-1b Equal Leg Vinyl Frame with Applied Adaptor Door Installation without Accessories Unequal leg frame doors can be used in buildings that involve a "Surface Barrier System" or a Membrane Drainage System (The importance of locating the WRB for sealant purposes is further explained in Chapter 8, Section 8.1.3). The installation of this product type often depends on a primary sealant joint between the new door frame (or flange) and the existing door frame, along with a secondary seal between the new door frame and the existing building condition, for shedding water away from the building. In the following sections, the use of the terms door, assembly, frame and unit can be used interchangeably Checking the Opening Prior to installation, check each opening to verify conformance to the architectural drawings, specifications and the design intent. After checking the opening: AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 19-2

281 1. Check the existing framing materials to determine what materials (if any) are to be removed and which remain, ensuring the end product will match the design intent. 2. Verify the opening size to ensure a proper fit and sealant joint geometry. Check each opening to determine if it is plumb, level and square. 3. Check the construction materials, verifying that they are structurally suitable for attachment of the door assembly. 4. Determine whether flashing materials are present at the head condition. If flashing is present, make sure that the attachment at the head will not penetrate the flashing (see Figure 19-2). If flashing is present, determine where the door will be positioned to ensure that the perimeter seal is inboard of the flashing, so water drainage will occur outboard of the perimeter sealant joint. Figure 19-2 Checking Flashing at Head Condition 5. Make sure that the attachment fasteners specified for the condition will work as intended, and that the conditions are suitable for attachment. Note: As an example, if the fasteners prescribed are self-drilling masonry anchors, and the condition is not masonry but an existing steel frame, the fastener type will need to be changed for the application. Consult the manufacturer for selection of the proper fastener. 6. Determine where the door will set in the opening, and verify that the conditions allow for a suitable sealant joint (see Figure 19-3). Since the existing frame typically remains, the existing frame will dictate where the new door frame can be placed within the opening. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 19-3

282 In some cases, the existing frame will be removed at the sill condition (see Figure 19-4) and a sealant joint will be positioned between the new frame and the existing condition. In other cases, the existing door frame will remain (see Figure 19-5), and a sealant joint will be applied between the new door frame and the existing frame. Make a determination as to where the sealant joints will occur based on the conditions for each particular job. Figure 19-3 Checking Sealant Condition AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 19-4

283 Figure 19-4 Sealant Joint with Existing Condition Figure 19-5 Sealant Joint with Existing Frame Preparation of the Door Frame for Installation Once the opening has been inspected and is ready for door installation, the door assembly needs to be prepared. This includes unpacking the door and making sure it s ready for installation. Hinged door panels are typically prehung on the frame, and may require extra manpower to properly and safely lift the units into position. Sliding glass doors may need to be assembled in the field. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 19-5

284 1. Apply corner gaskets, weather-stripping and back-seal as directed by the manufacturer. 2. Attachment of the door A. If anchor clips are to be used for attachment of the door, it may be appropriate to install them prior to door installation (see Figure 19-6a). Check the project shop drawings for the clip type and location, as they will vary from job to job. Use the fasteners recommended by the manufacturer to attach the anchor clips to the door assembly. Figure 19-6 Application Anchor Clips B. If anchor straps are to be used for attachment of the door frame, it may be appropriate to install straps prior to door installation (see Figure 19-6b) AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 19-6

285 Figure 19-6b Application of Anchor Straps 3. If the frame requires the application of an extended flange, the manufacturer may require that it be applied before installation (see Figure 19-7). Check the manufacturer's installation details for more information and apply sealant as required to ensure a water tight joint. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 19-7

286 Figure 19-7 Application of Extended Flange It is recommended that door sills always be field checked for water penetration (see Chapter 7.5) prior to installation, ensuring that the sill is water tight before the door is set and anchored into position. 4. Whenever possible, dry fit the door assembly into the opening to verify the fit. Make sure to allow for a sealant joint around the entire perimeter. This will require that the installer determine the amount of shimming necessary to allow for a consistent perimeter joint of adequate width. 5. Apply any other accessories like closure channels, perimeter caulk returns and/or reinforcement channels around the perimeter of the door frame, and any hardware or stainless steel sill tracks as required on the specific job Installation of the Door Assembly Install the door assembly (the entire unit consisting of the pre-hung door leaf and frame for hinged doors, or just the frame assembly for sliding glass doors) using the following steps: 1. After checking the fit and making sure the conditions are level, the installer can pre-apply the shims to the sill condition prior to installation of the door assembly. 2. Set the door frame in place on top of the shims at the sill. Shims are to be located under any anchor clips, or at fastener locations if they occur within the door frame (see Figure 19-8). AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 19-8

287 Figure 19-8 Installation of the Door Assembly 3. Center the door assembly within the opening, allowing for a consistent joint width around the entire perimeter. 4. Place a level on the door sill to verify that the sill is level. Adjust the shims as needed to ensure a level condition. 5. Some trimming of the applied flange may be required to allow for a good fit. If trimming is necessary, remove the door, make the modifications, and check the fit again (see Figure 19-9). If the applied flange is adjustable (see Figure 19-10), adjustments may be possible both before and after the installation of the frame. Figure 19-9 Modification of Flange for Fit AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 19-9

288 Figure Adjustment of Flange for Fit 6. Once the door assembly is positioned in the opening, attach the frame to temporarily secure it in place. Apply shims as needed at the head directly in line with the anchor clips. Attach the fasteners just tight enough to secure the assembly in position, yet allowing for adjustment in the next step. 7. Check the head, sill and jambs with a level again to make sure the assembly is setting plumb, level and square within the opening. Measure across the diagonals to determine if the door assembly is square. If the assembly is not square, make adjustments until it is. 8. Add shims and fasteners as required at the remaining anchor points. Add anchors directly at the lock and hinge locations (see Figures 19-11a and 19-11b), in accordance with the manufacturer s installation instructions. Be sure to fully block behind locking points and hinges to help carry any loads directly to the condition. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 19-10

289 Figure 19-11a Attachment at Hinge/Lock Locations Figure 19-11b Attachment at Hinge Location (Vinyl Door) 9. Tighten up each fastener around the perimeter until you reach a plumb, level and square installation. Be careful not to over tighten the fasteners in such a way that the frame is distorted Use of Fasteners at Door Hinges 1. For hinge doors with butt hinges, complete the installation using the following steps: Remove one screw from each of the hinges along the jamb side of the frame (see Figure 19-11). Apply a new screw of an appropriate length (as may be specified per code) through each hinge directly into the existing frame. This will help transfer the weight of the door directly to the structure. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 19-11

290 Close the door and check the fit between the locking jamb and the door edge. Check the reveal around the door perimeter. If the reveal is equal the fit is good. If not, adjust according to manufacturer s instructions. 2. For hinge doors with flag hinges, an appropriate screw needs to be secure the frame at each hinge location Installation of Door Panels (For Sliding Glass Doors) After installation of the door assembly, the door panels (fixed or operable) can be installed. 1. Install sliding door panels starting with the outboard panel (generally the fixed panel). To install the panel, use the following steps: Raise the panel up and rotate the top out slightly towards the exterior. Insert the top of the door panel into the exterior track in the head (see Figure 19-12). Note: The location of the operable panel(s) on sliding glass doors may be on the inboard or outboard side, depending on the manufacturer. Always check the manufacturer's installation instructions for clarification and alternate these steps accordingly. Figure Installing the Fixed Door Panel Rotate the bottom of the panel out toward the exterior, placing it over the exterior sill track. Lower the door panel into position on the sill track. Shift the fixed panel over to the fixed jamb, but don t attach it until after the operable panel has been installed and all adjustments have been made. After the operable panel is installed in the next step, lock the operable panel and then shift the fixed panel into place, checking the interlock for proper overlap. Recheck the reveal between fixed panel and fixed jamb to make sure the door is square in opening and proper overlaps are maintained. 3. Install the inboard panel (generally operable) using the following steps: AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 19-12

291 Raise the panel up and position the panel off-center such that the operable interlocking rail clears the fixed panel interlock. Insert the top of the door panel into the interior track at the head (see Figure 19-13). Rotate the bottom of the panel out toward the fixed panel, and lower the panel into position setting the bottom on the sliding door track. Figure Installing the Operable Door Panel Check the operable panel to ensure that it operates properly, and that the reveal is equal between the operable door panel and frame. Turn adjustment screws on the roller assembly to adjust the height of the panel following the manufacturer s instructions. Apply any door stops, anti-lift devices and/or air stops that are provided to restrict door movement and air flow. Once all panels are fully adjusted, the final attachment of the fixed sash to the frame can be completed. Attach the fixed panel using the retainer clips and screws provided by the manufacturer. After final assembly, cover over the exposed clip with any remaining trim Application of the Perimeter Seal Once the door assembly is securely attached in position, the installation is ready for the perimeter sealant application. 1. Apply the perimeter joint from the exterior side. 2. Make sure the conditions are clean, dry and suitable for sealant application. Remove any loose debris and wipe any dirt or dust off from the condition and the door assembly. 3. Apply primer to the perimeter condition and to the door framing as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Use only the primer recommended for the application Do not apply primer to the backer rod, if present. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 19-13

292 Do not apply an excessive amount of primer. 4. Apply an appropriate size backer rod (or bond breaker for fillet joints) around the entire perimeter. Use a blunt probe or roller to install the backer rod (see Figure 19-14). Do not puncture the rod as this may release gases that can affect the perimeter seal. Make sure to insert the rod at the correct depth so that the joint can be properly filled with sealant. Figure Application of Backer Rod and Sealant 5. Once the joint is ready, apply the perimeter sealant. Start at one corner and push the sealant into the joint. Pushing, as opposed to pulling, the sealant ensures that the joint is filled with sealant and that the amount of air left behind the joint is minimal. Fill the joint completely around the entire perimeter, making sure to apply a continuous perimeter seal. 6. Once the joint is sealed, tool the sealant joint to remove any remaining air pockets, promote good adhesion and create a smooth joint of the proper depth and geometry. 7. Clean any excess sealant off the condition and the door frame. Double check the entire joint, making sure there are no voids left in the seal. 8. After installation of the sealant joint, recheck the operation of the door panel to ensure proper operation and contact with the weather stripping. 9. Follow the guidelines for finishing the interior as prescribed in Section Checking Installation for Plumb, Level and Square Regardless of the installation practice used, all doors and accessories shall be installed plumb, level and square within the opening. The following illustrations show how to check the door assembly to ensure it is properly installed. For All Door Types 1. Check the door assembly to ensure it is set plumb, level and square in the opening (see Figure and 19-16) using the following tips: Make sure the door sill is level and not bowed or uneven. Install shims behind the jamb 4" to 6" from the sill and header. Adjust shims until the frame is square (diagonal measurements are within tolerance, based the door size). AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 19-14

293 Plumb the frame and check for true (not racked) by using strings stretched from each corner to the opposing corner. Note: If the strings just barely touch, the unit is not racked out of alignment. If the strings are touching, reverse the strings to determine if the unit is racked. Figure Check for Plumb, Level and Square Figure Check for True (Racking) For All Hinged Door Open the operable panel(s) and remove any shipping spacers. Adjust the shims, and move the top of one or both sides of the frame slightly in, out or horizontally, until the following conditions are achieved: 1. The top of each panel is parallel to the frame at the head (the margin is even across the top of the door). The operable panel(s) makes even contact with the weatherstripping. The jambs are within 1/16" of being straight. The door operates properly and it remains stationary in any open position. 2. Install lockset(s) if not already in place. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 19-15

294 3. Verify that the jambs are shimmed properly as follows: On each side there should be at least three shims, with shims installed behind each hinge (when hinged at the jamb). Place shims behind the jamb strike plate. On the top, install at least three shims (within 4" to 6" of each corner, and at the center mullion position), except when directed not to do so by the manufacturer. 4. Secure the shims at hinge and strike locations with a long screw that penetrates the structural framing. One hole in each hinge may have been left open for this step. If not, remove one standard screw and install a screw of an appropriate length (sometimes dictated by code) through the hole in the hinge, directly into the jamb condition. When installing the long screws, take care not to pull the frame out of square. 5. For units with multiple jamb-hinged panels, also shim and secure hinges on the inactive side. 6. Close the panel(s). Then re-check the margins between the panel(s) and the jamb, and between the panels of a two-panel unit. Adjust the shims as needed to maintain margins that are equal from top to bottom. Make sure panels remain aligned (tops even with each other). On Two-Panel Hinged Glass Doors Make sure the following is achieved: 1. Both panels are in the same plane. 2. The top corners of the panel locking stiles are aligned and flush with each other, and the margin between locking stiles is even from top to bottom. For Sliding Glass Doors Open the operable panel and check the fit, adjusting the rollers as needed, until the following is achieved: 1. Check the interlock to determine if the overlap is the same from top to bottom. Open each operable sash until it just clears the jamb, and check the gap. It will be even along the vertical edge of the interlock if the door panel is square. If the door panel is not square, remove the panel to reduce the weight, and adjust the rollers prior to placing the panel back into the door frame. Continue to check and adjust until the panel is square in the frame. Make sure operable sliders are fully blocked and supported at the locking points so that if the sash is slammed shut, the frame will resist damage. 2. Operate the door panel and check for a smooth operation. If the door does not move freely, check the sill track for debris, and clean as needed Finishing the Exterior The following guidelines are provided in addition to the instructions outlined in the previous sections regarding finishing the exterior. These instructions relate to the application of a perimeter seal. 1. Select a backer rod with a diameter approximately 30% larger than the nominal width of the joint. (Rule of thumb: rod diameter at least 1/8" greater than joint width.) 2. Joint primer shall not be applied to the backer rod. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 19-16

295 3. Backer rod should be inserted into the joint using a blunt probe or roller. Do not puncture, fold or crease the backer rod as that could cause emission of gas and bubbling of the sealant. 4. Push the sealant into the joint over backer rod in a continuous manner. 5. Tool the sealant bead so that it is an even, unbroken seal, sufficient to fill the gap between the door unit and the rough opening. Always follow manufacturer's instructions. (For detailed information on sealants, see Chapter 13, Section 13.5.) Remember, there are five basic steps for proper joint preparation and sealant application for doors: 1. CLEAN Joint surfaces must be clean, dry, dust free and frost free. 2. PRIME If required, primer is applied to the clean surface(s). 3. PACK Install backer rod or bond breaker as required. 4. SHOOT Sealant is applied by "pushing the bead" into the joint cavity. 5. TOOL Dry tooling techniques are used to strike a flush joint and make certain the sealant has the proper configuration and fully contacts the joint walls Allowance for Moisture Escape Most doors are manufactured with weep holes to allow moisture to escape. Never cover these weep holes with sealant, paint or any other obstructive material. Remove any construction debris from the drainage path to ensure proper drainage Finishing the Interior Cavity Insulation Whenever possible, place insulation in the cavity between the new door assembly/receptor and the building components. 1. Use fiber insulation (fiberglass batt insulation) or low pressure expanding foam (see Chapter 13, Section ). Follow the manufacturer's guidelines. Exception: Insulation is not required in small openings if they can be completely filled with sealant (see Chapter 13, Section 13.5 for sealant information) Apply Backer Rod (Interior) Like the exterior, place backer rod over cavity insulation on the interior side of the door to control sealant width and depth Apply Sealant (Interior) On the interior of the door where an exposed joint occurs (or where required per the contract drawings), place sealant over the backer rod in a continuous manner. The sealant bead shall be even, unbroken, and fill the gap between the door unit and the rough opening. For detailed information on sealants, see Chapter 13, Section Application of Trim Covers Once any insulation and/or sealant have been applied, the finished trim covers can be snapped over the trim clips that were used to anchor the door in place. Check the manufacturer's instructions to determine which trim cover runs through to ensure the correct cut size and fit. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 19-17

296 Trim or Drywall Returns Buildings often involve cavities within the wall system. These cavities may introduce air at the joint between the interior-most surface of the window and the building condition. This air must be controlled in order to help reduce air infiltration and energy consumption. If there are no open-air passages, the blockage of air becomes secondary, and the interior seal between the drywall and the door assembly becomes a cosmetic joint. If the dry wall is intended to be a component of the air barrier system, the drywall J-channel shall be sealed to the door assembly (see Figure 19-17). This may or may not be a part of the installer's contract. Figure Trim and Drywall Returns 1. The responsible party should coordinate the installation of the drywall and the J-channel when abutting against the door frame/accessory. Do not attach J-channels to the door assembly or receptor unless otherwise approved by the door manufacturer. 2. It is preferable that a 1/4 wide joint be left to allow for movement of the door assembly due to wind load and/or live load movement. If a properly sized joint is not left, cracking of the drywall may occur, or the sealant may tear, requiring future maintenance. 3. If the door assembly is installed toward the outside of the wall assembly, a drywall J-channel return shall be installed in the recess, and the joint between the face of the door frame and the drywall J-channel shall be sealed. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 19-18

297 Notes: AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 19-19

298 Table of Contents 20.1 Hinged and Sliding Glass Door Installation Door Installation without Receptor System Checking the Opening Preparation of the Door Frame for Installation Installation of the Door Assembly Use of Fasteners at Door Hinges Installation of Door Panels (for Sliding Glass Doors) Application of the Perimeter Seal Door Installations With A Receptor System Preparation of the Receptor System Prior to Door Installation Installation of the Receptor System Prior to Door Installation Application of the Perimeter Seal When Using Receptor Systems Preparation of the Door Assembly for Installation with Receptor Systems Installation of the Door Assembly in Openings with Receptor Systems Multiple Door Installations With Receptor Systems Preparation of the Receptor System for Multiple Door Applications in a Single Opening Installation of Receptor Systems in Multiple Door Applications Installation of Doors in Multiple Door Applications Installation of Independent Structural Mullions Installation of Door Assembly with Transom Panels Above...37 This voluntary specification was developed by representative members of AAMA as advisory information and published as a public service. AAMA disclaims all liability for the use, application or adaptation of materials published herein. Copyright 2015 American Architectural Manufacturers Association 1827 Walden Office Square, Suite 550, Schaumburg, IL Phone: 847/ Fax: 847/ webmaster@aamanet.org Web Site: AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 20-I

299 Horizontal Stack Mullions Installed Prior to Door Installation Horizontal Stack Mullions Installed After Door Installation Checking Installation for Plumb, Level and Square Finishing the Exterior Allowance for Moisture Escape Finishing the Interior Cavity Insulation Apply Backer Rod (Interior) Apply Sealant (Interior) Trim or Drywall Returns...43 AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 20-II

300 20.0 Hinged and Sliding Glass Door Installation (New Construction) This chapter contains basic guidelines for installing equal leg frame exterior hinged and sliding glass doors in new construction. Although the installation process for hinged and sliding glass doors is very similar, there are some minor variations for each. Where these differences occur, special precautions are noted. This chapter does not address the installation of commercial storefront and entrances Hinged and Sliding Glass Door Installation Generally, equal leg frame doors (see Figures 20-1a and 20-1b) are the only classification of frame types used in both metal and vinyl commercial new construction. The installation process will vary depending on the type of opening and the use of accessories for installation. This chapter covers door frames that are shipped assembled, frames that are assembled in the field, and sidelites and transoms that are mulled together in the field. Figure 20-1a Equal Leg Frame Door AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 20-1

301 Figure 20-1b Equal Leg Frame Vinyl Door Door Installation without Receptor System Equal leg frame doors can be used in buildings that involve a "Surface Barrier System" or a Membrane Drainage System (see Chapter 8, Section 8.1.3). Regardless, the installation of this product type depends on a sealant joint between the door (or receptor) and the exterior building surface, for shedding water away from the building. For equal leg frame installations without the use of receptor systems, use the installation procedures in Section When installing equal leg frame doors in applications that require receptors and subsills, follow the installation practices outlined in Section In the following sections, the use of the terms door, assembly, frame and unit can be used interchangeably Checking the Opening Prior to installation, check each opening to verify conformance to the architectural drawings, specifications and the design intent. After checking the opening: 1. Verify the opening size to ensure a proper fit and joint geometry. Check each opening to determine if it is plumb, level and square. 2. Check the construction materials, verifying that they are structurally suitable for attachment of the door assembly. 3. Determine whether flashing materials are present at the head condition. If flashing is present, make sure that the attachment at the head will not penetrate the flashing (see Figure 20-2). AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 20-2

302 Figure 20-2 Checking Flashing at Head Condition If flashing is present, determine where the door will be positioned to ensure that the perimeter seal is inboard of the flashing so water drainage will occur outboard of the perimeter sealant joint. 4. Make sure that the attachment fasteners specified for the condition will work as intended and that the conditions are suitable for attachment. Note: As an example, if the fasteners prescribed are self-drilling masonry anchors and the condition is not masonry but steel stud, the fastener type will need to be changed for the application. Consult the fastener manufacturer for selection of the proper fastener. 5. Determine where the door will set in the opening and verify that the conditions allow for a suitable sealant joint (see Figure 20-3). AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 20-3

303 Figure 20-3 Checking Sealant Condition Some conditions, such as brick veneer walls, will incorporate an air space or cavity which will dictate where the frame will be placed to ensure proper joint back up. In some cases, mortar is used at the sill as a setting bed in lieu of a sealant bead (see Figure 20-4a and 20-4b). Check the opening to determine whether the sill condition is level and how much mortar needs to be applied under the door to prepare it for installation. When setting the door assembly in mortar, make sure to first apply a protective coating of bituminous paint (and/or other suitable material) to the underside of the sill extrusion. Note: Setting a door in a bed of mortar is only recommended in recessed sill conditions. Figure 20-4a Recessed Sill Condition in Aluminum AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 20-4

304 Figure 20-4b Recessed Sill Condition in Vinyl Depending on the location of the frame relative to the interior conditions, the location of the frame may require interior trim and/or jamb extensions to finish off the interior Preparation of the Door Frame for Installation Once the opening has been inspected and is ready for door installation, the door assembly needs to be prepared. This includes unpacking the door and making sure it s ready for installation. Hinged door panels are typically prehung on the frame and may require extra manpower to properly and safely lift the units into position. Sliding glass doors may need to be assembled in the field. 1. Apply corner gaskets, fasteners, weatherstripping and back-seal as directed by the manufacturer. 2. If anchor clips or straps are to be used for attachment of the door, it may be appropriate to attach them to the door prior to installation (see Figure 20-5a and 20-5b). Check the project shop drawings for the clip type and location, as they will vary from job to job. Use the fasteners recommended by the manufacturer to attach the anchor clips to the door assembly. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 20-5

305 Figure 20-5a Attachment of Anchor Clips to Aluminum Frame Figure 20-5b Attachment of Anchor Straps to Vinyl Frame 3. Starter sills may also be required under the door to help facilitate anchorage (see Figure 20-6a and 20-6b). Check the project shop drawings to determine if starter sills are required. Also, refer to Section 20.2 for the installation of doors with accessories. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 20-6

306 Figure 20-6a Application of Starter Sill Figure 20-6b Application of Starter Sill AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 20-7

307 4. It is recommended that door sills and subsills always be field checked for water penetration (see Chapter 7.5) prior to sill installation, ensuring that the sill is water tight before the door is set and anchored into position. 5. Whenever possible, dry fit the door assembly into the opening to verify the fit. Make sure to allow for a sealant joint around the entire perimeter. This will require that the installer determine the amount of shimming necessary to allow for a consistent perimeter joint of adequate width. 6. Apply any other accessories like closure channels, perimeter caulk sealant returns, and/or reinforcement channels around the perimeter of the door frame, and any hardware or stainless steel sill tracks as required on the specific job. 7. If mortar is used to level the door frame, apply the mortar just prior to installing the frame. Make sure to completely fill the void (see Figure 20-7). Figure 20-7 Bed of Mortar in Recessed Sill Condition When setting the door assembly in mortar, make sure to first apply a coating of bituminous paint to the underside of the sill extrusion. Check the height of the sill in the mortar bed to determine it is at the correct height for the door installation and that it is level Installation of the Door Assembly Install the door assembly (the entire unit consisting of the pre-hung door leaf and frame for hinged doors, or just the frame assembly for sliding glass doors) using the following steps: 1. After checking the fit and making sure the conditions are level, the installer can pre-apply the shims to the sill condition prior to installation of the door assembly. 2. Set the door frame in place on top of the shims at the sill. Shims are to be located under any anchor clips, or at fastener locations if they occur within the door frame (see Figure 20-8). AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 20-8

308 Figure 20-8 Installation of the Door Assembly 3. When setting the door assembly directly into a bed of mortar, shims will not be used. In this case, apply pressure to the sill extrusion to seat the assembly. Check the height of the sill in the mortar bed to determine it is at the correct height for the door installation and that it is level. 4. Center the door assembly within the opening, allowing for a consistent joint width around the entire perimeter. 5. Place a level on the door sill to verify that the sill is level. Adjust the shims as needed to ensure a level condition. 6. Once the door assembly is positioned in the opening, attach the frame to temporarily secure it in place. Apply shims as needed at the head directly in line with the anchor clips. Attach the fasteners just tight enough to secure the assembly in position, yet allow for adjustment in the next step. 7. Check the head, sill and jambs with a level again to make sure the assembly is setting plumb, level and square within the opening. Measure across the diagonals to determine if the door assembly is square. If the assembly is not square, make adjustments until it is. 8. Add shims and fasteners as required at the remaining anchor points. Add anchors directly at the lock and hinge locations (see Figure 20-9a and 20-9b), according to the manufacturer s installation instructions. Be sure to fully block behind locking points and hinges to help carry any loads directly to the condition. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 20-9

309 Figure 20-9a Attachment at Hinge/Lock Locations AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 20-10

310 Figure 20-9b Attachment at Hinge/Lock Locations 9. Tighten up each fastener around the perimeter until you reach a plumb, level and square installation. Be careful not to over tighten the fasteners in such a way that you distort the frame Use of Fasteners at Door Hinges 1. For hinge doors with butt hinges, complete the installation using the following steps: Remove one screw from each of the hinges along the jamb side of the frame (see Figure 20-9). Apply a new screw of an appropriate length (as may be specified per code) through each hinge directly into the building condition. This will help transfer the weight of the door directly to the structure. Close the door and check the fit between the locking jamb and the door edge. Check the reveal around the door perimeter. If the reveal is equal, the fit is good; if not, adjust attachment screws as needed Installation of Door Panels (for Sliding Glass Doors) After installation of the door assembly, the door panels (fixed or operable) can be installed. 1. Install sliding door panels starting with the outboard panel (generally, the fixed panel). To install the panel, use the following steps: AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 20-11

311 Raise the panel up and rotate the top out slightly towards the exterior. Insert the top of the door panel into the exterior track in the head (see Figure 20-10). Note: The location of the operable panel(s) on sliding glass doors may be on the inboard or outboard side depending on the manufacturer. Always check the manufacturer's installation instructions for clarification and alternate these steps accordingly. Figure Installing the Fixed Door Panel Rotate the bottom of the panel out toward the exterior, placing it over the exterior sill track. Lower the door panel into position on the sill track. Shift the fixed panel over to the fixed jamb but don t attach until after the operable panel has been installed and all adjustments have been made. After the operable panel is installed in the next step, lock the operable panel and then shift the fixed panel into place checking the interlock for proper overlap. Recheck the reveal between fixed panel and fixed jamb to make sure door is square in opening and proper overlaps are maintained. 2. Install the inboard panel (generally operable) using the following steps: Raise the panel up and position the panel off-center such that the operable interlocking rail clears the fixed panel interlock. Insert the top of the door panel into the interior track at the head (see Figure 20-11). Rotate the bottom of the panel out toward the fixed panel, and lower the panel into position, setting the bottom on the sliding door track. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 20-12

312 Figure Installing the Operable Door Panel Check the operable panel to ensure that it operates properly, and that the reveal is equal between the operable door panel and frame. Turn adjustment screws on the roller assembly to adjust the height of the panel following the manufacturer s instructions. Apply any door stops, anti-lift devices and/or air stops that are provided to restrict door movement and air flow. Once all panels are fully adjusted, the final attachment of the fixed sash to the frame can be completed. Attach the fixed panel using the retainer clips and screws provided by the manufacturer. After final assembly, cover over the exposed clip with any remaining trim Application of the Perimeter Seal Once the door assembly is securely attached in position, the installation is ready for the perimeter sealant application. 1. Apply Seal the perimeter joint from the exterior side working from the balcony or floor. 2. Make sure the conditions are clean, dry and suitable for sealant application. Remove any loose debris and wipe any dirt or dust off from the condition and the door assembly. 3. Apply primer to the perimeter condition and to the door framing as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Use only the primer recommended for the application. Do not apply primer to the backer rod, if present. Do not apply an excessive amount of primer. 4. Apply an appropriate size backer rod around the entire perimeter. Use a blunt probe or roller to install the backer rod (see Figure 20-12). Do not puncture the rod as this may release gases that can affect the perimeter seal. Make sure to insert the rod at the correct depth so that the joint can be properly filled with sealant. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 20-13

313 Figure Application of Backer Rod and Sealant 5. Once the joint is ready, apply the a compatible perimeter sealant. Start at one corner and push the sealant into the joint. Pushing, as opposed to pulling the sealant ensures that the joint is filled with sealant, and that the amount of air left behind the joint is minimal. Fill the joint completely around the entire perimeter, making sure to apply a continuous perimeter seal. 6. Once the joint is sealed, tool the sealant joint to remove any remaining air pockets, promote good adhesion and create a smooth sealant joint of the proper depth and geometry. 7. Clean any excess sealant off the condition and the door frame. Double check the entire joint, making sure there are no voids left in the seal. 8. After installation of the sealant joint, recheck the operation of the door panel to ensure proper operation and contact with the weather stripping. 9. Follow the guidelines for finishing the interior as prescribed in Section Door Installations With A Receptor System The installation of equal leg frame doors often incorporates to the use of receptors and subsills. The methods outlined in the following sections describe the installation of receptors and sub sills prior to the installation of the door assembly Preparation of the Receptor System Prior to Door Installation Prior to installation of the door assembly, check each opening to verify conformance to the architectural drawings, specifications and the design intent. The installer shall: 1. Verify the opening size to ensure a proper fit and joint geometry. Check each opening to determine if it is plumb, level and square. 2. Check the construction materials, verifying that they are structurally suitable for attachment. 3. Determine whether flashing materials are present at the head condition. If flashing is present, make sure that the attachment of the receptor at the head will not penetrate the flashing. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 20-14

314 If flashing is present, determine where the receptor will be positioned to ensure that the perimeter seal is inboard of the flashing so water drainage will occur outboard the perimeter joint at the head receptor (see Figure 20-13). Figure Checking Flashing at Head Condition 4. Make sure that the attachment fasteners specified for the condition will work as intended, and that the conditions are suitable for attachment. Manufacturers may supply slots in their framing which are designed to be structurally adequate for the fastener and anchor loads expected. Do not slot the framing or enlarge holes or slots provided by the manufacturer without consulting the manufacturer or a licensed professional engineer. Note: As an example, if the fasteners prescribed are self-drilling masonry anchors and the condition is not masonry but steel stud, the fastener type will need to be changed for the application. 5. Distribute the receptor system to the corresponding openings. Receptor systems are often shipped in bundles and may be marked to correspond with the opening. 6. Check the receptor/subsill to determine if any field assembly or fabrication is required. Some accessories will require field cutting, drilling and the application of end dams, gaskets, anchor clips, etc. If cutting is required, check the project shop drawings to ensure a proper fit. As an example, if subsills are used, the cut size may be dictated by the shop drawings so the door assembly can be installed without interference. When cutting subsills to length, the installer will be required to apply the end dams after any gaskets have been applied as indicated in step #7 (see Figure 20-14). In cases where the subsill is cut to length, the end dams and gaskets may already be applied. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 20-15

315 Figure Application of End Dams When applying end dams, make sure to clean off the ends of both the subsill and the end dam with appropriate solvent to ensure a good seal. After applying solvent, immediately dry off the material; do not allow the solvent to air dry on the material. Note: It is critical that this step not be overlooked as oil, grease and dirt deposited during the manufacturing process can have a detrimental effect on the adhesion capability of the sealant. Apply and seal the end dams as directed by the manufacturer. Be sure to seal the joint between the end dam and the subsill, and then tool the sealant to promote good adhesion and remove air bubbles. 7. Check the receptors and subsill for grooves, which may require the installation of gaskets (see Figure 20-15). If required, use the following steps before applying end dams: Prior to installing the gaskets, remove the material from the roll and allow it to relax. Don't stretch the gaskets. Cut the gasket long enough to allow for crowd-in, or compress it so that if it shrinks, it won't be too short. (Example: Some gaskets are cut 1/4 per foot longer than the extrusion length.) Check with the gasket and/or window manufacturer to determine cutting requirements. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 20-16

316 Figure Application of Gaskets 8. Drill the receptor system as indicated on the shop drawings. Make sure to drill the hole sizes and locations according to the drawings and/or any job calculations. Receptors may require expansion slots, and subsills may require slip anchors to allow for expansion and contraction. Check the installation instructions when locating fixed points and expansion points, and make sure to follow the recommended procedures for attachment of the receptor system to the substrate. Note: When applying fasteners in an expansion slot, it is generally recommended that the fastener be positioned in the center of the slot (see Figure 20-16). Check the shop drawings for specific instructions. Figure Attachment of Fasteners through Slots 9. If anchor clips are to be applied to the receptor or subsill, attach them now in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions (see Figure 20-17). Always use the fasteners specified by the manufacturer. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 20-17

317 Figure 20-7 Attach Anchor Clips 10. Determine where the receptor system will set in the opening and verify that the conditions allow for a suitable sealant joint. Some conditions, such as brick veneer walls, will incorporate an air space or cavity, which will dictate where the receptor system will be placed to ensure the proper sealant joint back up. Depending on the location of the receptor system relative to the interior conditions, interior trim and/or jamb extensions may be required to finish off the interior Installation of the Receptor System Prior to Door Installation When the opening has been inspected and the receptor system has been properly prepared in accordance with Section , the installation of the receptor system may begin. In some cases, the subsill will be installed first, followed by the head and jamb receptor. In other cases, the head and jamb receptor will be installed first, followed by the subsill. The job conditions and the design of the subsill/receptor (whether the jamb receptor is designed to be the termination point for the subsill, or whether the subsill is designed to be the termination point for the jamb receptor) will be the determining factors in how the junction is accomplished. Regardless of the design for the specific job condition, the following steps can be altered in sequence to allow for these variations. 1. Start by placing a level at the sill condition. Determine if the sill is level and how much shimming will be necessary to allow for the proper joint size. Check the shop drawings to determine the amount of shimming necessary to allow for normal field tolerances, and the proper overlap between the door assembly and the receptor. Depending on the live load and dead load design criteria for the project, the amount of overlap between the receptor and the door assembly is critical. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 20-18

318 A story pole will generally be helpful to determine if enough clearance will remain to allow for the installation of the receptor and the door assembly (see Figure 20-18). Figure Checking the Opening for Proper Fit If the minimum clearance shown on the shop drawings is not enough to allow for proper installation of the receptor and door assembly, some adjustment in the shim height may be necessary. 2. Set and shim the subsill within the opening. Place a level in the subsill and check to ensure it is level. Adjust the shims as needed to create a level condition. Note: For water performance and drainage, it is critical that all subsills be set level because the application of the receptor and the door frame will follow. If the subsill is not set level, there is a good chance that the receptors and the door will not be set level. 3. Attach the subsill into position. Make sure to set the subsill straight within the opening. Attach through the subsill or through anchor clips according to the job specific application. 4. If applying fasteners through the subsill: Make sure to clean the subsill and fastener head/washers/nut prior to the application of the a compatible sealant in order to promote good contact and adhesion. Be sure to first pump sealant into the hole and on top of the surface the fastener will penetrate. Next, apply the fastener, any washers and the nut as required. Finally, seal over the fastener/nut and washer assembly, making sure to fully encapsulate the assembly. Once the joint is sealed, tool the sealant joint to remove any remaining air pockets, promote good adhesion and create a smooth sealant joint of the proper depth and geometry. 5. Continue to make adjustments as required, re-checking and verifying that the minimum/maximum overlap requirements between the door assembly and the receptor system are maintained (see Figure 20-18). AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 20-19

319 6. Once the subsill is set, apply a sealant bead between the end dam and the building condition. It is often necessary to apply a backer rod into the joint to control the amount of sealant used (see Figure 20-19). If the jamb receptor is going to be the termination point for the subsill, skip to Steps #8 & #9, then come back to Step #7. Figure Sealing the Subsill End Dam to the Jamb Condition 7. Tool the sealant against the jamb condition, creating a wash that will allow any residual water that gets behind the receptor to drain into the subsill. If the subsill is set after the jamb receptor, seal the joint between the end cap and the jamb receptor, creating a wash to divert water into the subsill (see Figure 20-20). Figure Sealing the Subsill End Dam to the Jamb Receptor AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 20-20

320 8. After installation of the subsill, the head receptor can be installed. Install the head receptor directly in line with the subsill. First, check the specific type of receptor to determine if a foam block or back-up plate will be required to support the sealant joint at the ends of the receptor where the perimeter joint will occur (see Figure 20-21). Figure Plugging the Ends of the Receptor If a foam block is used, install it in place and seal over the ends to essentially create an end plug. If a back-up plate is used, it may be applied prior to installation of the head receptor, or it may be applied after the head and jamb receptors are in place. Check the manufacturer's instructions for specific details. Use a laser or level to line up the head receptor with the subsill below. Check the drawings to understand the relationship between where the door head will set within the receptor, and where the door sill will set within the subsill. The proper relationship will only occur when the door assembly is plumb within the opening after the accessories are installed (see Figure 20-22). AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 20-21

321 Figure Understanding the Relationship between the Head/Jamb Receptors and Subsill Shim and attach the head receptor to the head condition using the fasteners specified for the condition. Make sure to shim the head receptor so that it is level both along its length and from front to back (not rolled) within the opening. The installer is encouraged to use a story pole or a piece of the jamb receptor to line up the head with the sill, and to determine the exact height location of the head receptor. Fasten the head receptor in place by tightening the fasteners snug, yet still allowing for further adjustment as needed. Make sure the fasteners at the head will not interfere with the installation of the door assembly. 9. Once the head receptor and subsill are in place, the jamb receptors can be installed. If the previous steps were used, the installation of the jamb receptors will be relatively easy. The jamb receptor should easily fit between the bottom outside leg of the head receptor and the top outside surface of the subsill, but will depend on the specific application (see Figure 20-23). AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 20-22

322 Figure Installation of Jamb Receptor In cases where extreme movement is expected, a sealant joint may be required between the head and jamb receptors. In this case, use a back-up splice plate with bond breaker applied to the exterior face to bridge the gap and back up the joint (see Figure 20-24). Figure Splice between Jamb and Head Receptors at Moving Joints Set the jamb receptor within the opening. Shim and fasten with the appropriate fasteners. Add blocking behind the receptor at locking points and at hinge points on swing and sliding glass doors. This support blocking may also be needed at the head condition directly above the meeting rail of a sliding glass door. Re-check the opening to verify that the door will set into a plumb, level and square condition. If adjustments are needed, make them now. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 20-23

323 10. Insert splice sleeve, bond breaker tape and/or silicone splice sheet as required for joint backup at head/jamb receptor intersection. Back seal all joints between the head receptor and the jamb receptor, and the jamb receptor to the subsill. Tool the sealant to ensure good contact and adhesion. 11. Prior to door installation, check the subsill for any debris. Clean out any debris that will block the weep holes or keep the subsill from draining. A method of field checking the water integrity of the subsill can be used by the installer to ensure it is water tight. This simple field test method will reduce the expensive call backs associated with water penetration at the subsill. - Use a suitable tape to cover over the weep holes. - Fill the subsill with water and mark the high water point. - Leave the water in the subsill for at least fifteen minutes; if no water leakage is evident, the subsill is considered water tight. - If leakage occurs, pinpoint the place of escape, drain the water from the subsill, then reseal the point of leakage when the conditions are dry. - If leakage was detected after corrective actions, repeat the test to be sure the problem has been corrected. After checking the subsill for water penetration, make sure to remove the tape so the subsill can drain freely later Application of the Perimeter Seal When Using Receptor Systems Once the receptor system is securely attached in position, the installation is ready for the perimeter sealant application. 1. Make sure the conditions are clean, dry and suitable for sealant application. Remove any loose debris and wipe any dirt or dust off from the condition and the perimeter accessories. 2. Apply primer to the perimeter condition and to the accessories as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Use only the primer recommended for the application. Do not apply primer to the backer rod, if present. Do not apply an excessive amount of primer. 3. Apply an appropriate size backer rod around the entire perimeter. Use a blunt probe or roller to install the backer rod. Do not puncture the rod as this may release gases that can affect the perimeter seal. Make sure to insert the rod at the correct depth so that the joint can be properly filled with sealant. 4. Once the joint is ready, apply the perimeter sealant. Start at one corner and push the sealant into the joint (see Figure 20-25). Pushing, as opposed to pulling, the sealant ensures that the joint is filled with sealant and that the amount of air left behind the joint is minimal. Fill the joint completely around the entire perimeter, making sure to apply a continuous perimeter seal. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 20-24

324 Figure Perimeter Seal Application 5. Once the joint is sealed, tool the sealant joint to remove any remaining air pockets, promote good adhesion and create a smooth joint of the proper depth and geometry. 6. Clean any excess sealant off the condition and the accessories. Double check the entire joint, making sure there are no voids left in the seal Preparation of the Door Assembly for Installation with Receptor Systems Once the accessories have been installed and sealed to the opening, the installer can prepare for door installation. See Section for instructions relating to the preparation of the door for installation. Some projects will require jamb reinforcement channels in the jambs of the door frames for added strength. Check the requirements for the job and apply reinforcement channels as directed, making sure they are the right size and in the right location (see Figure 20-26). Figure Application of Reinforcement Channel AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 20-25

325 Whenever possible, dry fit the door into the opening to verify the fit. Check the amount of overlap between the head and jamb receptor and the door frame, making sure it is consistent and according to the design intent. If the fit is good, the installer can remove the door and proceed with the following steps for door installation Installation of the Door Assembly in Openings with Receptor Systems Install the door assembly using the following steps: 1. After checking the fit and making sure the conditions are level, the installer can prepare for installation of the door. In some cases, the installation will require a bead of sealant applied to the upturned leg of the subsill. Follow the manufacturer s instructions. In other cases, a gasket is used as the air/water seal between the subsill and the door assembly. Depending on the design of the subsill, this gasket was either previously applied in the groove, or will be applied after door installation. 2. The installer may also be required to apply a bead of sealant to the head/jamb receptor prior to the installation of the door. Check the drawings to determine the design intent, and apply the bead as directed (see Figure 20-27). Figure Sealing the Receptor or Subsill 3. The opening is now ready for the door assembly installation. Position the door as close to the opening as possible. Lift the door assembly and rotate the bottom out while holding the head inboard. 4. Before setting the door in place, try to get the door centered in the opening as much as possible. This is especially critical if sealant was applied at the subsill or receptor, to avoid scraping the sealant off when moving the door from side to side. 5. Set the door assembly in place, positioning the bottom of the door on top of the subsill. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 20-26

326 When setting the door assembly in place, use caution that the bottom edge of the frame is not rubbed against the exterior gasket at the jambs or head receptor. Doing so may pull the gasket out of the gasket pocket (see Figure 20-28). Figure Verify Gasket is Secure 6. Rotate the head up and push it out toward the exterior until it hits the head receptor. 7. Check the location of the door, making sure it is centered in the opening, allowing for a consistent overlap around the entire perimeter. Double check the gasket, making sure the gasket has stayed in place and has not dropped down or become disconnected. If the gasket has become dislodged, remove the door and reinsert the gasket. The gasket will not function if it is not installed properly. 8. Place a level on the door sill to verify that the sill is level. If the door is not level, remove it and determine why, then make adjustments as required and reseal the receptor and subsill again prior to reinstallation. 9. Typically, the door assembly is not anchored to the receptor or subsill. This allows the door to float within the opening, allowing for building movement and product expansion. When working with multiple doors within a single opening, follow the additional instructions in Section When doors are required to be attached, it is necessary to apply fully supported blocking and anchors at the locking points and through each hinge point. (See Figure and refer to Sections and for instructions.) Always check the manufacturer's shop drawings for specific requirements relative to the job application. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 20-27

327 Figure Attachment at Hinge and Lock Points 10. Once the door assembly is positioned in the opening, temporary receptor clips can be applied to hold the door in place. Do not leave temporary clips in place, as they are not designed to support the full load. 11. If temporary receptor clips are not used, or if it is time to complete the installation, apply the finished receptor clips as follows: Check the jamb receptor to subsill intersection. Prior to applying the jamb receptor clip, apply a bead of sealant at the space between the edge of the door assembly and the receptor (see Figure 20-30). Figure Application of Sealant at Receptor to Subsill Intersection There will not be a back-up surface for this sealant joint, but a blind seal (applied to the receptor clip later) will allow the two seals to integrate together. Make sure to install gaskets into the grooves as required. Do not cut the gasket short; cut it long enough to require crowd-in, or compression of, the excess so that if shrinkage occurs later, there will still be AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 20-28

328 enough to cover the entire length. (Example: Some gaskets are cut 1/4 extra per foot of extrusion length.) Consult with the gasket supplier and/or manufacturer for suggested cutting formula. 12. Apply a heavy bed of sealant to the back of the receptor clip at the sill condition (see Figure 20-30). After applying the sealant, apply the receptor clip into position. Tool any excess sealant that appears on the finished surface. 13. For sliding glass doors, once the door assembly is installed, follow the procedures for installing the door panels according to Section Check the installed product to ensure that it operates properly, and that the reveal is equal between the door panel and frame Multiple Door Installations With Receptor Systems The installation of multiple doors in a single opening is very similar to the instructions outlined in Section 20.2; however, additional preparations and steps will be necessary. There are two significant differences when installing multiple doors in single openings using receptor systems. First is the preparation and installation of the receptors/subsills, which will often be spliced together in a single opening. The second difference is the use of mullions and the need to properly anchor the mullions between the units to handle the structural load Preparation of the Receptor System for Multiple Door Applications in a Single Opening When installing receptors and subsills in multiple door installations, the amount of preparation needed will be based on the width of the opening and whether splicing is necessary. The governing factor will be the length of the receptor/subsill, which will often be determined based on the shipping capabilities. When preparing receptors and subsills for multiple door applications in a single opening, follow the procedures outlined below. The splicing requirements are common to both receptors and subsills. 1. Distribute the materials to the correct opening. 2. Determine what field fabrication is necessary, such as cutting, drilling and the application of end dams, gaskets and anchor clips as outlined in Section Receptors may require expansion slots, and subsills may require slip anchors to allow for expansion and contraction. Check the installation instructions when locating fixed points and expansion points, and make sure to follow the recommended procedures for attachment of the accessory to the substrate. When applying fasteners in an expansion slot, it is generally recommended that the fastener be positioned in the center of the slot (see Figure 20-16). 3. In addition to the preparation outlined in Section , splice plates will need to be applied (see Figure 20-31). Splice plates may be extrusions, formed from aluminum sheet or silicone compatible rubberized splice sleeves. Typically, rigid splice plates will be attached to one end of one extrusion and allowed to float freely with the opposing end of the mating piece, while flexible splices are sealed to both extrusions. First, apply any bond breaker tape to the splice as indicated on the drawings. The application of bond breaker tape is necessary to back up the sealant joint and allow for expansion and contraction, while avoiding three-side adhesion. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 20-29

329 Once the bond breaker tape is applied, the splice can be installed. Attach the splice using the fasteners indicated on the shop drawings. Keep in mind, some splice pieces are applied after the extrusions are installed, as opposed to before. Check the design of the splice and determine if the receptor/subsill is designed to simply sit down, or nest, with the opposing piece, or if the two pieces are to be slipped together prior to installation. The application will vary based on the design of the extrusion and the splice. Figure Application of Splice Sleeves Installation of Receptor Systems in Multiple Door Applications After preparation of the receptor system and assembly of the splice plates, the receptor system can be installed into position. Follow the installation procedures outlined in Section along with the following precautions: 1. Starting from one end of the opening, install the receptor system. The receptor/subsill must be carefully applied to ensure that all materials are properly lined up to allow for door installation later. It is a good idea to use strings to help locate the position of the receptors and subsill. Setting string will help keep the receptors and subsills straight within the opening. A story pole and laser or plumb bob will also help keep the receptor and subsill in line with one another from top to bottom, and ensure that the amount of clearance is correct. 2. Check the installation of each piece to ensure it is set plumb, level and square within the opening, and in relationship to each other. 3. Once all of the pieces are installed in the opening, seal the splice joint (see Figure 20-32). Apply sealant over the joint and then tool it to ensure that all air pockets are removed, and to promote good adhesion between the opposing ends of the extrusion. Use caution when applying the sealant; make sure the amount of sealant will not create interference with the installation of the door later. Note: Installing too much sealant may cause the door to rest on top of the sealant, causing the door to sit out of level. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 20-30

330 Figure Sealing Splice Joints 4. Prior to installation of the door assembly, re-check the installation of the receptor system and make sure all adjustments are made prior to the application of the perimeter seal. 5. Apply the perimeter seal as outlined in Section Re-check all joints to ensure that no voids are left in the sealant around the perimeter or between the perimeter seal and the splice joints Installation of Doors in Multiple Door Applications The installation of doors in multiple door applications typically requires independent structural mullions. Independent mullions are often required to support the structural load imposed on the jambs of the door assembly. Frames incorporating independent structural mullions typically involve the attachment of the mullion to both the receptor and subsill. The structural mullions carry the load to the extreme top and bottom, which in turn distributes the load to anchor clips within the subsill and receptor. Check the manufacturer's shop drawings to determine the design intent and mullion type for the job application. Each job is different and both the shop drawings and job calculations will dictate the requirements for the application Installation of Independent Structural Mullions The installation process for independent structural mullions will vary from job to job. Some applications will require that the mullions be installed in sequence with the door assembly; however, the mullions are not integral to (part of) the door. Other applications will allow for each mullion to be installed independently of the door assembly. This will involve locating and attaching the mullions within the opening, then installing the door assembly. Regardless of which application is used, the attachment of the independent structural mullion is generally a requirement. Special anchor clips are designed to carry the load imposed on the mullion from the adjacent framing (see Figure 20-33). AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 20-31

331 Figure Example Clip for Structural Mullion In cases where the mullions are installed in sequence with the door assembly (i.e. door frame, then mullion, then door frame), the practice is very similar to the steps outlined in this section, but the sequence is altered to allow the door assembly to be inserted before the next mullion. In situations where the mullions can be installed first (before the door frames are installed), follow these guidelines: 1. First, check the opening and make sure the receptor and subsill are properly positioned and anchored. 2. Use the shop drawings to determine the exact location of the mullions (where they are to be positioned in the opening). Mark the points on the head receptor and subsill for use later. 3. Special reinforcing plates and/or anchor clip receivers may be necessary. Check the shop drawings for their location. In some cases, the anchor clip receivers are pre-inserted into the subsill prior to installation. In other cases, the anchor clip receivers can be dropped into the subsill and/or receptor, and are positioned by the installer to allow for mullion attachment (see Figure 20-34). AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 20-32

332 Figure Reinforcing Plates in Subsill 4. In cases where the clip angle does not lock in place or integrate with a receiver, and attachment of the clip involves penetration of the subsill, the installer must make sure the clip assembly is properly sealed in place using the following guidelines. First determine the location of the clip in the subsill. Using the clip, find and drill the appropriate size hole in the subsill. To seal the clip/fastener assembly, first pump sealant into the hole in the subsill. Apply a bed of sealant on top of the subsill over the entire area where the clip will rest (see Figure 20-35). (The bed of sealant should be 1/8 thick.) AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 20-33

333 Figure Application of the Anchor Clip Directly to Subsill Set the clip into position into the sealant, pressing it in place, causing the sealant to compress out and around the clip perimeter. Install the fastener(s), any washers and the nuts into the clip, placing sealant between each layer. Encapsulate the entire head of the fastener/washer/nut with sealant to ensure a water tight joint. Tool the sealant at the fastener and around the clip to remove any air pockets, and to help promote good adhesion. Randomly check installations with water (see Chapter 7.5) after the clips are attached and the sealant has had time to properly cure. 5. Once the anchor clips have been installed into the head receptor and subsill, mullion installation can begin. Use the fasteners recommended by the manufacturer to attach the mullion to the anchor clip. Check for slots in the clip at the head condition. Slots are designed to hold the frame in place, yet allow for vertical expansion and contraction as well as building movement. If slots are present, it s best to locate the fasteners in the center of the vertical slot. Check each installation to ensure that the mullion is plumb and provides a square opening to receive the door. Make sure the fastener heads and the anchor clip will not cause interference with the installation of the door assembly later. Apply a bead of sealant at any metal- to-metal joints where the mullion will interface with the subsill or receptor (see Figure 20-36). Check the project shop drawings for seal locations. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 20-34

334 Figure Application of Sealant for Mullion After setting the mullions in place, tool the sealant on both the inboard and outboard side. Clean off any excess sealant that will show on the exposed finish. It is a good idea to dry fit a frame into place to ensure it will fit properly between the two mullions prior to attaching all of the mullions. Check the location of each mullion as the installation progresses. Make sure there will be enough room for the last mullion and frame in the opening, and that there will not be an interference problem. 6. Once the mullions are secured in place and the opening is given a final check to ensure a good fit, the installation of the door assembly and/or sidelights can begin (refer to Sections , , and ). Sidelights (fixed units adjacent to doors) are installed just like door assemblies, depending on whether they are stacked in place horizontally or applied between mullions (see Figure 20-37). AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 20-35

335 Figure Installation of Sidelights 7. Insert each door assembly (or sidelight) into the opening left by the mullions. Center the door between the mullions and set the door in place. Make sure the frames are seated all the way down into the subsill. Never leave a frame unsecured in the opening. Use short temporary clips (pressure plates) to secure the frame in place if continuous clips are to be applied later. Do not leave temporary clips in place, as they are not designed to support the full load. Always use the pressure plate fasteners recommended by the manufacturer. When applying continuous pressure plates, make sure to leave enough clearance to apply the receptor clips. Once the continuous pressure plates are applied, the finished covers can be snapped on (see Figure 20-38). AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 20-36

336 Figure Apply Pressure Plates and Covers 8. After all of the door assemblies are secured in place, complete the installation by applying the finished receptor clips and perimeter seal as required. See Sections 20.6 and 20.7 for finishing the interior and exterior Installation of Door Assembly with Transom Panels Above The installation of doors with fixed panels (transoms) above is similar to the instructions outlined in Section 20.3; however, additional preparations and steps will be necessary. When installing transoms above doors, horizontal stack mullions will typically be used, and need to be properly anchored to the frame below either prior to installation, or after installation. For applications where the horizontal stack mullion and transom are applied on top of the door assembly prior to door installation, follow the guidelines provided in Section For applications where the transom is applied on top of the door assembly after door installation, follow the guidelines provided in Section Horizontal Stack Mullions Installed Prior to Door Installation If horizontal stack mullions are used, the installation of the door and transom is done in sequence, starting from the bottom and working towards the top. Use the following guidelines when installing transoms above doors using horizontal stack mullions: 1. After making sure the subsill and receptor are fully prepared, the assembly of the door and transom may begin. 2. If possible, use a table to work from. Lay the door on top of the table and apply sealant to the horizontal stack mullion as directed by the manufacturer, then set the horizontal stack mullion on top the door frame (see Figure 20-39). Seal and attach the stack mullion with fasteners as indicated by the manufacturer. Make sure to seal all fastener penetrations completely. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 20-37

337 Figure Assembly of the Stack Mullion 3. Apply an additional bead of sealant on top of the horizontal stack mullion in preparation for receipt of the transom. 4. Set the transom in position over the door assembly. Slip the transom into the stack mullion, mating the male and female sections together (see Figure 20-40). Figure Assembly of the Transom and Door Prior to Installation AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 20-38

338 5. Attach the transom to the stack mullion as directed by the manufacturer. 6. Set the door into position in the subsill, then rotate the head toward the exterior and push it against the receptor at the jambs. Note: If the assembly does not call for attachment fasteners, use caution when raising the frame into position so the transom will not fall out of the horizontal stack mullion. 7. Move the door horizontally until it nests within the jamb receptor opening. Check the horizontal clearance, and make sure the door is in the proper position before proceeding. 8. After installation of the door, apply the receptor clips to hold the door and fixed panel in place. Check the shop drawings to determine if gaskets need to be applied to the receptor clips prior to installation. From the interior, check the fit; make sure the frames mate together according to the shop drawings Horizontal Stack Mullions Installed After Door Installation If horizontal stack mullions are used and are to be applied after the doors are installed, use the following guidelines: 1. After making sure the subsill and receptor are fully prepared, the installation of the door will occur first, followed by the horizontal stack mullion, then the transom. 2. Set the door in place as indicated in the previous sections. Apply a bead of sealant to the bottom side of the stack mullion. 3. Attach the mullion into position with fasteners as recommended by the manufacturer. Be sure to seal all fastener penetrations. 4. Apply an additional bead of sealant on top of the horizontal stack mullion in preparation for receipt of the transom. 5. Set the transom in position over the door assembly. This may require you to rotate the assembly into position, starting with the bottom, and then rotate the head outboard against the receptor. Slip the transom into the stack mullion, mating the male and female sections together (see Figure 20-41). 6. Move the transom horizontally until it nests within the center of the horizontal stack mullion. Check the horizontal clearance, and make sure the door is in the proper position before proceeding. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 20-39

339 Figure Transom Installation after Door is Installed 7. Attach the transom to the stack mullion as directed by the manufacturer. 8. After installation of the fixed panel, apply the receptor clips to hold the door and fixed panel in place. Check the shop drawings to determine if gaskets need to be applied to the receptor clip prior to installation Checking Installation for Plumb, Level and Square Regardless of the installation practice used, all doors and accessories shall be installed plumb, level and square within the opening. The following illustrations show how to check the door assembly to ensure it is properly installed. For All Door Types 1. Check the door assembly to ensure it is set plumb, level and square in the opening (see Figures and 20-43), using the following tips: Make sure the door sill is level and not bowed or uneven. Install shims behind the jamb 4" to 6" from the sill and header. Adjust shims until the frame is square (diagonal measurements are within tolerance, based on the size of the door). Plumb the frame and check for true (not racked) by using strings stretched from each corner to the opposing corner. Note: If the strings just barely touch, the unit is not racked out of alignment. If the strings are touching, reverse the strings to determine if the unit is racked. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 20-40

340 Figure Check for Plumb, Level and Square Figure Check for True (Racking) For All Hinged Doors Open the operable panel(s) and remove any shipping spacers. Adjust the shims, and move the top of one or both sides of the frame slightly in, out or horizontally, until the following conditions are achieved: 1. The top of each panel is parallel to the frame at the head (the margin is even across the top of the door). The operable panel(s) make even contact with the weather-stripping. The jambs are within 1/16" of being straight. The door operates properly and it remains stationary in any open position. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 20-41

341 2. Install lockset(s) if not already in place. 3. Verify that the jambs are shimmed properly as follows: On each side there should be at least three shims, with shims installed behind each hinge (when hinged at the jamb). Place shims behind the jamb strike plate. On the top, install at least three shims (within 4" to 6" of each corner and at the center mullion position), except when directed not to do so by the manufacturer. 4. Secure the shims at hinge and strike locations with a long screw that penetrates the structural framing. One hole in each hinge may have been left open for this step. If not, remove one standard screw and install a screw of an appropriate length (sometimes dictated by code) through the hole in the hinge, directly into the jamb condition. When installing the long screws, take care not to pull the frame out of square. 5. For units with multiple jamb-hinged panels, also shim and secure hinges on the inactive side. 6. Close the panel(s). Then re-check the margins between the panel(s) and the jamb, and between the panels of a two-panel unit. Adjust the shims as needed to maintain margins that are equal from top to bottom. Make sure panels remain aligned (tops even with each other). On Two-Panel Hinged Glass Doors 1. Make sure the following is achieved: Both panels are in the same plane. The top corners of the panel locking stiles are aligned and flush with each other, and the margin between locking stiles is even from top to bottom. For Sliding Glass Doors Open the operable panel and check the fit, adjusting the rollers as needed until the following is achieved: 1. Check the interlock to determine if the overlap is the same from top to bottom. Open each operable sash until it just clears the jamb and check the gap. It will be even along the vertical edge of the interlock if the door panel is square. If the door panel is not square, remove the panel to reduce the weight, and adjust the rollers prior to placing the panel back into the door frame. Continue to check and adjust until the panel is square in the frame. Make sure operable sliders are fully blocked and supported at the locking points so that if the sash is slammed shut, the frame will resist damage. 2. Operate the door panel and check for a smooth operation. If the door does not move freely, check the sill track for debris and clean as needed Finishing the Exterior The following guidelines are provided in addition to the instructions outlined in the previous sections regarding finishing the exterior. These instructions relate to the application of a perimeter seal. Select a backer rod with a diameter approximately 30% larger than the nominal width of the joint. (Rule of thumb: the rod diameter shall be at least 1/8" greater than joint width.) AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 20-42

342 The backer rod should be inserted into the joint using a blunt probe or roller. It shall not be punctured, folded or creased; this could cause emission of gas and bubbling of sealant. Joint primer shall not be applied to the backer rod. Push the sealant into the joint over the backer rod in a continuous manner. Tool the sealant bead so that it is an even, unbroken seal, sufficient to fill the gap between the door unit and the rough opening. Always follow manufacturer's instructions. For detailed information on sealants, see Chapter 13, Section Remember, there are five basic steps for proper joint preparation and sealant application for doors: 1. CLEAN Joint surfaces must be clean, dry, dust free and frost free. 2. PRIME If required, primer is applied to the clean surface(s). 3. PACK Install backer rod or bond breaker as required. 4. SHOOT Sealant is applied by "pushing the bead" into the joint cavity. 5. TOOL Dry tooling techniques are used to strike a flush joint and make certain the sealant has the proper configuration, and fully contacts the joint walls Allowance for Moisture Escape Most doors are manufactured with weep holes to allow moisture to escape. Never cover these weep holes with sealant, paint or any other obstructive material. Remove any construction debris from the drainage path to ensure proper drainage Finishing the Interior Cavity Insulation Whenever possible, place insulation in the cavity between the new door assembly/receptor and the building components. 1. Use fiber insulation (fiberglass batt insulation) or low pressure expanding foam (see Chapter 13, Section ). Follow the manufacturer's guidelines. Exception: Insulation is not required in small openings if they can be completely filled with sealant (see Chapter 13, Section 13.5 for sealant information) Apply Backer Rod (Interior) Like the exterior, place backer rod over cavity insulation on the interior side of the door to control sealant width and depth Apply Sealant (Interior) On the interior of the door where an exposed joint occurs (or where required per the contract drawings), place sealant over the backer rod in a continuous manner. The sealant bead shall be even, unbroken and fill the gap between the door unit and the rough opening. For detailed information on sealants, see Chapter 13, Section Trim or Drywall Returns Buildings often involve cavities within the wall system. These cavities may introduce air at the joint between the inner-most surface of the door and the building condition. This air must be controlled in order to help reduce air infiltration and energy consumption. If there are no open-air passages, the blockage of air becomes secondary, and the interior seal between the drywall and the door assembly becomes a cosmetic joint. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 20-43

343 If the dry wall is intended to be a component of the air barrier system, the drywall J-channel shall be sealed to the door assembly (see Figure 20-44). This may or may not be a part of the installer's contract. 1. The responsible party shall coordinate the installation of the drywall and the J-channel when abutting against the door frame/accessory. Do not attach J-channels to the door assembly or receptor unless otherwise approved by the door manufacturer. 2. It is preferable that a 1/4 wide joint be left to allow for movement of the door assembly due to wind load and/or live load movement. If a properly sized joint is not left, cracking of the drywall may occur, or the sealant may tear, requiring future maintenance. 3. If the door assembly is installed toward the outside of the wall assembly, a drywall J-channel return shall be installed in the recess, and the joint between the face of the door frame and the drywall J-channel shall be sealed. Figure Trim and Drywall Returns Notes: AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 20-44

344 Table of Contents 21.1 Types of Screens Locating the Screen Stationary vs. Operable Screens Screen Access and Operation Installation of Screens Installing a Screen with Compression Springs Installing a Screen with Turn Tabs Installing a Sliding Screen Door... 5 This voluntary specification was developed by representative members of AAMA as advisory information and published as a public service. AAMA disclaims all liability for the use, application or adaptation of materials published herein. Copyright 2015 American Architectural Manufacturers Association 1827 Walden Office Square, Suite 550, Schaumburg, IL Phone: 847/ Fax: 847/ webmaster@aamanet.org Web Site: AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 21-I

345 21.0 Screen Installation Screens can be installed after the window and/or door installation is complete. Screens for windows and sliding glass doors are typically available as an option when ordering products. It is often desirable to store screens in a protected area until the majority of the work is done, and then install the screens later. Coordinate the screen installation with the approving authority Types of Screens There are a variety of screen types, and each type is designed to accomplish a specific task. Insect screens are used to simply protect against flying insects. Shade screens are used to offer some resistance to direct sunlight. Security screens (protection screens) are used to provide a measure of security from intrusion into the building. This chapter focuses primarily on screens and how they are used and installed. Caution: Insect screens are intended to provide reasonable insect control. They are not for the purpose of providing security or designed to provide retention of objects or persons on the interior. Screens are not retaining devices for children. Although not screens, child guards are often installed in multiple story buildings to help protect children from falling from open windows. The installation of child guards is often not part of the window contract; however, precautions are mentioned in this chapter to give some guidance to installers who may be asked to install child guards. When installing screens or child guards that are not part of the window/door system, installers are encouraged to read and follow all of the manufacturer's installation instructions and precautions. The following is a list of the different types of screens and child guards that are available: 1. Insect screens Fiberglass Aluminum 2. Shade screens Fiberglass Aluminum 3. Security screens (Protection Screens) Stainless Steel Mesh Steel Mesh Fiberglass Mesh (with sensor wire which activates alarm when cut) 4. Child Guards Metal 21.2 Locating the Screen Screens can be installed inside or outside of the window or door. To install screens, follow the steps below: 1. First verify that the correct screen has been obtained. Usually the screen is tagged to correspond with the window or glass door opening. 2. Determine whether the screen is to be installed on the interior or exterior. Check the manufacturer's instructions for screen location. Some general hints for screen location are as follows: Insect screens AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 21-1

346 Horizontal and vertical sliding windows typically mount screens on the outside. Casement, hopper, awning and dual action and projection windows usually mount screens opposite the sash projection. Sliding glass doors and hinged doors typically have the screens on the outside, but can also have screens on the inside depending on the product type and manufacturer. Shade screens Shade screens are generally installed on the exterior of the window for maximum efficiency. Security screens Metal security screens are generally installed on the exterior. Fiberglass security screens are frequently installed in the original screen location. Child guards Child guards are usually installed on the interior. They are designed to be adjustable for variations in opening sizes so the guard can be attached to the interior framing. 3. Verify the size and fit of the screen. If the screen doesn t fit, find out why. Note: Never install a screen that may prevent or hamper emergency egress Stationary vs. Operable Screens Consult the manufacturer's instructions to determine if the screen is a stationary (fixed) screen or an operable screen. Window screens are often fixed. Screens for doors operate at the head or sill on sliding tracks, or swing from hinges. Protection screens are typically fixed. Child guards are typically operable, but are locked to protect against operation unless there is an emergency Screen Access and Operation Stationary screens that are mounted on the interior may require a device (typically called wickets) that allow for access and operation of the window locking hardware. The options available for interior screens are: Screens with hinged wickets Screens with sliding wickets Fully hinged screens Screens with wickets require additional framing to support the wicket assembly (see Figure 21-1), while the fully hinged screens do not. Fully hinged screens and screens with wickets, however, must be opened in order to close and lock the window. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 21-2

347 Figure 21-1 Access Options for Hardware 21.5 Installation of Screens The installation of screens varies, and each manufacturer has its own installation method. Therefore, these instructions can be used only as a general guideline for installing screens and are not intended as a substitute for the manufacturer's instructions. Always install screens in windows and doors per the manufacturer's instructions Installing a Screen with Compression Springs 1. Install the portion of screen with compression springs into the deep pocket of the frame (this may be the jamb or the head). 2. Push the screen into the pocket until the screen bottoms out in the window channel (see Figure 21-2). Use caution not to bend the screen frame when you compress the springs. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 21-3

348 Figure 21-2 Screen with Compression Springs 3. Swing the opposite end of the screen into the window frame and let it slip into the shallow pocket of the track. 4. Release the screen and make sure it is secured and locked into position Installing a Screen with Turn Tabs 1. Place the screen over the window and align it in place. 2. Secure the screen in place by screwing a turn tab (see Figure 21-3)over the frame and into the window frame or trim boards. Use caution to not over tighten the screws. Figure 21-3 Screen with Turn Tabs AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 21-4

349 Installing a Sliding Screen Door 1. Retract the wheels on the screen door to their lowest position; this will allow for the most amount of clearance when installing the screen (see Figure 21-34). Figure 21-3 Installing Sliding Screen Door 2. Lift up the door into the top track far enough to provide clearance for the bottom of the door to swing in over the bottom top of the track (see Figure 21-34). 3. Adjust the bottom wheels up to provide enough clearance for the door to slide smoothly. Align the screen door to the jamb for an equal sightline by adjusting the lower wheels up and down. 4. Adjust the top wheels up until the wheels engage the top track. Turn the adjustment screw an additional turn. This will put enough tension on the wheels to keep the door rolling smoothly and prevent it from jumping off the track. For overhead sliding screens, similar adjustments can be made at the head. See the manufacturer's instructions for adjustment instructions. 5. Install the latch and keeper. It is best to put the keeper on only after the final adjustments have been made to the door. 6. Operate the screen to verify that it works properly. 7. Verify that the screen has proper clearance and coverage. 8. Open and close the screen door to check for smooth operation. 9. Check the latch to determine that it engages the keeper and holds the screen securely closed. Notes: AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 21-5

350 AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 21-6

351 Table of Contents 22.1 Cleaning Finished Materials Material Finishes Use of Protective Coverings Manufacturer's Instructions Cleaning Windows and Doors General Cleaning of Light Surface Soil Washing Glass Surfaces Cleaning of the Building Exterior Site Clean-up Removal of Construction Debris Proper Disposal of Debris Welding After Glass is in Place...5 This voluntary specification was developed by representative members of AAMA as advisory information and published as a public service. AAMA disclaims all liability for the use, application or adaptation of materials published herein. Copyright 2015 American Architectural Manufacturers Association 1827 Walden Office Square, Suite 550, Schaumburg, IL Phone: 847/ Fax: 847/ webmaster@aamanet.org Web Site: AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 22-I

352 22.0 Final Cleaning To insure proper operation of the installed products and the longevity of the finish, proper selection and use of cleaners is critical. The cleaning products many installers are accustomed to using may not be compatible with all materials used in commercial applications. In some cases, damage to the finish and structural integrity of the product may occur. Always refer to the manufacturer s instructions for proper cleaning methods and materials. If the installer leaves the product cleaned and in good working condition, other trades that follow will be more inclined to clean up after themselves. The following sections address cleaning finished products, regardless of the responsible trade Cleaning Finished Materials Material Finishes When choosing a cleaning solution, consider the following: The actual finish applied to the material; The possibility of scratching the surface; and The possibility of damaging the finish using harsh chemicals This chapter provides suggested general cleaning instructions for aluminum, vinyl, wood and fiberglass materials. Read completely all cleaning instructions prior to starting any cleaning job. Additional cleaning instruction/information regarding anodized and painted aluminum materials can be found in AAMA 609, "Voluntary Guide Specification for Cleaning and Maintenance of Architectural Aluminum," and AAMA 610, "Voluntary Guide Specification for Cleaning and Maintenance of Painted Aluminum Extrusions and Curtain Wall Panels." For vinyl products additional information can be found in AAMA PMB-1-11 Caring for Your Windows, Doors and Skylight Use of Protective Coverings Some products arrive at the job site with clear, white or blue-tinted adhesive vinyl protective coverings, which can be peeled off after installation of the products. Sometimes these coverings are field applied to protect the finish. While these materials protect the finish, they must not be allowed to remain on the product for an extended period of time as they can also bake on and harm the finish. Alkaline building products, such as wet plaster, stucco, mortar, concrete and lime can cause permanent stains and corrosive damage to the finish of products. Additionally, harsh acidic cleaning agents, such as muriatic (hydrochloric) acid, used to wash the building surface can also damage the finish. Whenever possible, apply protective coverings over the entire finished surface to avoid contact. If the manufacturer has applied protective coverings, they should remain in place until the work is complete. If a protective covering is not provided, the responsible trade must protect the finish prior to starting their work. Consider these tips: Never use high-pressure washers as they can damage the finish and sealant. Whenever there is a chance of harming the finish of windows and doors, protect them by masking them with the appropriate materials. Masking tape should not be used on finished surfaces. Masking tape can, when heated by sunlight, bake onto the finish causing damage when removed. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 22-1

353 If the finished surface of a product happens to come into contact with muriatic acid, other acidic products or alkaline substances, remove any residue before it dries. Wash and rinse the surface completely, then dry with a clean towel. If these materials are allowed to remain, there is a strong possibility of finish damage. Stucco or concrete left to cure on the frames of windows and doors and glazing materials may damage the surfaces. Promptly remove and clean all such materials that come into contact with these surfaces before any curing action takes place. Additionally, glass or aluminum surfaces exposed to water leaching from new concrete or stucco must be rinsed immediately to prevent permanent damage Manufacturer's Instructions Most manufacturers offer standard instructions regarding removal of the protective cover and final cleaning of specific finishes. Final cleaning of all windows and doors shall be done in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, applicable codes and safety regulations. The information in this manual is offered to the installer for use when information is not available from the manufacturer Cleaning Windows and Doors General Cleaning of Light Surface Soil Start cleaning the products by removing any visible residue. Use a vacuum cleaner to pick up any loose debris in window or door tracks, as well as any loose drywall dust, mud and other materials on the face of the products. Additionally, inspect and clean all weep holes to ensure proper drainage of the product. When the vacuum cleaning is complete, clean the material finish by using the recommendations below. Prior to washing the products, remove all light surface soil. Some testing is recommended to determine the degree of cleaning actually necessary to accomplish the desired result. Use the following procedures, starting with the gentlest process and working toward a more aggressive approach, as the need occurs. For interior applications, the recommended cleaning process includes using warm water and a damp cloth. Starting from the top and working toward the bottom, wash with a gentle, yet uniform pressure using a soft cloth. First, clean in a horizontal direction, then in a vertical direction. Make sure the cloth is frequently rinsed in clean water and does not contain grit, which can scratch the surface. Rinse the surface from the top down using clean water, then, dry thoroughly with a clean cloth. If the soil is still present after drying, some surface agitation can be introduced. Follow the same procedure indicated above using a wet soft sponge or soft brush to gently scrub remaining dirt, while concurrently applying water to the surface. For exterior applications, the methods above can be followed; however, a garden hose can be used to dislodge any soil and perform the final rinse. Use caution because many operable windows and doors are not designed to withstand direct, full-pressure, full-volume spray from a typical garden hose. Windows and doors may allow water to penetrate into unwanted locations when subjected to such a spray. When using a garden hose, always apply the water at a low volume, using moderate water pressure and an indirect spray. Always start with windows on the upper floors and work down. Minimize the amount of water running over the lower portions of the building to avoid other stains or damage. If soil still adheres to the surface, a mild detergent cleaner can be used along with the soft sponge or brush, gently scrubbing the surface. Mild soaps or detergents ruled safe for bare-hands will be safe for painted products. Always use a uniform pressure when washing window and door components. First, clean with a horizontal motion and then a vertical motion. The surface must be thoroughly rinsed by spraying with clean water, and then AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 22-2

354 thoroughly dried with a clean cloth before going to the next step. Do not allow cleaning solutions to collect, or "puddle," on horizontal surfaces and crevices. Always flush these areas with water and dry thoroughly. Refer to the manufacturer's instructions before using any type of solvent. Caution: Never use abrasive pads to clean finished surfaces. Follow the cleaning instructions provided. Do not use excessive abrasive rubbing to remove stubborn stains; this may adversely affect the finish and leave an even more undesirable appearance. Some Important Cautions Regarding Any Finish Never use paint removers, aggressive alkaline, acid or abrasive cleaners. Don't use cleaners containing trisodium phosphate, highly alkaline cleaners or highly acidic cleaners. Do not use cleaners containing aggressive organic solvents such as chlorine bleach, liquid grease remover, strong soaps or deter-gents containing organic solvents, nail polish remover or furniture polish/cleaners. Do not attempt to clean sun-heated surfaces, because possible chemical reactions on hot surfaces may be accelerated. Always work in shaded areas or in areas not exposed to direct sunlight. Also, avoid cleaning in freezing temperatures, or when temperatures are low enough to cause condensation. Surfaces cleaned under these adverse conditions can become streaked or tainted, and cannot be restored to their original appearance. Use only mild detergents and non-etching cleaning agents on products. Never mix different cleaners as adverse chemical reactions may occur. Always follow the cleaning material recommendations at the proper concentration, and always test the cleaner in a small area prior to proceeding. Never use scouring pads, abrasive brushes, steel wool or other abrasives that will damage the finish. Do not use excessive rubbing. Make sure sponges or cleaning cloths are free of dirt or grit Washing Glass Surfaces Cleaning glass surfaces is much like cleaning framing materials. Any paint, plaster or sealant on the glass should be removed immediately. Never clean glass with an abrasive material or strong organic solvents, which could harm the glass surface or glazing sealant. For extremely soiled conditions, remove excess residue with a mild soap solution and a clean damp cloth prior to using any aggressive cleaning techniques. Removing excess residue will reduce the amount of cleaning required and reduce the possibility of scratching the glass surface. Frequently rinse the cloth to remove grit. Once the excess dirt and grime are re-moved, clean the glass with a mild soap or detergent, or glass cleaner. Always start with a clean, grit-free, soft cloth or sponge. Wet the cloth or sponge with the cleaning solution and gently wash the glass surface. Immediately rinse with a clean cloth using clean rinse water. Promptly remove excess rinse water with a clean squeegee. Finally, dry any residual water on the surface of the glass and window frame with a clean, dry cloth. Clean glass with reflective coatings using extreme caution in order to avoid scratching the surface. Use the same procedures outlined above, taking extra care to remove gritty dirt particles picked up by the cleaning cloth or sponge. Use the same precautions outlined above when cleaning Lexan or Polycarbonate products. Use extreme care, as these surfaces may be damaged during the cleaning process if the proper measures are not taken. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 22-3

355 Protect the glass from welding, cutting, sandblasting, fireproofing or other potentially damaging work. Never mark glass with permanent markers, tape or other materials that may harm the surface. Note: Masking tape should not be used on glass surfaces. Masking tape can, when heated by sunlight, bake onto the glass and/or window frame, causing damage when removed. Windows and doors often arrive at the job site with labels and stickers on the surface. Generally, all manufacturer stickers can be removed during cleaning. Only remove temporary labels that do not indicate certification of the products. Temporary labels are generally applied to the glass and obviously impede the view. Permanent labels are not to be removed; they will generally be located in inconspicuous locations in the jamb track of windows and doors, or can be seen only when the window or door is open. Caution: Use extreme care when removing labels. Avoid scratching the glass with razor blades or other sharp tools Cleaning of the Building Exterior Final cleaning is a common occurrence on commercial buildings and should always be done by professionals experienced in this type of work. Although final cleaning of the building exterior is often not the responsibility of the window/door installer, coordination with the contractor is essential. Depending on the cleaning materials and methods used, final cleaning can often lead to serious damage of the installed units. As an example, muriatic acid, a chemical used to clean brick, can result in damage to the finish of the product as well as cause failure of the sealant. Installers are encouraged to communicate the problems associated with final cleaning with the contractor, and help determine reasonable solutions to accomplish the final cleaning process while maintaining the integrity of the finish and sealant joints. At a minimum, recommend that any final cleaning be done from the top of the building down, one floor at a time. Insist that the cleaning agents be immediately rinsed off the finished product and wiped dry before proceeding on to the floor below. This will help reduce the potential for damage due to the harsh chemicals Site Clean-up Removal of Construction Debris During the installation of window and door products, a certain amount of construction debris will most likely accumulate. The installer of the products is responsible for removing any debris accumulating during his/her work. Debris may include, but is not limited to, cardboard, plastic, banding, shims, miscellaneous trim cutoffs, sealant tubes, fasteners, broken glass, old windows, etc Proper Disposal of Debris Always dispose of construction debris responsibly and appropriately. In new construction applications, a job-site waste disposal container may be available. When working in replacement applications, remove all materials from the job site. Some materials may be considered hazardous and shall be disposed of in accordance with local ordinances. Always dispose of materials in such a way as to remove any potential for harm to the public. Materials such as glass, steel, aluminum and vinyl can be taken to recycling centers and reclaimed. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 22-4

356 22.6 Welding After Glass is in Place Welding done after the glass is installed can cause significant damage to both the glass and the finished surface of the installed unit. Whenever possible, it is best to make sure all welding of steel anchor clips, straps and plates is complete before the glass is installed. Understanding that this is not always possible and that there are many trades involved in the construction process, there are occasions when welding must take place after the units are installed. Welding involves intense heat and often results in large quantities of molten hot material flashing off the pieces being welded. The material that flashes off can shatter glass, mark the finish on the glass surface and damage the finish on the installed unit. The installer is encouraged to communicate the problems associated to welding with the contractor. The contractor is responsible to communicate with any trades that follow so they will also understand these concerns. Whenever welding must be done after the units are installed, the window/door must be protected. This may involve a number of different protective measures, but as a minimum, a canvas tarp should be hung to protect the opening during the welding process. Notes: AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 22-5

357 Table of Contents 23.1 Using Quality Control Checklists Window and Glass Door Operation Occupant Safety...3 This voluntary specification was developed by representative members of AAMA as advisory information and published as a public service. AAMA disclaims all liability for the use, application or adaptation of materials published herein. Copyright 2015 American Architectural Manufacturers Association 1827 Walden Office Square, Suite 550, Schaumburg, IL Phone: 847/ Fax: 847/ webmaster@aamanet.org Web Site: AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 23-I

358 23.0 Quality Control Performing specific quality control procedures is a critical part of completing any installation. Installers perform numerous tasks that are important to the overall quality and performance of the finished installation, and the most efficient way to make sure each task is completed properly is to perform a quality control check. Completing the quality control check via a checklist signifies that an installer has performed each step of the installation process completely and correctly, and in accordance with the installation practices outlined in this manual. When an item on the quality control checklist is not part of the installer contract, the approving authority assumes this responsibility Using Quality Control Checklists The quality control checklist contains a number of items critical to installation, and includes checking for the following: The opening is configured correctly and contains the appropriate materials. The products used are correct for the desired application and meet the code requirements. All windows and doors fit the openings based on the correct clearances for the product. The correct flashing has been used and installed properly. Appropriate sealant, shims and blocking have been used and applied correctly. Sealant joints have been spot checked for field adhesion per ASTM E C1521. The products have been installed plumb, level and square. Weep holes/slots are clear and free of any obstructions. Correct fastener selection and placement has been maintained, and additional fasteners have been used where required, based on the type of product used. The products have been tested to ensure smooth and safe operation. Final cleaning has been done, and all debris has been removed from the job site. Any required maintenance has been performed to place the products in working order. Use of the preprinted quality control checklists provided as part of this manual is an important part of a complete and satisfactory installation Window and Glass Door Operation As part of the final inspection performed by the installer, windows and doors are to be checked for operation. Each window should be unlocked, opened, closed and locked to ensure smooth and safe operation. Make sure limit-opening devices have been engaged and restrict operation when they are included on the job. Check any product that does not operate correctly to determine the source or cause of the problem. Make any necessary corrections or adjustments to correct any problems detected. If any minor adjustments can be made by the installer to correct improper operation, they should be made. Before any major corrective work is done that would result in a charge, the installer is encouraged to contact the manufacturer for proper maintenance instructions and approval to proceed. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 23-1

359 Sample of Field Quality Control Checklist Customer: Phone: Address: Date Installed: City & State: Lead Installer: Zip Code: Phone: Initial Product Review and Verification: Products were checked when they arrived at the job site and were in good condition. Products that included safety glazing were placed where required by code(s). Products involving high performance glazing were placed in the proper location. Problems pertaining to the existing windows and/or rough openings have been reported to the responsible party, and have been resolved or documented. (See attached documentation.) All safety issues related to hazardous materials have been properly addressed and resolved. Other Appropriate Installation Techniques Used and Quality Control Checks Performed: All openings are configured correctly and include the appropriate materials. Products used are appropriate for the application, and meet code requirements. Water resistive barrier and flashing requirements were coordinated with the contractor. Products were installed with proper clearances and checked for plumb, level and square. Products have been installed according to the manufacturer's instructions. Flashing/sealant, sealing, shims and shimming applications follow AAMA recommendations and ASTM Standards. Correct fastener placement has been followed as directed by the manufacturer. Periodically QC checks and field water penetration tests have been performed. Periodic field checks for sealant adhesion quality in accordance with ASTM C 1521 Other Final Check of Installation: All products were checked for operation and function, safely and correctly. Screens have been checked and are in good condition. Any required adjustments or maintenance has been performed. Weep holes have been checked for obstructions and cleared where necessary. Final cleaning of frames and glass has been completed. All debris has been removed from the job site and disposed of properly. Operation of the product and standard maintenance requirements have been explained to the owner. Job has been turned over to the contractor or other responsible party with their approval. Other Installer's Signature: Date: (Where applicable, each of the items checked above have been properly reviewed, verified and completed as part of my field quality control check prior to turning the job over to the responsible party/approving authority.) Responsible Party: Date: (The items checked above were completed as part of the installer's quality control process. My signature indicates that the installation was completed to my satisfaction and/or direction.) AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 23-2

360 23.3 Occupant Safety The safe operation of the windows and doors by future occupants is of critical importance. For this reason, any products that are not in working order should be marked and restricted from use until repairs can be accomplished or replacements installed. Never leave windows or doors that cannot be operated safely unmarked, since job-site visitors may try to operate the windows, which could cause serious harm or injury. It is important that the operation and maintenance requirements of the product be provided to the owner and/or his representative. Copies of all operation manuals, maintenance manuals and documentation shall be provided to the owner and/or his representatives at the conclusion of the installation. Notes: COPYRIGHT AAMA SIXTH EDITION

361 Table of Contents 24.1 Maintenance of Hung Windows Tilt Latch Mechanism Sash Lubrication Balance Adjustment Maintenance of Awning/Hopper, Casement and Dual Action Windows Locking Mechanism Adjustment Hinge Adjustment Limit Stop Engagement Maintenance of Sliding Windows Removal of the Sash Adjustment of the Rollers Cleaning of the Roller Track Maintenance of Sliding Doors Locking Mechanism Adjustment Screen Adjustment Maintenance of Hinged Glass Doors Locking Mechanism Adjustment Hinge Adjustment Field Re-Glazing Techniques Marine Glazing Wet-Glazing/Tape-Glazing Dry Glazing Application of a Heel Bead Application of a Cap Bead Field Glass Cutting and Handling Measuring and Scoring Breaking the Glass This voluntary specification was developed by representative members of AAMA as advisory information and published as a public service. AAMA disclaims all liability for the use, application or adaptation of materials published herein. Copyright 2015 American Architectural Manufacturers Association 1827 Walden Office Square, Suite 550, Schaumburg, IL Phone: 847/ Fax: 847/ webmaster@aamanet.org Web Site: AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 24-I

362 24.0 Final Adjustment and Product Maintenance This chapter provides some basic final adjustment and maintenance tips for hung windows, awning/hopper, casement, dual action and sliding windows, sliding doors, hinged doors and screens. Final adjustment and maintenance instructions specific to each product can be found in the manufacturer's product literature. This chapter also provides tips on field glass handling and cutting techniques, for those occasions where the installer must replace a lite of glass Maintenance of Hung Windows Tilt Latch Mechanism Check tilt latches to ensure proper retraction and return required for window cleaning. If the tilt latch is too tight, it may not function properly. Latches are designed in various ways. Some tilt latches can be adjusted. If the latch can be adjusted, raise the bottom sash above the sill a minimum of 4". On double hung windows, operate the bottom sash first; then lower the top sash a minimum of 4". Retract the tilt latch(es) and rotate the sash inward until it reaches a flat, horizontal plane. The tilt latch can now be inspected to determine the cause of failure. If the tilt latch will not perform properly after minor adjustment, contact the manufacturer for a replacement or further instructions. If minor adjustments can be made, make the appropriate adjustments. Lift and shut the sash and check for proper tilt latch return Sash Lubrication Occasionally, the sash operates with difficulty and needs minor lubrication. Always lubricate tracks in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions. Tracks of wood windows should be lubricated only after the windows are finished, since lubricant over-spray can adversely affect the bond between the wood and the finish. Before lubricating vinyl tracks, verify that the lubricant is compatible with the vinyl or plastic parts used in the window assembly. When silicone aerosol sprays are used, prevent them from contacting plastic locking mechanisms because the plastic may be made of impact-resistant polycarbonate materials that will begin to dissolve from the solvents contained in these sprays Balance Adjustment There are occasions when the sash lifts or settles improperly over a short time. This may require balance adjustment, when that option is available. Adjust balances only when they have instructions from the manufacturer explaining the process. Hung windows can be designed in a number of ways, and will include balances from a number of different manufacturers. Adjust balances only with the proper tools, since bodily harm may be caused if the work is done improperly Maintenance of Awning/Hopper, and Casement and Dual Action Windows Locking Mechanism Adjustment Awning/hopper and casement windows normally include cam locks and keepers. When the sash does not close and lock properly, minor adjustments can be made. To adjust the keeper, simply unlock and open the window. The release of limit devices may require special keys to gain visual access to the keeper. Generally, adjustment to the keepers can be accomplished by simply unscrewing the fasteners a few turns. The keepers may have elongated holes allowing for repositioning of the hardware. Once repositioned, the fasteners can be tightened. If this procedure does not correct the problem, the hinges may need a minor adjustment. Tilt & turn hardware allows AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 24-1

363 the excentric cams mounted on the sash to be adjusted to increase or decrease the compression of the sales between the frame and sash Hinge Adjustment Hinges can be adjusted using the process mentioned for lock adjustment. Although numerous types of hinges are available, simply loosening the attachment screws and repositioning the sash can adjust many of them. Once the sash has been moved slightly, the fasteners can be tightened, and the sash can be checked for proper operation. Minor lubrication of the hinges may be necessary if the hardware has collected dirt and dust during the construction phase. A silicone spray can be used to lubricate the hinges, but should be used sparingly Limit Stop Engagement Make sure limit opening devices have been engaged and restrict operation when they are included on the job Maintenance of Sliding Windows Removal of the Sash When the sash of a sliding window is not operating properly, the sash can be removed to check for problems. Most sliding window sash sit on rollers in the sill track. To remove a sliding window sash, unlock and move the sash to the open position about 6". Once the sash is open, the installer can lift the sash as high as possible into the head member, and rotate the bottom of the sash toward the interior. This process will allow the sash to clear the window track. Some products are equipped with anti-lift devices that will restrict the sash from being raised. If the sash does not lift easily out of the sill track, inspect the window for these devices and remove them as required. Never force or pry on a sash to remove it from the frame. Once the sash clears the sill track, the window can be lowered and removed from the head track. Turn the sash over and check the roller housing to determine if the hardware is working properly. If the rollers are not working properly and need adjustment, follow the instructions below. If the rollers cannot be adjusted, minor lubrication may correct the problem. Always use lubrication materials sparingly. If the roller housing is plastic, consult the manufacturer for the proper lubrication. Silicone sprays can degrade the housing material Adjustment of the Rollers Adjustment of the rollers can usually be accomplished in one of two ways. Some roller housings are not adjustable, but can be raised or lowered by placing or removing spacers under the housing. To remove or add spacers, follow the directions above for sash removal. Then, remove the housing and make the necessary adjustments. Other rollers can be adjusted by a simple turn of a screw, which raises and lowers the sash. In many cases, the sash does not have to be removed. Always check for an access hole, which allows for adjustment of the rollers prior to removal of the sash. Holes will either be exposed to view or will be covered by a plastic hole plug. Holeplugs can be easily removed by gentle force, using your fingernails or a flat, thin spatula. Once you have gained access to the adjustment screw, simply turn the screw to adjust the sash, either higher or lower Cleaning of the Roller Track The roller track will often collect construction debris which will result in rough operation of the sash. If the sash does not glide smoothly across the sill, check the sill track for debris. To clean the roller track, simply use a AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 24-2

364 vacuum cleaner to pick up the loose material; then use a cloth or sponge and soap and water to finish the cleaning Maintenance of Sliding Doors Locking Mechanism Adjustment Sliding glass doors are very similar to sliding windows, with the exception of the locking mechanism provided. Locking mechanisms can be adjusted by turning the adjustment screws. To make adjustments to the lock, unlock and open the door until full access to the locking jamb is permitted. Inspect the lock for attachment and adjustment screws. To adjust the amount of throw (reach) the lock cam will have, simply rotate the adjustment screw, then close the door and throw the lock. Check the clearance again by trying to open the door while in the locked position. A limited amount of clearance should be allowed between the lock and the keeper Screen Adjustment Screens can be designed in a number of different ways. Regardless of whether the screen rolls on rollers at the sill, or is mounted to a roller housing in the head, minor adjustments can be made. If the screen has rollers at the sill, check the opposing ends of the screen frame for access holes, which will allow for adjustment of the screen. If the screen is mounted with rollers at the head, screen adjustment should be accomplished either from the ends, or from the face of the screen. By turning the adjustment screws, the screen will either raise or lower at each end to insure smooth operation Maintenance of Hinged Glass Doors Locking Mechanism Adjustment Check hinged glass doors for proper operation. This includes the swing of the door and proper locking. When the locking device does not operate smoothly, check to find out why and adjust the lock and/or keeper as required. The lock should operate with little pressure applied against the door when being closed Hinge Adjustment To check the hinge operation, open the door 90 degrees; and from a stationary position, swing the door closed using little force. If the door shows evidence of resistance to closing, some minor adjustment may be necessary. Depending on the type of hinge used, the installer may find room for adjustment in the hinge itself, or may need to simply tighten up on the screws penetrating the jamb condition Field Re-Glazing Techniques On occasion, the materials that are pre-glazed into the window or door units will get damaged. This may include broken glass, scratched panels or any number of other problems. As opposed to returning the entire frame for re-work, the installer may choose to re-glaze the unit. Always consult with the manufacturer for any specific instructions relative to disassembly of the framing, the re-glazing requirements, and the proper use of sealants, tapes and spacers, before initiating service work. The following is an explanation of some of the terms and techniques used for re-glazing in the field. In these examples, glass is used for explanation purposes; however, the same techniques apply to any smooth surface infill material. Note: Always use extreme caution when handling glass, as serious personal injury and damage can occur. Always use safety glasses and glass-handling-gloves when performing this type of work. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 24-3

365 Marine Glazing Marine glazing is common in hung and sliding windows. Marine glazing consists of a channel-shaped gasket that wraps completely around the glass unit (see Figure 24-1). Figure 24-1 Marine Glazing The way to tell if the product is marine glazed is to look for a gasket of consistent thickness on both the interior and exterior sides. Additionally, a joint at the top center of the unit can often be seen. Another sign is the lack of a glazing bead (i.e. the sash must be disassembled in order to remove the infill). To re-glaze a marine glazed sash, use the following techniques: 1. Remove any loose particles of glass from the sash, and/or secure the glass in place. If broken glass remains in the sash, apply tape over the glass surface to help stabilize it during sash removal. 2. Remove the operable sash. The method of removal will depend on the type of window. Consult with the manufacturer for specific cautions regarding hardware and sash removal. 3. Place the sash on a worktable, and use a screwdriver to remove any screws that were used to assemble the sash together. Generally, the screws will be at the top and bottom of each vertical member (see Figure 24-2). AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 24-4

366 Figure 24-2 Removing Screws and Gasket 4. Using a wood or nylon block and a rubber mallet, gently tap the rail off the marine glazing and glass. Remove the two vertical members first, then the horizontal members. Remember how these materials came off, so they can be reinstalled over another piece of glass in the same manner. Once the frame is removed, the marine glazing gasket can be taken completely off the glass. Check the marine glazing gasket for any remaining glass particles or debris that might be embedded in the gasket. 5. Re-install the same marine glazing gasket over the new piece of glass (must be the same size and thickness), reversing the steps used to remove the gasket. Make sure to check the glass to determine which is the top/bottom and which is the interior/exterior before reassembling the sash. Start at the top center of the glass, at the splice location, and complete installation around the entire perimeter. Don t over stretch the gasket. Check the horizontal members for weep holes, and make sure they are clear of any debris. Center the horizontal members in place and over the gasket/glass, and tap them into place with the rubber mallet. Tap the vertical members in place, making sure the intersection with the coping of the horizontal lines up properly. Secure the verticals in place and re-check the corner joinery to make sure everything lines up. Apply the fasteners back into the assembly holes. Do not over tighten. Note: Fastener lengths may vary; be sure to place them back into the correct hole. 6. Once the sash is re-assembled, check the marine glazing gasket to ensure it is lying flat, centered within the frame and that there are no distortions in the gasket. 7. Examine the sash joinery and seal any excess gaps/joints with matching sealant. 8. Re-assemble the sash to the frame, making sure the hardware is applied properly, the sash is secured back into position and that the sash works properly. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 24-5

367 Wet-Glazing/Tape-Glazing The term wet-glazing/tape-glazing has to do with the way the glass is glazed (or sealed) into the sash. Wetglazing typically involves the use of sealant on the exterior side of the sash, while tape-glazing uses a foam or butyl tape. Both typically involve a gasket and glazing bead on the interior side (see Figure 24-3). Figure 24-3 Wet Glazing System The following procedures are relevant to interior glazed units. If the units are exterior glazed, reverse the process (i.e. the position from which the work is performed). Removal of a wet/tape glazed product will require access to the exterior in order to cut away the sealant or tape. On fixed lites, this will require someone to go to the exterior, while another person stays on the interior to help secure the glass. Use the following procedures for removal and replacement of the glass: 1. First, remove the interior glazing beads from the sash. Start by removing the shorter pieces (typically the pieces that butt against the opposing beads). Check the gasket in the glazing bead to find out if it is removable. If it is removable (wedge type), take all of the gaskets out before proceeding. This will reduce the pressure against the glazing bead. If the gasket is not removable (bulb type), you should be able to compress the glazing bead toward the exterior with minimal effort. Use a putty knife and rubber mallet to remove the glazing bead. Try to pry in and up on the glazing bead (directly at the metal to metal joint), while tapping the putty knife with the mallet. Use caution and avoid damaging the glazing beads and gaskets, as they will be reused to install the new piece of glass. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 24-6

368 2. If the glass has been sealed with a heel bead (see Section ), cut through the bead with a utility knife along the glass edge. 3. From the exterior, using a utility knife or other appropriate tool, cut through the wet/tape glazing material until the glass is free around the entire perimeter. When cutting the seal, apply moderate pressure against the glass, pushing it toward the interior to help ease the cutting process. Make sure there is an assistant on the interior to keep the glass from falling out of the opening on the interior. 4. Once the glass is removed, re-check the opening and prepare it for the new piece of glass. Remove the setting blocks and make sure they are saved to put back in the same position when installing the new glass. If a heel bead was used, remove all residual tape/sealant material on the exterior glazing leg and around the perimeter. Clean the entire area with an approved solvent such as Isopropyl Alcohol or Mineral Spirits (consult the sealant supplier before choosing a solvent) before applying any new glazing tape or sealant. Check to make sure the weep holes are clear of any debris. 5. Depending on whether the glass was wet-glazed or tape-glazed, use one of the following techniques for re-glazing. Make sure the glass is properly cleaned before glazing it into the frame. Wet Glazing (Gunnable Sealant) Apply spacers of an appropriate size and material on the exterior leg of the frame to keep the glass from contacting the glazing leg (see Figure 24-4). Figure 24-4 Spacer Application for Wet Glazing AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 24-7

369 Apply a consistent bead of sealant to the glazing leg around the entire perimeter of the frame. Re-install the setting blocks and edge blocks back into the proper position. Consult the manufacturer, IGMA or GANA standards for setting block locations if unsure where they go. Using a piece of glass that is the same size and thickness set the glass in place in the sealant. Make sure the glass is evenly spaced into the opening. If a heel bead was previously used, reapply it now in accordance with the heel bead application instructions in Section If the glazing bead was applied with a wedge gasket, apply it after the glazing bead is installed. If a bulb gasket was used, it should be pre-applied to the glazing bead. Re-apply the glazing beads starting with the longest pieces first, followed by the shorter pieces. Use a rubber mallet to snap them into position. Tape Glazing (Foam or Butyl) Apply the tape (with protective backing on) into position on the glazing leg around the entire perimeter of the frame. Make sure the tape is parallel with the outside edge (exposed surface) of the glazing leg, and positioned in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions. The protective backing is to remain on until after the glass is ready to be installed. Make sure that the corners of the tape are squarely cut, and butt to each other completely. Do not overlap or stretch the tape to make it fit. Joints should occur at the corners only. Apply a compatible sealant (as recommended by the sealant supplier) to the joints in the tape at the corners. Re-install the setting blocks and edge blocks back into the proper position. Consult the manufacturer, IGMA or GANA standards for setting block locations if unsure where they go. Remove the protective backing and set the glass in place onto the tape. Make sure the glass is evenly spaced in the opening before setting it into position. If a heel bead was previously used, re-apply it now in accordance with the heel bead application instructions in Section Re-apply the glazing beads starting with the longest pieces first, followed by the shorter pieces. Use a rubber mallet to snap them into position. If the glazing bead was applied with a wedge gasket, apply it after the glazing bead is installed. If a bulb gasket was used, it should be pre-applied to the glazing bead Dry Glazing The term dry glazing typically involves the use of gaskets on both sides of the glass. In the case of dry glazing, the exterior gasket is usually a pre-set gasket, while the interior gasket involves the use of glazing beads with coextruded fins orand a wedge gasket (see Figure 24-5). AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 24-8

370 Figure 24-5 Dry Glazing System for Aluminum (left) and Vinyl (right) Removal of a dry glazed product can typically be done from the interior unless the system is exterior glazed, which would require the installer to perform the work on the exterior. The following procedures are relevant to interior glazed units. If the units are exterior glazed, reverse the process (i.e., the position from which the work is performed). Use the following procedures for removal and replacement of the glass: 1. Remove the interior glazing beads from the sash. Start by removing the shorter pieces (typically the pieces that butt against the opposing beads). Check the gasket in the glazing bead to find out if it is removable. If it is removable (wedge type), take all of the gaskets out before proceeding. This will reduce the pressure against the glazing bead. If the gasket is not removable (bulb type), you should be able to compress the glazing bead toward the exterior with minimal effort. Use a putty knife and rubber mallet to remove the glazing bead. Try to pry in and up on the glazing bead (directly at the metal to metal or vinyl joint), while tapping the putty knife with the mallet. Use caution and avoid damaging the glazing beads and gaskets, as they will be re-used to install the new piece of glass. 2. If the glass has been sealed with a heel bead (see Section ), cut through the bead with a utility knife along the glass edge. 3. If the glass is still in one piece, use a rigid/wide blade putty knife at the top of the unit to help pry the glass free from the exterior gaskets. Glass suction cups can also be used to help release the glass. (Never apply a suction cup to a broken piece of glass.) 4. With the glass removed, re-check the opening and prepare it for the new piece of glass. Remove the setting blocks and make sure they are saved to put back in the same position when installing the new glass. AAMA CIM-XX, DRAFT #X, DATED X/X/15 PAGE 24-9